Home

TextMaker 2006 User Guide

1. OLE objects Note The use of OLE objects is possible only with the Windows version of TextMaker With TextMaker for Windows you can embed objects created with other applications drawings pictures etc in your document An example From TextMaker you can use Object gt New OLE Object to start the Windows Paint program and then draw something When you exit Paint the drawing appears in the TextMaker document It is embedded in the document Advantage To edit the drawing in the TextMaker document all you have to do is double click on it Paint is then restarted automatically When you have finished editing and closed Paint your changes are imported by TextMaker For this to work the application invoked from TextMaker must support OLE OLE stands for Object Linking and Embedding The object that is imported from the other application into TextMaker is called an OLE object As you prefer you can either embed an OLE object in a document or insert it in the form of a link to a file m With embedding the OLE object itself is held permanently within the TextMaker document in the form in which it was initially acquired from the other program It exists in this form only in the document E Linking works in a similar way except that in this case the OLE object the drawing picture etc exists as a separate file You insert into the TextMaker document only a link to this file If you subsequently use ano
2. Tip With tables you can simulate sophisticated formatting for which the HTML format makes no explicit provisions For example you can produce double columned text by placing the text in a table with one row and two columns Horizontal lines With the command Object gt New Horizontal Line you can insert a horizontal line into the text Such lines are often found in HTML documents but they are also employed in normal documents for example when a dividing line is needed To insert a horizontal line position the text cursor in the text line where the line is desired and invoke the command Object gt New Horizontal Line The line is now inserted By default it extends all the way from the left to the right margin Changing the line s properties To change the way the line is rendered select the line by clicking on it for example and invoke the command Object gt Properties Tip This command can also be invoked by double clicking on the line A dialog box appears and presents the following options Width of line The width of horizontal lines is normally specified as a percentage of the page width By default the width of the line is set to 100 percent thus the line extends all the way from the left to the right margin If you change this setting to 50 percent for example the line will be shortened to half the width of the page Alternatively you can enable the Absolute option an
3. An application example A tennis center wants to write invoices for the rentals of its courts The computer should calculate the total amount and add 16 tax Such a receipt would be written more or less in this much abbreviated form INVOICE hours 77 2 Total 2 72 16 tax 572 22 Amount due 77 2 Question marks appear at those places that must be filled by hand after calculating the amounts with a pocket calculator TextMaker takes away this labor Let s assume that the tennis pros have played for 2 hours and that each hour costs 10 00 plus tax 1 Delete the question mark before hours and enter HOURS 2 there with Insert gt Calculation The same goes here First you assign the variable PRICE a value of 10 secondly you cause the content of this variable 10 to appear in the text To the right in place of the question marks after enter the calculation PRICE 10 The same goes here First you assign the variable PRICE a value of 10 secondly you cause the content of this variable 10 to appear in the text The formula that you have to enter in place of the question marks after Total is TOTAL HOURS PRICE The result of the calculation HOURS times PRICE has now been assigned to the variable TOTAL and this result is shown in the text What matters here is that if you later change the value of HOURS or PRICE the content of the variable TOTAL will change accordi
4. Sample from an index with First letter headings 378 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker The keywords appear in alphabetical order At the right of each keyword TextMaker inserts the numbers of the page s on which it occurs If the Use chapter number option is checked in the Generate Index dialog the chapter number together with a separating dash is added before each page reference Q Quantum mechanics 4 78 R Raster 5 102 8 163 Registration card 1 11 Right arrow key 1 20 Roman 7 151 Sample from an index with chapter numbers Naturally it makes sense to use this option only when you have divided the document into multiple chapters with the Insert gt Break gt Chapter break command see section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 109 Additional information m You will find information about Updating references in section Updating tables of references beginning on page 387 m You will find information about Editing and Formatting references in section Editing and formatting tables of references beginning on page 388 Tables of contents A table of contents TOC is a list of all the headings in the document each with a page number Unlike an index a table of contents does not depend on a list of entries that you have to create yourself prior to its creation Your document merely has to be outlined You can review the outlining
5. Pages 1 1 C Reverse order Pages to print Al selected x The dialog box for File gt Print Color In the Print dialog box you can determine how many copies and which pages are to be printed By default one copy of all pages is printed So confirm with OK Paragraph alignment The way TextMaker arranges text between the margins is called paragraph alignment You change the paragraph alignment with the command Format gt Paragraph A dialog box appears Open the dialog s Alignment list and choose the desired paragraph alignment By the way this can be done faster with the Formatting toolbar which contains four icons that you can click on with the mouse to change the alignment Flush left Flush right Centered Justified We ll now center the company name To do this move the text cursor to the front of any character within the company name Escher amp Sons Architects and click on the icon for Centered in the Formatting toolbar 46 e The TextMaker Tour User Manual TextMaker Note Paragraph format actions in other words all format actions that you can carry out with the command Format gt Paragraph always affect complete paragraphs So if you want to modify the paragraph format of a single paragraph you don t need to select it first Simply move the text cursor to any position within the paragraph On the other hand if you want to modify the format
6. To move from a text frame back to the normal body text click anywhere in the body text To move from the body text back to the text frame click in the frame No special action is required to insert a text frame over existing body text this text is automatically reformatted in such a way that it flows around the new frame Changing the properties of text frames To edit the properties of a text frame first select the frame To do this click on the border that surrounds it or if you are in Object mode simply click on the frame Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to gain access to the command s dialog Tip When you are using Object mode you can also invoke this dialog by double clicking on the text frame The settings you can make in this dialog are described below Layout Format Filling Lines Shadow 3D and Properties property sheets The first seven property sheets are present for almost all types of objects The settings they allow you to make are summarized below m Layout On this property sheet you can change the position and outside margins of the frame and specify how the body text should flow around it See the section Object properties Layout property sheet beginning on page 223 m Format Here you can change the size of the frame See the section Object properties Format property sheet beginning on page 228 m Filling Here you can change the filling See the sectio
7. Tip Whenever you want to see a document s cross references and the targets to which they refer you can check the Display Field Names option on the View property sheet of the File gt Properties dialog Then the cross references will be displayed in a form in which their types and targets are visible for example Reference Bookmark Page name_of_bookmark Updating cross references The values displayed in the text by cross references behave just like the values assumed by all other kinds of fields When inserted these values reflect the current state of the referenced text elements but they are not permanently fixed Consider this example if you move the target of a cross reference to another page the page number displayed by the cross reference does not change immediately it continues to reflect the original position of the target However when you print the document TextMaker automatically updates all its fields including this cross reference to reflect the latest state of the document Thus when you print the document you can be sure that all cross references will be correct As needed you can also update the fields of a document manually by invoking the Extras gt Update Fields command keyboard shortcut F9 F9 All fields and calculations will then be brought up to date 392 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker Invalid references If you delete the target of a cross reference
8. 218 Rotating and flipping objects cceceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeteneeeeees 221 Aligning and distributing frames cccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 221 Duplicating ODjCCtS 2 eee eect anaran E ESAn iK ARNAI EAE DENE 222 Changing the properties of objects esseeseeeseesee esere 222 Frames advanced functions c cceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeeeeeees 235 FIICING OD OCHS A E A T E E 235 Changing the Z order of frames ecccceceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaeeneneeees 236 GrOUPING Did Ual EAE A 236 Changing the names Of ODJCCHS cccceseeeeseeteeeeeeeteeeeneeee 237 TOXUATAMOS ioar eaaa anaa aea aeaaaee aa AET ARA ANa ta kasia 238 Inserting text frAMES eee cee eects eeeeeee cee nernet resrnsernsern neen nsennsenn 238 Changing the properties of text frames 0 ccccsseeeeeesteeeeeees 239 Linking text frames cece ee eeceeeececeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeeeeeeteaeeteaaeseeneeees 241 Pict re frames 4 4 feecieaitr naaie ai ananin anran een a dib taka eee 242 Inserting picture frAMES cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeestaeeeeneeeeaes 242 Changing the properties of picture frames ccccceceesseeeeeeeee 243 OLE object frames iii iaciv Ascaris en eni as aia aa aeaa cash nsadnesnn eer 246 Inserting OLE object frames cccccccccceceeeeeeeeceeneeesseeseneeeeaes 246 Changing the properties of OLE object frames cceeee 247 DRAWINGS A O T T ouiaca sane
9. TextMaker and MS Word in several versions Important The Word format is not able to accommodate all the features of TextMaker So if you save a document that you have created in TextMaker in Word format certain formats and functions could be lost Accordingly it is usually best to use the default TextMaker setting Saving group box You can make settings that affect the way documents are saved in the Saving group box m Create backup copies Optionally whenever you save a document TextMaker will first create a backup copy of the last saved version in a file with the name extension bak So if you save the document letter tmd the existing letter tmd file is first renamed letter bak and then the edited document is saved under the name letter tmd If you don t want this behavior disable the option 458 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Tip Normally you should not disable this option Otherwise if you should inadvertently save a document after making changes that you didn t mean to make you would have no recourse to a backup copy of the original If the option had not been disabled you could restore the original simply by copying the BAK file to the TMD file Ask for summary information when saving When you enable this option a dialog box will appear automatically the first time you save a new document to enable you to enter some additional information about
10. Note This process also removes the Hidden and Protected property of characters Accordingly text that was previously hidden becomes visible and text that was previously protected can again be edited 72 e Character formatting User Manual TextMaker Paragraph formatting You specify the formats for paragraphs with the Format gt Paragraph command Some of the most common paragraph formats include Indents Line spacing Spacing before after the paragraph Paragraph alignment left right centered or flush Hyphenation automatic Character format changes of font text style etc that apply to the entire paragraph E Tab stops Besides these TextMaker provides the following additional paragraph formats Bulleted and numbered lists Drop caps Shading Borders Outline level Forced breaks before paragraphs page breaks column breaks Paragraph control keeping specified paragraphs together etc Additionally you can use non breaking spaces for keeping two words on the same line Paragraph formats always apply to complete paragraphs Changes to paragraph formatting affect the entire paragraph in which the text cursor is positioned If you select several paragraphs all the selected paragraphs are affected Changing the paragraph formatting You can modify the paragraph formatting in either of two different ways m To change the formatting of paragraphs after they have been typed select the paragraph
11. Note When you delete a numbered list the numbering is removed from all the paragraphs that were formatted with this list To rename a numbered list select it click on the Rename button and enter the new name Numbered headings Numbered lists can also be used for automatic numbering of all the headings in a document You can read more about this topic in section Numbering headings beginning on page 371 Numbering with Auto numbers You can create automatic enumerations not only with the paragraph numbering functions described on the previous pages but also manually by inserting an Auto number field anywhere in the text The auto number is a field that symbolizes a number in a series The first instance of the auto number in a document always yields the number 1 the next instance yields 2 etc If you insert an additional auto number into the document each successive instance of the auto number will be increased by one If you delete a segment of text that contains an auto number all the following auto numbers will be reduced by one To insert an auto number do the following 1 Invoke the Insert gt Field command 2 Select the Auto number field from the Field type list 3 Click on Insert The auto number appears immediately in the text Resetting the auto number If you need to use auto numbers to create several separate enumerations in a single document you can do so b
12. 274 e Forms User Manual TextMaker a 3D effect Available only for groupboxes If you check this option the groupbox is drawn with a 3D effect You can also specify the character formatting font size color etc for the text Forms advanced functions This concluding section of the chapter on forms describes some forms functions for advanced users Changing the tab order As mentioned earlier in the section Filling out forms you can jump back and forth between forms objects with the 11 F11 key F11 F11 takes you to the next forms object and Shift F11 Shift F11 takes you to the previous one In Forms mode you have the alternative of using Tab Tab and Shift Tab Shift Tab to perform these functions The order in which you jump among the forms objects can be specified with the Object gt Tab Order To set the tab order invoke this command and select from the list of Objects the forms object whose position in the tab order you want to change Then click on one of the arrow buttons to the right of the list to raise move the object to a lower or higher position in the list The position of the object in the tab order changes accordingly Protecting forms objects In certain situations it is desirable for forms to contain forms objects that cannot be modified in Forms mode for example text frames containing explanatory material This objective can be realized by checking the Locked option in a form
13. The name can contain a maximum of 20 characters and may not begin with a numeral 4 Click on OK to set the bookmark You can set as many bookmarks as you wish in each document Using bookmarks To return to a bookmarked position in the text do the following 1 Invoke the Edit gt Go tocommand or press F5 F5 2 Select Bookmark from the Go to list 3 A list of all bookmarks in the document is displayed Select the desired bookmark from the list or enter its name manually 4 Confirm with OK TextMaker immediately moves the text cursor to the position at which the bookmark was set 144 e Searching and replacing User Manual TextMaker Deleting bookmarks When a bookmark is no longer needed you can delete it using the following procedure 1 Invoke the Insert gt Bookmark command 2 Select the bookmark you want to delete from the list or enter its name manually 3 Click on Delete Note When you delete a passage of text containing a bookmark the bookmark is deleted automatically The Go to Command The command Edit gt Go to keyboard shortcut F5 F5 or Ctrl G Ctrl G is used to jump to a specific position in a document to a specific page or bookmark for example To jump to a specific page do the following 1 Invoke the Edit gt Go to command 2 Select Page from the list of Go to options 3 Enter the desired page number The page is then immediately brought into view 4 Cl
14. beginning on page 109 Tip Using the header and footer toolbar TextMaker provides a useful aid for editing headers and footers the header and footer toolbar REE SRRaSUOBDP The header and footer toolbar This toolbar appears automatically when you position the text cursor in a header or footer unless it has been disabled If it is not displayed invoke the View gt Toolbars command and click in the check box for Header toolbar to re enable it This toolbar contains the following icon buttons from left to right m Change the properties of the current header or footer see section Changing the properties of headers and footers beginning on page 103 m Change the page format invokes the File gt Page Setup command Insert a header or go to the existing header Insert a footer or go to the existing footer Delete the current header or footer Insert the page number as a field Insert the page count as a field Insert the date the document was last printed as a field Insert the time the document was last printed as a field Insert other fields invokes the Insert gt Field command Go to the previous header or footer Go to the next header or footer Switch between header and footer Exit header or footer position the text cursor back in the text Tip If you point with the mouse to one of the icons without clicking a text box appears giving the icon s function
15. cc ceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeetteeeeeenaeeeeeenaes 114 Styles 115 Character Styles iat aeaa lahat ete eraa aaa athe Mati revecll 115 Creating character styles cccceesceceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeneneeees 116 Applying character Styles pirssi ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaees 117 Modifying character StyleS c ccceccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 118 The scope of character styles eccceceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 119 The character style Normal cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneaeees 119 Creating linked character styles ccccceceeeeeseeseeeeeeteeeeeneeees 119 Paragraph Sieso htcctetesivede AE ER e EE SAR EAEE S 121 Creating paragraph styles ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeneneeees 122 Applying paragraph Styles isese leire eskae kkran i kS 123 Modifying paragraph styles cecececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 124 The scope of paragraph StyleS cececceeeeesseeceeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeees 125 The paragraph style Normal eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeees 125 Creating linked paragraph styles 125 Document templates ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeees 126 Creating document templates cccccccceeeeeseeteeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 127 Applying document templates 0 0 0 ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 128 Modifying document templates ccccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeneeeees 128 The document template Normal
16. Once locked master page objects can be neither moved nor resized when the document is edited in normal view They can be modified only in master view Note This setting affects only the current document The beginning page to which the master page should be applied By default the master page is applied to a document or chapter beginning on the first page If you don t want this invoke Format gt Chapter and change the Starts on page setting in the Master page group box Here enter the number of the first page to which the master page should be applied Different left and right master pages As you already learned in the section on headers and footers it is possible to set up different headers and footers for the left and right facing pages of books etc Thus it should come as no surprise that you can set up whole master pages that differ for left and right facing pages 108 e Page formatting User Manual TextMaker To enable setting up different master pages and by extension different headers and footers for left and right facing pages proceed as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Chapter 2 Check the Facing pages option Now whenever you edit the master page for any left page of a document or chapter the master page for the right pages will remain untouched and vice versa Accordingly you can set up different master pages for left and right facing pages Dividing a document into chapters By default the page fo
17. 2 Under Search for enter the text for which you want to search 3 As necessary check the Options for the search see section Expanded search functions beginning on page 140 4 Click on the Search button to begin the search When TextMaker finds the search text it brings it within the document window and selects it You can then do either of the following A You can click on Search again to proceed to the next occurrence of the search text B You can click on Close to end the search and close the search dialog You can not only search for a specific text but also replace it with something else You will read about this in the next section Replacing Sometimes you want to do more than just find a term in the text You want an easy way of exchanging it for another term The command Edit gt Replace keyboard shortcut Cirl H Ctri H is provided to meet this requirement Proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Edit gt Replace command 138 e Searching and replacing User Manual TextMaker 2 Under Search for enter the text for which you want to search 3 Under Replace with enter text that is to replace the search text 4 As necessary check the Options for the search see section Expanded search functions beginning on page 140 5 Click on the Search button to begin the search When TextMaker finds the search text it brings it within the document window and selects it You can then do any of
18. An example You want to turn the following list of addresses into a table Peter Miller 24 Main Street 12345 Whitneyville AK Thomas Meyer 1733 University Drive Apt 7a 54321 Knoxville TN When you invoke Table gt Convert Text to Table select semicolon as the Separator you will get the following result 24 Main Street 12345 Whitneyville AK 1733 University Drive Apt 7a 54321 Knoxville TN Options The options in the dialog box for this command are as follows E Rows and Columns Normally you don t have to worry about these settings Provided you specify the separator correctly TextMaker can determine the number of rows and columns the resulting table should have automatically and fill in these fields with the appropriate values However you can enter your own values E Separator This is the most important setting Here you specify the character TextMaker is to use to recognize the separate entries on each line of text You can choose among the following Paragraph break each entry is in its own paragraph Tabs the entries are separated by tabs 188 e Tables User Manual TextMaker Semicolon the entries are separated by semicolons Besides one of these you can choose any other character for the separator by entering it in the User defined field You should use this field if your entries are delimited by slashes or commas for example It is also possible to enter multiple characters here No
19. Glasgow Subject General Information Author Sean Cavanaugh National Board of Tourism Keywords Scotland Glasgow European Capital of Culture Description General tourist information accommodations places of interest transportation etc Last changed Donald Greene on 12 5 2005 15 20 cme Make the desired entries and confirm with OK Tip Using the file manager see the next section you can search for documents based on the contents of their summaries For example you can have the file manager find all documents on a specific subject Automatic prompt for summary information when saving At your option you can have TextMaker prompt you to fill in the document summary whenever you save a newly created document To enable this function invoke the command Extras gt Preferences switch to the Files property sheet and enable the Ask for summary information when saving option Now each time you save a new document for the first time the dialog box for the entry of summary information will appear The file manager The file manager displays a list of documents from one or more folders and lets you open print delete or view any document with a click of the mouse 430 e Document management User Manual TextMaker You start the file manager with the command File gt File Manager or with the keyboard shortcut F12 F12 File Manager ioj x Flename C d ble a O C Docs Scotland B amp B tmd
20. In the next step you tell TextMaker what database you want to use as the document s bibliography database In addition you specify the fields of the database from which TextMaker is to obtain abbreviations for use in references author names and titles for the sources To do this proceed as follows 1 Open the document to which you want to assign the bibliography database you created in step 1 or start a new document 2 Invoke Extras gt Bibliography gt Bibliography Settings 3 Click on the File button 4 A file dialog appears There navigate to the folder containing the bibliography database select the database and confirm with OK 5 You still have to specify the database fields that contain the abbreviations shortcuts author names and titles for the sources To do this make the appropriate selections from the three dropdown lists in the Settings group box 6 If required you can also specify the form in which the references that you will insert in step 3 see that step should be displayed by setting options in the Reference Style group box 7 When you are satisfied with all the settings confirm with OK TextMaker now knows what database contains information about the sources for this document and how this information is distributed over the database s fields So you can proceed to step 3 Step 3 Inserting references to sources When you have completed steps 1 and 2 you can insert bibliography
21. Saves all changes made to the database and exits the database module Search button Invokes a search dialog with which you can search for specific data more precisely than you can with a filter see above You will find information about this dialog in section Searching the database beginning on page 309 316 e Database User Manual TextMaker Find next button Displays the next record containing the search term Append button Adds a new record to the database List Form With the options List and Form you can switch between list view several data records in sequence and form view one complete record in detail Importing individual addresses What is a word processor most often called on to do To quickly write letters or faxes You have purchased TextMaker precisely for such routine work and you will find it to be an especially efficient helper All you need for such tasks is a suitable document template that is a document template to which an address database is assigned to and in which database fields are inserted Several such templates for letters memos etc and a suitable database come with TextMaker When you start a new document with File gt New and select such a template TextMaker automatically displays the database Page through it to find the desired recipient and click on Insert The rest happens automatically TextMaker replaces the database fields in the template with
22. Scrollbars and the text cursor Note that the text cursor does not move relative to the text when you shift the viewable segment with the scrollbars but remains at its original position However after scrolling you can click on any position in the text to place the text cursor at this position Using the keyboard You can shift the viewable segment also with keys on the keyboard by pressing the arrow keys in combination with the Alt key Use for example Alt 4 Alt J to shift the viewable segment down for one line Deleting text Everyone makes typing mistakes now and then and would like to delete them There are numerous ways to do this in TextMaker Deleting characters To delete a character use the Backspace key _ situated above the Enter key 1 This key deletes the character to the left of the text cursor The following text moves back automatically You can also delete in the opposite direction The Del Del Delete key does this It deletes the character not to the left but to the right of the text cursor Deleting words If you place the text cursor before the first letter of a word and then press Ctrl Del Ctrl Del the word is deleted If the text cursor is positioned in the middle of the word this key combination deletes only the letters following the cursor to the end of the word Deleting a carriage return You can also remove a carriage return inserted by mistake Test it Type a multi line paragra
23. Tip Duplicating an object is even faster with the mouse when you drag an object while holding down the CtrlyCtrl key you obtain a duplicate of the object However this works only with frames and drawings Changing the properties of objects An object s properties include its size margins etc The Object gt Properties command makes all such properties accessible for editing in one place To change an object s properties first select the object with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to gain access to the associated dialog Tip For most types of objects double clicking on the object provides a quick alternative way to invoke this dialog The dialog contains several property sheets You can switch among them by clicking on the index tabs at their upper edges 222 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker Object properties Layout property sheet On the Layout property sheet you can set the outside margins for any type of object For frames and drawings you can in addition modify the position and the text wrapping Horizontal Position group box These options are available only for frames and drawings Note You can change the positions of objects e g pictures that have been inserted directly into the text only by cutting them and then pasting them elsewhere With frames and drawings on the other hand you can specify here where the object should be
24. for With best regards Setting the language If you have installed several languages you can change the language for the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus as you like To be more exact m On the one hand with Extras gt Preferences you can set the default language The spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus normally use the default language On the other hand with the command Format gt Character any segment of text can at any time be formatted in another language In simple terms Normally the whole document is formatted in the default language and the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus use the default language set in the Preferences dialog However if you format a segment of text in another language the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus refer to that language in that case 280 e Language tools User Manual TextMaker Setting the default language By setting the default language you specify which language the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus will use by default So you should set your native language here To do this proceed as follows 1 Invoke Extras gt Preferences and switch to the Language property sheet 2 Choose the desired language from the Default Language list When you compose new documents they are automatically formatted in the default language If you never write documents in which other languages occur you don t need to concern yourself with any of what follows
25. 70 e Character formatting User Manual TextMaker 1 Select the text you want to protect 2 Invoke the command Format gt Character 3 Switch to the Font property sheet 4 Check the Protected option Text that is protected in this manner cannot be edited If you position the text cursor in such text and attempt to insert or delete something your attempts will have no effect Important note If you select a range of text that includes some protected text and delete the entire range the protected text included in the range will be deleted along with the other text Protection only prevents editing or deleting within the protected segment itself Removing the Protected property To remove the Protected property select the segment of protected text invoke the command Format gt Character and uncheck the Protected option on the Font property sheet The text segment is no longer protected and can be edited as normal Undoing character formatting You can always remove character formatting that you have applied To do so proceed as follows 1 Select the text segment of interest 2 Invoke Format gt Standard or press the corresponding shortcut keys Ctrl Space Ctr1 Space TextMaker now removes any character formatting that you have applied using Format gt Character or the Formatting toolbar Paragraph formatting and character formatting that is part of a paragraph style remains in place
26. AT London on gives 2 358 e Calculations in the text User Manual TextMaker AVG n1 n2 CHR n COUNT n1 n2 DAY d DTON IF INT n LEFT t n LENO LOWER returns the average value of the values contained in the cells of a table in a rectangular region with coordinates n upper left corner and n2 lower right corner The coordinates must be preceded by signs Example AVG B2 C5 See also the section Table cells in calculations beginning on page 345 returns the character at position n in the character table CHR 65 gives A returns the number of values contained in the cells of a table in a rectangular region with coordinates n upper left corner and n2 lower right corner Only numbers are counted empty cells and cells containing text are not counted The coordinates must be preceded by signs Example COUNT B2 C5 See also the section Table cells in calculations beginning on page 345 returns the day part of date d as a number DAY 09 25 66 gives 25 converts the date d to a date serial number needed to calculate the difference in days between two dates DTON 11 12 06 DTON 10 20 06 gives 23 days IF condition valuel value2 returns value when the condition is true otherwise value2 Example IF GENDER F Dear Madam Dear Sir Value2 can also be omitted see the section Conditional text beginning on page 351 Value
27. Cer L Ctrl L m Flush right Cr R Ctri R mw Centered Ctrl Ctril E m Justified Ctrl Ctri J To modify the paragraph alignment select the paragraphs you want to change and press one of the keyboard shortcuts listed above Alternatively you can invoke the command Format gt Paragraph and select the desired paragraph alignment from the Alignment dropdown list Using the Formatting toolbar You can also set the paragraph alignment with the help of the Formatting toolbar To do so click on one of the following buttons Flush left 78 e Paragraph formatting User Manual TextMaker Flush right Centered Z Justified The alignment of the selected paragraph changes accordingly Hyphenation The purpose of hyphenation is to regularize the right margin of the text by breaking up long words that occur at the ends of lines In TextMaker hyphenation is completely automatic and takes effect as you type unless you have turned it off with the Format gt Paragraph command So you normally don t need to concern yourself with it at all You have only to make sure that you have set the correct language Naturally the hyphenator will not produce correct results if you allow it to separate for example German words according to English hyphenation rules Setting the default language Important For the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus to function correctly you must set the default language to the language w
28. Formatting text in another language In the last section you learned how to set the default language that TextMaker is to use in the normal case for the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus Beyond that you can format any segments of text you like in another language for example if you want to use a German language citation in a document that is for the most part in English To do this proceed as follows 1 Select the text segment 2 Invoke the command Format gt Character 3 Choose the desired language from the Language list Now the spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus know that this segment of text is in another language and they produce the appropriate results The Language list contains two entries with special meaning mu The language Default This is the default setting Normally all the documents you compose are formatted in the default language As you have learned in the preceding section the default language can be selected with Extras gt Preferences mu The language No language If you format a segment of text with No language it will be ignored by the spell checker In addition no hyphenation will be applied Application examples Some application examples in summary You write documents exclusively in your native language Simply set the desired standard language with Extras gt Preferences Language property sheet done You occasionally write documents in a foreig
29. Specify the width and spacing of the columns at Width and Spacing respectively If Equal column width is checked all columns will have the same width and spacing If this option is unchecked you can specify a different width and spacing for each column Height Let you specify the height of the columns Auto When you select this setting TextMaker automatically adjusts the height of the columns based on the length of the text so the text is fitted into columns of equal height Page height With this setting the column height is set equal to the page height independently of text length Fixed height When you select this setting you can specify a fixed column height E Spacing group box Here you can specify the amount of blank space TextMaker should insert above and below the multi column section Gutter line button With the help of the Gutter line button you can direct TextMaker to insert vertical lines between the columns of multi column text When you click it a dialog appears allowing you to select the desired line style thickness etc If you want to remove gutter lines simply select None as the Line style m Page break If this option is checked TextMaker inserts a page break at the beginning of the multi column section Restart auto numbers This option is does not affect the column layout but auto numbers If it is checked the Auto number field is reset to one in the current section You w
30. This will always guarantee that the original file cannot be changed When you have saved a form as a document template you can use File gt New to create new documents based on the content of this template without opening the template itself for editing You will find additional information about using document templates in the section Document templates beginning on page 126 Calculating with forms objects You can reference the contents of forms objects and perform calculations on these contents using the Insert gt Calculation command For example the formula Textfieldl Value 2 references the current numeric value in text field TextField1 and multiplies it by two You will find additional information about this topic in the section Objects in calculations beginning on page 348 278 e Forms User Manual TextMaker Language tools TextMaker has always distinguished itself by providing especially powerful language tools spell checker thesaurus etc TextMaker s language tools include the following functions E Language selection The default language for spell checker hyphenator and thesaurus can be set with the command Extras gt Preferences In addition with Format gt Character you can designate a segment of text to be in any other language you like You can do this for example when you use a German language citation in a document you are writing in English Spell checking The spell checker
31. To change the size of an object select it with a mouse click and then drag any of the red lines that mark the borders of the object or the handles at the comers of these lines until the object is the desired size E For frames and drawings it is also possible the change the outside margins The inside solid lines bordering the object are for changing the object s size When you drag one of these lines the object is enlarged or reduced accordingly The outside dashed lines are for changing the object s outside margins When you drag one of these lines only the margins are changed Preventing changes in an object s position and size By locking an object you can prevent it from being moved or resized with the mouse or the keyboard arrow keys To lock an object first select it Then invoke Object gt Properties switch to the Properties property sheet and check the Locked option Now the object can no longer be moved with the mouse and its size cannot be changed by dragging its border Nor is it any longer possible to move the object 220 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker with the keyboard arrow keys The only way to change the object s position or size is to enter values in the Object gt Properties dialog box By unchecking the Locked option you can re enable changes to the object s position and size with the mouse Rotating and flipping objects Note Rotation and flipping can be performed
32. With this function you can delete only those words that you yourself have supplied to TextMaker Words in the dictionaries that come with the program cannot be removed Every language has its own user dictionary You can select the dictionary to be edited from the dropdown Language list Thesaurus With the command Extras gt Thesaurus you can have TextMaker search for a word s synonyms terms with equivalent or similar meanings This function can help you express yourself precisely and avoid repetition Even if you command a vocabulary that is larger than average the thesaurus can usually find alternatives to your words Naturally this function is especially useful with foreign languages Using the thesaurus To activate the thesaurus type a word or move the text cursor to a word you have already typed Then invoke the command Extras gt Thesaurus Thesaurus xi Word Synonyms house hd Meaning TextMaker now searches for the word in the Thesaurus If the word is not found words with similar spellings are presented for selection Otherwise synonyms for the word are shown in the Synonyms list Note If a word has several meanings several items are presented in the Meaning list First choose the meaning of interest to you then view the corresponding synonyms in the Synonyms list Now with a mouse click you can select a word from the Synonyms list Then you can choose one of the following fun
33. You can also select paragraph styles from the list box displayed at the far left in the Formatting toolbar Even faster If you assigned a keyboard shortcut to the format style you can apply the style even faster simply select the desired paragraphs and press the assigned key combination The formatting of the selected paragraphs is immediately changed to the formatting specified for the paragraph style The Next Style option or Which style should be applied to the next paragraph Whenever you close a paragraph by pressing the Enter key that paragraph s style is automatically carried over to the next paragraph This is the normal case however it is sometimes inconvenient For example headings usually consist of just a single line followed by normal text and when you have typed a heading you usually want to revert to the Normal style Therefore for every paragraph style you can specify a style to be applied to the next paragraph once the current paragraph is closed by pressing To do this select the desired following style in the Next Style list box according to our example it would be the Normal style Modifying paragraph styles Naturally you can modify paragraph styles whenever you like Important Changing a paragraph style automatically changes the formatting of all paragraphs to which that style is applied However this automatic reformatting is limited for any parag
34. and value2 can be of any type also for example numeric returns the number n truncated to integer form without rounding so that the fractional value after the decimal point is suppressed the formula INT 3 90 would give the result 3 returns the first n characters in the text string t LEFT TextMaker 4 gives Text returns the length of text string t LEN fish gives 4 converts the text string t to lowercase LOWER James gives james LTRIM t MAX n1 n2 MIN n1 n2 MONTH d NTOD n POW n1 n2 PROD n1 n2 RIGHT t n ROUND n1 n2 RTRIM SQRT n 360 e Calculations in the text returns text string t with all leading space characters removed LTRIM Text gives Text returns the maximum value of the values contained in the cells of a table in a rectangular region with coordinates n1 upper left corner and n2 lower right corner The coordinates must be preceded by signs Example MAX B2 C5 See also the section Table cells in calculations beginning on page 345 returns the minimum value of the values contained in the cells of a table in a rectangular region with coordinates n upper left corner and n2 lower right corner The coordinates must be preceded by signs Example MIN B2 C5 See also the section Table cells in calculations beginning on page 345 returns the month part of date d as a number MONTH 09 25 66 g
35. gt Save to save the modified template Of course you could also save the template under another name using File gt Save as if you did not want to overwrite the original The document template Normal tmv The document template normal tmv has a special significance it is the default template for new documents It contains no text and only the default Normal character and paragraph styles along with some styles for headings Accordingly the Normal tmv template is a suitable basis for creating a completely new template starting from scratch Important As a rule you should not modify the default template Normal tmv Nevertheless if you want to do this you ought to be aware that it contains the default values for page paragraph and character formatting as well as many additional defaults Any modification will affect all documents that you subsequently create new on the basis of the default template Normal tmv If you want to change a default format for example the typeface so that the format will be applied by default to all documents that you create in the future on the basis of the Normal tmv template open the template make the change in this case to the character formatting for the Normal paragraph style and save the template You can also choose a template other than Normal tmv to be the default for new files To do this invoke File gt New select the desired template and click on Set De
36. gt Search again keyboard shortcut F3 F3 Notes on search terms Date fields If you want to search for date entries in data records you must enter them in the format MM DD YYYY so for e g September 25 1966 you must type 09 25 1966 Memo fields Memo fields cannot be searched Wildcard searches with By entering one or more question marks within the search term you can widen the search The question mark represents any character Thus in a search for Me er for example Meier and Meyer will be found Options in the Search dialog You can modify the search with the options in the search dialog in the following ways Option Description In Field list Select All fields here when all the fields in the database are to be searched Alternatively you can select a specific field when only this field is to be searched Search from beginning If this switch is activated TextMaker begins the search at the first data record thus it will search the complete database Otherwise the search begins with the active data record Search backwards If this switch is activated the database is searched in reverse record order Case sensitive If this switch is activated the search engine takes account of the case of the characters in the search term Thus in a search for House only House would be found not HOUSE house etc Search only selected records If this switch is ac
37. in inch 1 in equals 2 54 cm pt point 72 pt equals 1 in pi Pica for characters For example if you typed 5 08 cm for the left margin TextMaker would set the margin to 5 08 cm 2 in Smooth edges of screen fonts group box Not available on all operating systems When this option is enabled TextMaker uses a technology called anti aliasing that smoothes the edges of fonts and thereby improves their appearance on the screen The options available vary according to the operating system Note Enabling this technology on slow systems has noticeable effect on the system s responsiveness This is especially the case for the ClearType setting on Pocket PCs Preferences Language property sheet The Language property sheet in the Extras gt Preferences dialog allows you to set preferences for TextMaker s language tools Default language Here is where you set the default language for spell checking hyphenation and the thesaurus To make the setting open the list and select the desired language Tip If you want to employ more than one language in a document you can use the Format gt Character command to format any particular segment of text in a different language You can read more about this in section Setting the language beginning on page 280 Disabled automatic spell checking The options in the Automatic spell checking group box allow you to control whether or not TextMak
38. o Hendrerit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat vel ilh m dolore eu feugiat rulla facilisis at vero eros luptatum zzril delenit augue a irs L1 Col1 Section1 Chapter1 Page 1 of 1 Ins The Outline view is nothing more than a different form of representation for the document Let s take a closer look at what it contains First notice that the document s text segments are indented to different degrees Major headings are displayed flush left Headings immediately subordinate to them those whose outline level is one lower are displayed a little further to the right etc In addition the Formatting toolbar has disappeared and has been replaced by the Outline toolbar As its name implies this toolbar provides access to functions useful for outlining documents When you invoke the Outline view for the first time the entire document will always be visible You will obtain a better view of the document s structure when you hide the normal text and allow only the headings to be displayed provided the document contains headings To do this use the Text button in the Outline toolbar Beyond that you can specify which levels of headings should be displayed with buttons 1 through 9 Clicking on button 3 for example results in the display only 364 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker of headings with outline levels one through three The All button provides a means of making all the leve
39. this color is yellow Background color Here you can change the document s background color With the default setting Auto the background color is not changed The color that appears is the one that would appear if the document were viewed in the user s browser Background image You can specify a picture to be used for the background of the document by entering here the filename of the desired image The background is created by tiling the image You must specify the full path and filename of the image You can either enter this information manually or click on the Browse button to locate the image file on your hard disk Note Background images are not displayed in TextMaker they only appear in your web browser Unvisited link Here you can select the color to be used to represented unvisited links The default color is blue 466 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker E Visited link Here you can select the color for visited links The default is dark magenta Current link Here you can select the color for the currently selected link The default is red Additional colors If none of the existing colors suits you you can always compose your own colors To do so click on Define color the last item in the color list see section Document properties Colors property sheet beginning on page 463 Document properties Info property sheet The Info property sheet in the File gt Proper
40. tmv c cccesscesssseeeesssneeees 129 Multi column page layouts 131 Changing the number of columns ccceeeeeeeseceeeeeetteeteeeeeees 131 Options for the Format gt Section command ccceceeeeeeeee 132 What are sections e hvac aia ate iia wnat eet 135 Searching and replacing 137 SEANCMING AE P EE EEE E E 137 Bae e are E E TEE ATEA EEE ETENA ETEN 138 Repeating a search replace ssssssssssesesrrsseerrnssnnssnnnnnnrnnnnesnnnnnens 139 Expanded search functions cccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeneneeees 140 Searching replacing formatting cc cecccccesseeeeeseeceeeeeesseeteeeeeees 142 BOOKMANKS sicher E EE E EOE AE E ETET 144 The Goto COMMANA aen aanne anaipa a echt dee anakaa aa aaia tects 145 Fields 147 Inserting a fieldiie creck anir ini adat aa iida 147 Inserting the date and time as text eee eseseeceeeeeeeeeeesenteaeeees 152 Inserting special characters 153 Automatic numbering 155 Simple EnumMer ations ccccccceeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeeneeeeaes 156 Numbered lists ccsceeeecceceneeeeaeseeneeceaeeeeaaeseeneeseeeeesaeeeeaaeeneees 160 Creating numbered lists ccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeneneeees 161 Applying numbered lists ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeees 167 Modifying numbered lists c cccecccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeneeee 168 Numbered headings ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeea
41. using Edit gt Paste TextMaker would automatically add a space between is and the following word Set left and first line indent with Tab and Backspace When this option is enabled you can use the Tab Tab key and the Backspace key 2__ to set and change paragraph indents To do this first place the text cursor at the beginning of the paragraph of interest or select the desired paragraphs Then press Tab Tab to increase the indent or press Backspace __ to decrease it Preferences Look amp Feel property sheet The Look amp Feel property sheet in the Extras gt Preferences dialog allows you to set preferences that affect the look and feel of TextMaker s user interface Dialog style The look of TextMaker s dialog boxes and toolbars can be changed by selecting a Dialog style option This does not change the way you use the software just choose the setting that suits you best Language Here you can select the language to be used in the menus and dialog boxes The selections available here depend on what alternative user interface languages were installed along with the program if available Window Manager dialogs Linux only When this option is disabled TextMaker for Linux draws its own dialogs This is somewhat faster than using the window manager to draw them However in this case dialogs cannot extend beyond the boundaries of the program window When this option is enabled the window manager draws
42. when it has found some By means of the buttons you can specify what is to be done with the unknown word Button Function Change Lets you correct the word Before you use this button type the correct spelling in the Change to input field or select one of the suggested words from the list Change All Works like the Change button but changes all further instances of the word from here to the end of the document Ignore Ignores the supposed spelling error and continues with the spelling 284 e Language tools User Manual TextMaker check Ignore All Ignores all further instances of this word Note Use Ignore or Ignore All only for words that are correctly written but are not to be added to the dictionary When you exit TextMaker it forgets the list of ignored words Add Tells TextMaker to add the word to its user dictionary Note Use this option for correctly written words that TextMaker does not yet know TextMaker remembers these words permanently If you want to exit the spell checker before it reaches the end of the document click on Close Is the spell checker working incorrectly If the spell checker frequently classifies words as incorrectly spelled when in fact they are not it is likely that the text segment in which they occur is formatted in the wrong language In this case select the text segment invoke Format gt Character and set the Language option on the Font property sheet to Default or to th
43. 1 Select the paragraphs of text to be sorted 2 Invoke the Edit gt Sort command 3 Select either an ascending or descending sort order 4 Confirm with OK The paragraphs are immediately sorted in accordance with your settings The dialog box for the sort command allows you to set basic criteria and provides some additional options that can be set as needed The options include Sort by Normally all you need to specify here is the sort order Ascending A Z or Descending Z A The specification of a column as the basis for the sort makes sense only when the selected paragraphs are organized like a table that is when they contain elements delimited by tabs or other separator characters see the Separator option Then sort by If required you can specify more than one sort criterion For example if the selected paragraphs are in columnar form and if the first column contains last names and the second column contains first names you can select the first column for Sort by and the second column for Then sort by The paragraphs will be sorted first by last name In addition paragraphs containing the same last name will be sorted by first name Separator You don t have to set the Separator unless you are sorting paragraphs organized in tabular form If the paragraphs contain for example names street addresses city names etc delimited by separator characters you can tell TextMaker how to recognize the se
44. Bed amp Breakfast List prices C Docs Scotland Balmoral tmd Balmoral Castle General Infor C Docs Scotland Edinburgh tmd Edinburgh Fringe Festival C Docs Scotland Games tmd Highland Games Listings C Docs Scotland Glasgow tmd Glasgow General Infor C Docs Scotland Highlands tmd Highlands General Infor C Docs Scotland History tmd Scotland s History Scotland s Hist C Docs Scotland Loch Ness tmd Loch Ness General Infor C Docs Scotland Lowlands tmd Lowlands General Infor C Docs Scotland Whisky Trail tmd Whisky Whisky Trail O Close Search output Delete Preview Under Windows and Linux the file manager window can be made as large or small as you like The widths of the columns can be changed by dragging the lines that separate the column headers By clicking on one of the column headers you can sort the files according to the contents of the column under that header You can select a file with the cursor keys or with a mouse click and then invoke a function to be performed on the file by clicking on one of the buttons The functions associated with these buttons are described in the next section You can use the Search button to change to another folder But this button also gives access to search functions that work with document summary information and that you can use to look for specific titles subjects authors keywords etc The file manager s buttons The bu
45. Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Capitalize first letter of sentences When this option is enabled TextMaker automatically capitalizes the first letter of every sentence you type even if you accidentally enter a lowercase letter For example if you typed the sentence this is a new sentence it would be corrected automatically to This is a new sentence Correct first two uppercase letters When this option is enabled TextMaker automatically corrects the case of words such as proper names whose first two letters have been capitalized inadvertently For example if you typed the word HEnry it would be corrected automatically to Henry Select whole words when selecting When this option is enabled TextMaker automatically extends any selection that you make with the mouse to word boundaries When the option is disabled selections can be made on a character by character basis Add or remove spaces when pasting When this option is enabled spaces are added or removed automatically as required when words are deleted or cut from the text and when they are pasted into the text from the clipboard For example if you selected the word is in the sentence This is a test and cut it with Edit gt Cut TextMaker would automatically remove the space behind is since it would have become superfluous If you subsequently pasted the word is into the text in front of another word
46. Define color entry in any color list Select the color to be changed from the Color palette list Make the desired changes see the section Using the controls for setting colors below Click on Change The color is now changed for the current document 464 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Deleting or renaming a color You can delete or rename user defined colors at any time To do this invoke the color dialog select a color from the Color palette list and click the Delete or Rename button Using the controls for setting colors The controls in the dialog introduced above allow you to set colors in a number of different ways All these ways lead to the same results just choose the method that suits you the best m Using the color field and luminance slider Setting colors is easiest when you use the large color field and the luminance slider to its right The color field presents all the available hues in all available saturations while the luminance slider next to it provides a means of varying the luminance To set a color first click on the desired color in the large color field Then click on the desired luminance in the luminance slider m Using the hue saturation and luminance controls Alternatively you can set colors with the controls situated below the color field and labeled Hue Sat saturation and Lum luminance Values between 0 and 240 are allowed for each m Using the R
47. Heading 1 through Heading 9 What would some clever fox make of this You guessed it a clever user would infer that he or she could create a heading simply by applying one of the styles Heading 1 through Heading 9 to a text paragraph which would be correct It follows that when you want to add a new heading you can do so without even using the Outline view Simply type the heading and select the desired heading style from the Formatting toolbar done You can change the outline level of an existing heading just as easily For example if you position the text cursor in a level 2 heading and apply the Heading 3 style the heading is demoted to level 3 And there is an even faster way By default keyboard shortcuts Alt Alt 1 through Aly 3 Alt 3 are defined for Heading 1 through 3 and the shortcut Aly 0 Alt O is defined for Normal Thus you can very quickly add headings change their levels or demote them to normal text by using these key combinations Explanation The outline level is a paragraph format At this point you might ask What do styles really have to do with the outline Simply put the outline level is an altogether ordinary paragraph format as far as TextMaker is concerned If you invoke the Format gt Paragraph dialog you will find an Outline level option there This option is preset to 1 9 for the styles Heading 1 through 9 respectively This is the reason you can change the levels
48. However you can change the names of objects whenever you wish For example if you have created a form that contains a text field where a place of residence can be entered the name Place of residence would naturally suggest itself for this field To change its name you would select the field invoke the Object gt Properties command switch to the Properties property sheet and change the entry in the Name field Remember that names must be unique If you attempt to assign a name to an object that is already in use for another object TextMaker will reject it and present an error message The purpose of names But what is the sense in giving all the objects in a document unique names In the first place these names are necessary for calculations on the contents of objects For example to multiply the content of cell C3 in table Tablel by two you must reference the table by its name in your calculation entering Table1 C3 2 You will find detailed information about performing calculations with objects in the section Objects in calculations beginning on page 348 This concludes the general description of frames and drawings The following sections present the various types of frames in detail m Text frames beginning on page 238 m Picture frames beginning on page 242 m OLE object frames beginning on page 246 m Drawings beginning on page 249 m Forms objects beginning on page 267 Text frames
49. Is less than or equal to amp Logical and Logical or Negation Some notes on comparisons E When two text strings are compared with the result is true only when the strings are exactly the same and have the same length The cases of letters are taken into account in this comparison Henry Henry is true Henry henry is false Henry Henry s is false If you construct a complex comparison that has several ands and ors you should always enclose the individual conditions in parentheses An overview of the computational functions In TextMaker you can use the computational functions described below The arguments required by the functions are always given in parentheses n represents a number t represents a text string d represents a date So for example INT 7 is a function requiring a numeric argument It can be a numeric constant or the numeric result of a calculation for example INT 3 14 or INT 1 SQRT 2 Important When several arguments are required they must be separated from one another by semicolons ABS n returns the absolute value of the numeric argument n The sign is removed ABS 3 gives 3 ABS 3 likewise gives 3 ASC returns the numeric code of the character t in the character table ASC A gives 65 AT t1 t2 returns the position of the first occurrence of text string 12 in text string t as a numeric value
50. Mark Moving copying and deleting footnotes You can move copy or delete text segments containing footnotes in the usual manner TextMaker automatically reorders the footnote texts and adjusts the numbering without any special action on your part However you should observe the following rule when performing these functions Important When you copy move or delete footnotes you should always do it in the text not in the footnote area at the bottom page margin For example if you delete the footnote text for a footnote in the footnote area the footnote itself remains in place as before what is gone is merely its text If on the other hand you select and delete the footnote marker in the text the whole footnote marker and text is removed and all the remaining footnotes are renumbered Changing the formatting of footnotes You can change the formatting of the footnote text or its footnote marker any time Formatting footnote text To change the formatting of the text of a footnote simply set the text cursor into the footnote text and apply the desired formatting Tip When you want to change the formatting of the text for all the footnotes in the entire document TextMaker can save you a lot of work All you need to do is change the Footnote text paragraph style that TextMaker creates automatically as soon as you insert the first footnote By default the text of all footnotes is formatted with thi
51. Show invisible objects If you enable this option any object whose Visible property is disabled becomes visible on the screen Print unprintable objects If you enable this option any object whose Printable property is disabled will nevertheless be printed along with normally printable objects By default both options are disabled Hidden text group box Not only objects but text too can be hidden see section Hiding text beginning on page 69 The Show hidden text and Print hidden text options control respectively the display and printing of text that has been formatted hidden By default Show hidden text is enabled and Print hidden text is disabled Accordingly hidden text is visible on the screen but does not appear on the printed page If you enable Print hidden text hidden text will appear on the printed page along with visible text Pictures and OLE objects group box With the default setting Show pictures all the graphics and OLE objects present in the text are displayed on the screen If instead you select the Use placeholders option gray boxes are displayed at the positions of these objects Advantage The responsiveness of the display is improved when paging through a document with a lot of pictures Locking group box With these options you can lock all objects on the master page and all guides and thereby protect them from being shifted inadvertently If you activate the Lock objects on master
52. To enable it again invoke the command View gt Toolbars and click on the check box to the left of Reviewing Toolbar in the Toolbars list box The Reviewing toolbar includes the following buttons from left to right E Insert comment E Edit current comment E Delete current comment m Go to previous comment E Go to next comment m Comments pane on off mu The buttons further to the right are not for comments but for tracking changes in the document see the section Tracking changes in a document beginning on page 407 Detailed information about these functions is presented in the following sections Inserting comments To insert a comment do the following 402 e Document revisions User Manual TextMaker Select the text to which you want to attach a comment Invoke the command Extras gt Comments gt Insert Comment Tip This command can also be invoked by clicking on the Bl icon in the Reviewing toolbar Type your comment in the small window that appears When you have completed your comment click anywhere in the text to close the comment window The comment is now entered You recognize this from the fact that the text to which it is attached is highlighted in color Editing comments To edit a comment do the following a Position the text cursor anywhere within the text whose comment you want to edit Invoke the command Extras gt Comments gt Edit Comment Tip This command can
53. Using styles not only saves you time when you have to apply the same formatting repeatedly but also ensures that your document will be formatted consistently The reason if you change the definition of a style the formats of all text segments to which this style has been applied are changed accordingly In practical terms styles work like this You set up a paragraph style named Headings choosing for it a larger bold type a centered alignment a specific line spacing etc Now whenever you want to make a paragraph into a heading all you have to do is select this style for it and it will be formatted accordingly Keyboard shortcuts Keyboard shortcuts can be defined for styles so that you can apply them with single key presses Every document has its own styles You can define different styles for each document they are saved in the document Document templates Beyond that you can save styles that you will need to use frequently in a document template Then whenever you create a new document TextMaker will let you select this document template as the basis for the document Character styles You can save a frequently needed character format typeface size emphasis etc in a character style and apply it repeatedly to any characters you like For example if you want some sections of a contract to be formatted in a special typeface and in a smaller size simply create an appropriate character style let
54. a bibliography database that you want to use you will have to set up a new database To do this you can use TextMaker s database module or any other dBase compatible database program With TextMaker you create a new bibliography database as follows 1 Invoke the Extras gt Create Database command 2 Give the database whatever name you like and confirm with OK 3 Add the desired fields to the database The database must always contain fields for a unique shortcut abbreviation author and title You will find information about the operation of the field setup dialog in section Creating a database beginning on page 324 4 When you are finished click on OK 5 TextMaker immediately creates the database and then opens it If you want to enter your sources into the database at this point you can do so Otherwise invoke the File gt Close command to close the database Editing the bibliography database Next you must fill in the bibliography database entering there information about the sources to which you refer in your document Naturally it is up to you if you want to enter all sources at once or add sources only as required To enter sources you can use TextMaker s database module which is invoked with the Extras gt Edit Database command You will find information about the operation of the database module in chapter Database beginning on page 303 Step 2 Assigning the bibliography database
55. a section of text after it has been entered you must first select it so that TextMaker knows what area should be modified To select the lines containing the address proceed as follows Mouse While pressing the mouse button drag the mouse cursor from the beginning to the end of the text you want to select By the way there is an easy way to select complete lines click in the margin to the left of the line The complete line will be immediately selected Keyboard If you prefer to work with the keyboard you can make selections by moving the text cursor while holding down the Shift key Shif In this case select the address line by positioning the text cursor in front of the first character with Home Home and then pressing the key combination Shif 4 Shift J Once you have selected the address line you can modify the font size To do this use the Formatting toolbar which presents all the most frequently needed formatting commands If the Formatting toolbar is not visible invoke View gt Toolbars and click on the little box in front of Formatting to activate it The Formatting toolbar Note You will find detailed information about the Formatting toolbar in chapter Character formatting beginning on page 63 and Paragraph formatting beginning on page 73 40 e The TextMaker Tour User Manual TextMaker R Normat x Times New Roman hi0 x _ x jU z Lja a et GHEE The font size
56. actions There is also an opposite to the Undo command the command Edit gt Redo It restores the effect of your most recently canceled action So you can undo the cancellation of a text modification 28 e Basics User Manual TextMaker This command can also be invoked repeatedly For example if you invoke the Undo command five times the last five text modifications are canceled If you then invoke the command Redo five times you get back the original text There is also a keyboard shortcut for this command the key combination Ctry CtrlI Y Insert or overwrite Text entry works very simply You move the text cursor to the desired place and begin typing In TextMaker Insert mode is on by default If you type a character in this mode it is entered in the existing text and shifts the following text forward But you can also switch to Overwrite mode In this mode entered text overwrites the following text The status toolbar always shows which mode is presently active If the abbreviation Ins appears there the insert mode is active If Ovr is shown you are working in overwrite mode You can switch back and forth between the two modes with the Ins I Ns key Beginning a new document If you would like to begin a new document invoke the command File gt New or press the key combination Ctrl N Ctrl N Template Li K E SPELL Set default D New window Descriptio
57. and click on Edit A dialog appears to enable you to change the formatting Here click on Character Set the desired font size in the Size field Exit the dialogs by clicking in succession on OK OK and Close Now the major headings in the table of contents are rendered in the new font size This formatting will remain in effect after you update the table and even if you remove and reinsert it If necessary you can go to chapter Styles beginning on page 115 to review general information about the use of styles Cross references With the Insert gt Cross reference command you can insert a reference to a specific text element for example a bookmark or an object into the text This command inserts a field that displays for example the page number of the targeted text element Thus if you have inserted a picture on page 3 of the document you can introduce a cross reference to this picture for example see picture on page 3 at some other place in the document Cross references can target text elements of the following kinds E bookmarks E footnotes E objects pictures drawings etc Cross references to bookmarks are often encountered in large documents For example if you wanted to insert a cross reference to the index at the end of your document you would first put a bookmark at the beginning of the index Then you would return to the place in the document where the reference should appear typ
58. and name of the internet resource or file to which the selected text is to refer Links to web pages must be entered as http followed by the address of the page for example http www softmaker com index htm 4 Below in the Bookmark field you can specify if desired a position in the target document to be opened see below However this field is normally empty 5 Confirm with OK The link is now created You recognize this by a change in the color of the text which indicates the presence of a link Specifying target positions The dialog described above gives you the option of specifying a position in the target document To do this enter at Bookmark either the address of an anchor for HTML documents or a bookmark for TextMaker documents Example If you enter Report tmd at URL or file name and the name of a bookmark in this document at Bookmark and then follow the link you have created the file Report tmd will be opened and the text cursor will be positioned at the specified bookmark Following links To follow a link position the text cursor at any character within the link text Then invoke the command Edit gt Go to link TextMaker responds by opening the linked document Tip You can also follow links by clicking on the link text with the mouse Editing or removing a link To edit an existing link first select the link text Then invoke the command Format gt Link A dia
59. appears to enable you to edit the style Click on the Bullets button contained there 5 Another dialog appears to enable you to set up numberings Switch to the Numbered lists property sheet 6 Select the numbered list that you created in step 2 7 Click successively on OK OK and Close to exit all the dialogs All existing headings are now automatically numbered and numbering will be applied automatically to any headings that you might add later Tip If the format of the numberings does not suit you you can always change the settings for the numbered list that you created in step 2 to adapt the format to your needs To do this invoke the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command again switch to the Numbered lists property sheet select the list click on Edit and make the desired changes These changes will affect all the headings in the document including those already numbered Note for users of older versions of TextMaker In older versions of TextMaker headings could not be numbered automatically based on a numbered list and had to be numbered by means of manual insertions of Auto number fields If you have old documents in which the headings are still numbered using the old method you can of course continue to use them without restriction TextMaker continues to support the auto number field However use of the new method is recommended when composing new documents because numbered lists have severa
60. area in the right margin in which all the comments in the document are displayed When this option is enabled the comments pane is displayed automatically when you insert the first comment into a document or when the document already contains comments When this option is disabled the comments pane is not displayed However you can still make comments visible In this case whenever you point with the mouse to a segment of text to which a comment is attached a small window containing the comment pops up Note Even when this option is enabled the comments pane does not appear unless the document actually contains comments 406 e Document revisions User Manual TextMaker m Width Allows you to set the width of the comment pane Position Allows you to set the position of the comments pane right left outside or inside Changes group box This section of the dialog contains additional options that pertain not to comments but to the Track changes function see the next section Tracking changes in a document After you enable the Track changes function you can continue just as before to make whatever changes you like in a document However the changes are not immediately applied but are highlighted in color and saved in the document as proposed changes Subsequently you or another user can accept or reject separately each of these changes and each will then be either permanen
61. be rendered in Arabic 1 2 3 or Roman I II HT numerals The available field types are enumerated in the following table Field Function Creation date Creation time Print date Print time Date last changed Time last changed Database field Database info 148 e Fields The date on which the current document was created The time at which the current document was created Today s date This field like all field types is updated automatically when you print the document The current time in any of several formats Automatically updated when the document is printed The date on which the current document was last modified in other words saved The time at which the current document was last modified in other words saved The content of a field from a database that has been attached to the document The specific database field to be inserted is selected from the Data list See also chapter Database beginning on page 303 Any of the following items of information about a database attached to the document Database name only file name of the database Full database name the same with the addition of the path name User Manual TextMaker Page number Page count Chapter number File name Summary Last edited by User Home User Business Auto number Database record number the record number of the current database record and Record count number of records in th
62. box for the Format gt Character command presents lists of choices for typeface font size style and language under not only a single category but under three For Latin scripts e g English German m For East Asian scripts Chinese Japanese and Korean m For complex scripts e g Arabic and Indian languages Thus you can specify the settings for each kind of script separately For example if you specify Arial as the typeface for Latin characters and SimHei as the typeface for Asian characters all the Latin characters that you type will appear in Arial and all the Asian characters you type will appear in SimHei TextMaker recognizes whether given characters are part of the Latin Asian or complex scripts Smart quotes TextMaker can automatically transform double quotes and single quotes as they are typed to make their forms typographically correct for the selected language Here you can specify the relevant language or you can specify None if you want TextMaker to make no changes to the quote marks you type For example if you type Text or Text the result will depend on this setting as follows Setting Text Text None Text Text no change German Text Text Swiss German Text gt Text lt English Text Text French Text lt Texb Auto see below The Auto option presents a special case If you select this option TextMaker detects the language au
63. can be used only in paragraphs that have been aligned flush left or justified To create a drop cap do the following 1 Position the text cursor in the paragraph that is to be ornamented with a drop cap or select multiple paragraphs Important The alignment of these paragraphs must be flush left or justified otherwise the drop cap will not be displayed 2 Invoke the command Format gt Drop Caps 3 From the Drop Caps options select the type of drop cap you want 4 Select the desired Font size If you want the drop cap to be rendered in a font different from the paragraph font click on the Character button and set the desired character formatting 5 Change the Margins for the drop cap as required As soon as you have confirmed with OK TextMaker renders the drop cap of the paragraph as you have specified The content of the paragraph can still be edited as usual Removing drop caps To remove drop caps again invoke the command Format gt Drop Caps and set the Drop Caps option to None Shading With the Format gt Shading command you can add a colored and or patterned background to designated paragraphs in the text 90 e Paragraph formatting User Manual TextMaker Shading Ea Shading r Shades Sample I Cc ing m C pattem tT r Pattern Foreground RSI M HH slack aT MSp To do this select the paragraphs of interest invoke Format
64. color Object properties Lines property sheet Note This property sheet is available only for certain kinds of objects 230 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker On the Lines property sheet you can specify the type of lines to be used for the object In the case of drawings your settings will affect the lines with which the object is drawn in other cases they will affect the lines that border the object The following options are available E Style Here you can select the desired line style The entries in the list are merely hints as required you can specify the appearance of the lines more precisely with additional options If you don t want lines to be drawn at all select the No Line entry m Dashed Here you can specify whether the lines drawn should be dashed E Color Here you can specify the color of the lines E Thickness Here you can specify the line thickness precisely in tenths of a point Begin and End Available only for lines curves and connectors Here you can specify whether symbols should be drawn at the beginning or ending points of the lines For example you can select an arrow symbol for the end point of a line to have it end with an arrow As required you can also change the width and height of a symbol Object properties Shadow property sheet Notes This property sheet is available only for certain types of objects On the Shadow property sheet you can specify a shadow to be app
65. command or simply drag a toolbar to the desired position with the mouse Changing the position with the View gt Toolbars command Proceed as follows 1 Invoke the View gt Toolbars command 2 Click on the toolbar you want to move to select it 3 Select the desired position for the toolbar in the Position group box Note If you choose the Floating option the toolbar icons are displayed in a window that can be moved or sized just like an application window Changing the position with the mouse All enabled toolbars can also be repositioned with the mouse Proceed as follows 1 Position the mouse pointer over an empty area of the toolbar 2 Press the left mouse button and hold it down 3 While holding the mouse button down drag the toolbar to the desired position 4 Release the mouse button to place the toolbar at the new position A positioning aide is active while you are dragging when you drag the toolbar near one of the edges of the program window it jumps automatically to that edge If you leave the toolbar at the top edge of the window for example the result will be the same as would have been achieved by selecting the Top position in the View gt Toolbars dialog box Locking a toolbar in position When you want to avoid accidentally dragging a particular toolbar out of its position with the mouse you can invoke View gt Toolbars select that toolbar and enable the Locked option Managing toolbars You can crea
66. copies the contents of the active data record into the clipboard The command File gt Insert record and close is only available when the database was invoked through a document template a topic covered in section Importing individual addresses beginning on page 317 314 e Database User Manual TextMaker Using the database module TextMaker for Windows Linux and Handheld PCs is equipped with a large database module which has been covered on the previous pages see section Using the database module beginning on page 305 On Pocket PCs only a small database module is available Its functions will be introduced to you in this section Database SALUT_BODY Dear Mr Backfisch Close NAME1 Backfisch 555 555 5555 FAX 555 555 5556 REMARK1 NAME2 cashflow Consulting Corp Search FIRSTNAME Mirco a Find next STREET es Main Street F Append STATE_ZIP Ica 90400 gt Edt CITY Janytown PHONE 555 555 5555 0 sts S 14 lt gt dal Record 1 of 1 C ust Filter Apply Form Apart from the fact that the small database module is providing only basic database functions which are operated with buttons rather than with menus the operation of the small module resembles in principle that of the large module Note The small database module is also present in TextMaker for Windows Linux and Handheld PCs However it only appears when you insert a data record
67. dialog box appears From the Object Type list displayed in this window select the type of OLE object that TextMaker should embed in the text 4 When you confirm with OK TextMaker starts the application that is appropriate to the type of object selected 5 Create the object in the application 6 Exit the application 7 At this point it is possible that the application will ask you if you want to insert the object into the TextMaker document Confirm with Yes The OLE object created in the other application is now embedded in the TextMaker document Acquiring an OLE Object from a file You can embed not only a newly created OLE object but also an object acquired from a file that has already been created by another application see the next section 204 e OLE objects User Manual TextMaker Object not visible If you can t see the object in the document after you have inserted it that is probably because you have disabled the display of pictures and OLE objects in other words checked the Use placeholders option for pictures To re enable the display of pictures and OLE objects invoke File gt Properties switch to the View property sheet and check the Show pictures option OLE object frames An OLE object that has been embedded in the text is treated by TextMaker as if it were a character within the text Thus it is bound up within the flow of the text Instead of being embedded an OLE object can be inserted as an O
68. displayed in the text surrounded by angle brackets This option is disabled by default Shade fields When you enable this option all fields inserted into the document with Insert gt Field date page number etc are indicated with a gray background so that their positions in the document can be easily recognized This option is disabled by default Show merge record The Show merge record option is available only when you have attached a database to the current document with Extras gt Set Database When you enable this option the field names that normally represent database fields inserted into a document are replaced on the screen with the contents of the field from a specified record of the database You can enter the number of the record whose contents are to be displayed in the edit box to the right of Show merge record If you enter 10 for example the content of the field from the tenth record will be displayed This option is useful for checking the final appearance of a form letter before printing it see also chapter Form letters beginning on page 329 By default this option is disabled Objects group box As described in section Hiding objects beginning on page 235 you can make inserted objects invisible on the screen and or on the printed page By means of these two options you can make these objects visible and or printable again overriding their individual visibility settings
69. element like an item on the menu bar or a filename and press the left mouse button you make a selection This manual will often use the terms click double click and drag E Click Click refers to a single press of the left mouse button after the mouse cursor has been moved to a specific screen element 24 e Basics User Manual TextMaker Double click A double click is accomplished by executing two clicks of the left mouse button in quick succession A double click on any word in the text selects this word A double click on an object for example a picture opens a dialog box to allow editing the settings for the object E Drag You can move certain screen elements by dragging them over the screen with the mouse This is done by moving the mouse cursor over the element pressing the left mouse button and holding it down Drag the screen element to the desired position with the mouse and then release the mouse button You execute all these actions with the left mouse button Using the stylus with the Nova5000 What was said above applies also to using the Nova5000 stylus To click on something simply tap with the stylus You make a double click with two taps etc Entering text When you start TextMaker an empty document window is opened automatically Thus you can begin entering text immediately Don t worry If you can use a typewriter you will have no problem operating TextMaker Note A
70. enumerated and bulleted lists will appear It will allow you to specify precisely the kind of numbering and the number format you want Afterwards you can apply the layout of your numbered list to any paragraphs you like The paragraphs will then be given a numbering exactly as you specified in your numbered list A further advantage If you subsequently change the formatting of the numbered list the paragraphs formatted with this list will change accordingly Using hierarchical lists Numbered lists have the additional advantage that they allow the creation of hierarchical enumerations 160 e Automatic numbering User Manual TextMaker While simple lists like 1 2 3 etc have only one level hierarchical lists can have several levels For example a hierarchical list might look like this 1 1 1 1 2 2 etc In the above example the two paragraphs under 1 have second level numbering 1 1 and 1 2 Creating numbered lists To create a new numbered list proceed as follows 1 If you want to apply the new numbered list immediately after creating it first select the paragraphs to which you want to apply it 2 Invoke the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command 3 Switch to the Numbered Lists property sheet 4 Click on the New button 5 Give the new numbered list whatever name you like and then confirm with OK 6 Select either Simple list 1 2 3 etc or Hierarchical list 1 1 1 1 1 1 etc depen
71. examines your text for typing mistakes when it finds mistakes it suggests corrections You have the choice of three working methods With retroactive spell checking you can have whole documents checked and corrected On the fly spell checking checks each word as you type it When it detects a typing mistake it immediately presents a dialog box that lets you correct the word Background spell checking constantly checks the whole text without interrupting the flow of your work Incorrectly written words are underlined in red and can be corrected manually or with the aid of a context menu that appears when you right click on an underlined word Editing user dictionaries When you teach the spell checker new words they are entered in your user dictionary You can edit this dictionary at any time in order to delete incorrect entries E Thesaurus The thesaurus not included in all versions of TextMaker shows you synonyms for words words with similar or related meanings Thesauri are available for several languages Translation dictionary In addition some versions of TextMaker contain an extremely useful translation dictionary It can translate words back and forth among five languages German English French Italian Spanish E SmartText With TextMaker s SmartText feature you can have your favorite typing errors corrected automatically and create short cuts for frequently needed phrases for example wbg
72. example one font with another wherever the former occurs in the document However experts would use styles to do this see chapter Styles beginning on page 115 since they provide a much more elegant means of accomplishing this task If you change the font in a style all text segments that are formatted with this style are automatically modified accordingly One final point Text and formatting can be searched in combination Thus you can search for a specific term in a specific format For example if you enter TextMaker as the search term and also specify bold character formatting for the search the search will find every occurrence of TextMaker in bold characters in the document Bookmarks You can place text markers in TextMaker documents just as you do in books when for example you want to be able to return quickly to important passages These text markers are called bookmarks To insert a bookmark invoke the Insert gt Bookmark command at the desired position in the text and give the bookmark a name Once you have marked a position in the text in this way you can jump to it at any time with the Edit gt Go to command Setting bookmarks To mark a position in the text set a bookmark there using the following procedure 1 Move the text cursor to the position in the text that you want to mark 2 Invoke the Insert gt Bookmark command 3 Enter whatever name you like for the bookmark
73. example is included with the program or set up a new one with Extras gt Create Database The database can be organized any way you like except that it must always include a field for a shortcut abbreviation that can serve as a unique reference for each source and also fields for the author and title of each source m Step 2 Next invoke Extras gt Bibliography gt Bibliography Settings and use the File button in the command dialog to assign your database to the document as a bibliography database Then select those fields of your database that are to serve respectively as the Reference Field Author Field and Title Field for the creation of the bibliography E Step 3 Now you can invoke Extras gt Bibliography gt Insert Bibliography Field to insert references to the sources contained in the bibliography database into the text for example As mentioned in DNA1979 E Step 4 Finally you can invoke Extras gt Bibliography gt Generate Biblio graphy to have TextMaker create a bibliography at the end of the document The bibliography will contain a list of all the sources to which you inserted references in the text see step 3 Each source listing will be based on the corresponding record in the bibliography database You will find detailed information about this on the following pages Step 1 The bibliography database In order to be able to make use of the bibliography functions you first need a bibliogr
74. facilitates the entry of formulas it contains lists of all variables database fields functions and operators What makes the calculation capabilities especially useful is the fact that they allow the contents of database fields to be included in the calculations Writing an invoice No problem if your database has fields for quantity and price for example you can have TextMaker calculate formulas like QUANTITY PRICE and easily print invoices as form letters In addition you can reference the contents of objects in calculations For example TextFramel Value 2 produces the result of multiplying the content of the text frame with the name TextFramel by two Detailed information about the topic of calculations is given on the following pages Inserting calculations Calculations can be inserted into the text with the command Insert gt Calculation or the keyboard shortcut F2 F2 When this command is invoked a dialog box appears and lets you enter the formula for the calculation The formula may contain up to 255 characters After your OK the result of the calculation maximum 100 characters is placed in the text Options You can specify the format of the result with the options Decimals Thousands separator and Hide result You can read about this in the section Formatting and rounding calculations beginning on page 349 Inserting calculations A simple example of the use of the calculation command You wan
75. field as a number and returns it Em Tables Table1 A1 returns the content of cell A1 in Tablel 348 e Calculations in the text User Manual TextMaker Table1 A1 interprets the content of this cell as a number and returns it Table1 A1 interprets the content of this cell as text and returns it Table1 returns the sum of the contents of all cells in Table1 m Checkboxes and checkbox frames Checkbox1 Sel or Checkbox1 for short returns 1 if the checkbox is checked or 0 if not Checkbox1 Text returns the text for this checkbox if it is checked otherwise an empty text string Dropdown lists and dropdown list frames Dropdown1 Text returns the text of the selected item in Dropdown Dropdown1 Sel or Dropdown for short returns the number of the selected item An example The formula TextField1 Value 2 gives the result of multiplying the present content of the text field named TextField1 by 2 Formatting and rounding calculations With the command Insert gt Calculation you can not only enter new calculations see section Inserting calculations and edit existing ones but also specify the format of the calculation s result You can set the format when you enter a new calculation or you can do this at any time afterwards by selecting the calculation and invoking Insert gt Calculation The following options in the dialog box determine the format of the calculation m Thousands separator If you ena
76. fields in the text These are references to sources that are recorded in the bibliography database You can insert such a reference whenever you refer to one of the sources in the text for example as mentioned in DNA1979 You insert a reference to a source into the text as follows 1 Move the text cursor to the desired position 384 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker 2 Invoke Extras gt Bibliography gt Insert Bibliography Field 3 Choose the desired database entry from the list Tip You can always use the Edit button to edit the contents of the database In this way you can for example add a new entry 4 Confirm with OK The reference is immediately inserted into the text Depending on the options selected in the Bibliography Settings dialog either the abbreviation or the number of the source will appear in the text see below Proceed as described above each time you want to insert a reference to one of the sources in your database into your document Options for the styles of references The Bibliography Settings dialog allows you to change the appearance of references whenever necessary For example you can specify whether they should appear as abbreviations taken from the database or as automatically generated numbers To set the style of a reference invoke Extras gt Bibliography gt Bibliography Settings and make the desired settings in the Reference Style group box Th
77. for the object Tip This property sheet also gives you access to a number of expanded options Here you can for example set the position of the object relative to the page margin or a paragraph border See section Object properties Layout property sheet beginning on page 223 218 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker Note An object s anchor determines the page on which it is displayed Note This section applies only to frames and drawings When you insert a frame or a drawing you will notice that an anchor is displayed along with it to the left of the paragraph in which you positioned it NY Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet consectetuer adi Er piscing elit 2 sed diam non ummy nibh ig Q euismod tinci dunt ut laor eet dolore ma gna aliquam erat volutpat Dolor sit amet consec tetaer adi l piscing elit sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidunt ut laoreet dolore magna aliquam erat volutpat The anchor for the selected object is displayed at the upper left The anchor determines the page on which the object is displayed In older versions of TextMaker there was no anchor Frames and drawings always appeared on the pages on which they were inserted Beginning with TextMaker 2006 on the other hand frames and drawings are anchored By default the object is anchored to the beginning of the paragraph left of the position where it was inserted This has the following consequenc
78. gridlines are not shown on the screen If you want them to be displayed activate the Show grid option in the dialog box described above Note Gridlines are displayed on the screen only they do not appear on the printed page Using guides Besides the grid described in the previous section TextMaker gives you an additional aide for positioning frames and drawings guides You can set up horizontal and vertical guides As soon as a frame or drawing that you have inserted or moved comes near one of the guides it automatically snaps to that guide as if the guide were magnetic This is useful for example when you want several pictures or text frames to be precisely aligned alongside one another Enabling the Snap to guides function Before attempting to use guides you should check to see if the Snap to guides option is enabled To do this proceed as follows 1 Invoke the command Object gt Guides amp Grid 2 On the Guides property sheet make sure that the Snap to guides option is enabled If this option is disabled the guides can still be displayed and changed but they will not have any effect on the insertion and repositioning of objects Showing the guides on the screen In addition the display of the guides should be enabled You can check this as follows 1 Invoke the Extras gt Preferences command 2 Switch to the View property sheet 486 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker 3 Mak
79. gt Shading and then continue as follows m Adding a shade To add a shade click on one of the shades presented in the Shades group box or enter the desired saturation for the shade in percent in the Shading edit box Values between 0 invisible and 100 fully saturated are allowed If desired you can set the color for the shade with the Foreground option If you also set the Background to some color other than white the shade will be a mixture of the foreground and background colors Adding a pattern To add a pattern click on one of the patterns in the Pattern group box You can also select Foreground and Background colors for the pattern Removing a shade or pattern If you want to remove an existing shade or pattern select None as the Type Then confirm with OK Borders and lines With the command Format gt Borders you can add bordering lines at the left right top or bottom of paragraphs and you can create borders that completely surround paragraphs Paragraph Border xi Borders Line style r Clearance r Sample Top Single Left fs pt Double c Right fs pt Thickness 1 Thickness 2 E pt 3pt Bottom 0 1 pt 0 1 pt 0 5 pt 0 5 pt 1 pt 1 5 pt Bounds Sooo gfs Indents 5 pt z Color Separations pt Eac 7 4 cms The dialog box for Format gt Borders To add borders to paragraphs you do the follo
80. in all four other languages The buttons in the dialog box above have the following functions Button Function Look up After you have chosen a word from one of the lists or else manually typed a word into the Word input field you activate this button or press the Enter key to obtain its translations Replace Replaces the word in the text with the translation previously chosen from the list at right Close Closes the dialog box Languages Here you choose the target languages For example if you need translation from German into English only you can turn off all languages except English Word information and type When you click on one of the words in the left or right list additional information is displayed in the lower part of the dialog At Type the word s part of speech is shown if the word is a noun its genitive and plural endings are also shown At Info you find information about the meaning or use of the word In the illustration above the words noun s appear at Type below the right list They indicate that table is a noun whose plural is tables The following parts of speech are distinguished under Type Type Explanation Adjective A word denoting a state or property a beautiful day Adverb A word denoting a condition usually used to qualify a verb He braked abruptly Come now Article A word used to signal nouns and specify their use a the Attribute Like an adjective
81. in dBase Unicode format are not dBase compatible Apart from TextMaker only very few database programs support this format Therefore you should use this format only if you need to create a database that supports the Unicode character set because you want to enter for example Asian characters Form letters You find form letters in your mailbox almost every day among them advertisements from lotteries mail order houses etc kil Form letter tmd Iof x THE SOCIETY OF AMERICAN CALLIGRAPHERS FIRSTNAME NAME1 Attn NAME2 STREET CITY STATE_ZIP SALUT_BODY We are pleased to announce that the Society of American Calligraphers will no longer have to rely on handwriting for its official communications an ee A form letter later the addresses will be inserted in the fields FIRSTNAME NAME1 etc Of course form letters can also be used for other things How would you go about sending written invitations to all the members of your bowling team for example Normally you would type the text of the letter type the first member s address in the header and print the letter Then you would put in the next member s address and print it again etc It is precisely this repeated manual entry of the addresses that TextMaker can take over when you create a form letter for the invitation In general you create a form letter as follows you will find detailed information on th
82. in the table of contents with the corresponding numberings If you don t want the table of contents entries numbered uncheck this option 380 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker You can review information about numbering the headings of a document in section Numbering headings beginning on page 371 m The options in the Placement group box allow you to specify what should happen if the document already contains a table of contents If you select Replace existing table the existing table of contents is replaced On the other hand if you select Create new table TextMaker leaves the original table in place and inserts an additional table of contents Additional information m You will find information about updating references in section Updating tables of references beginning on page 387 m You will find information about editing and formatting references in section Editing and formatting tables of references beginning on page 388 Bibliographies In the appendices to scientific literature you often find a bibliography This is a reference list of all the publications to which the author refers in the work TextMaker has functions that you can use to make working with bibliographies much easier These functions are best applied step by step as follows Step 1 First of all you need a bibliography database There you enter all your cited sources You can use an existing database an
83. into the document with the command File gt New see section Importing individual addresses beginning on page 317 The controls of the small database module have the following functions Data display The largest part of the window is devoted of course to the display of data You can work with data either in tabular form using the list view or in more detail using the form view To switch between these two views use the options List and Form in the lower part of the window You can use the usual keys to navigate Note Please note that editing of data is possible only in the form view To save changes to a data record you do not have to invoke any special command because changes to the active data record are saved automatically when you page to another record or exit the database Filter You can filter the data records as necessary To do this enter a search term in the Filter input field and click the Apply button The display of data changes immediately only those data records are displayed that contain the search term in any of their fields So if you filter for Miller only records containing Miller will be displayed Insert button Inserts the content of the active record into the document Only available when the database was invoked through a document template a topic covered in section Importing individual addresses beginning on page 317 Close button
84. is even possible to perform calculations on the contents of table cells see chapter Calculations in the text beginning on page 341 The following pages contain detailed information about tables Inserting a table To insert a table in the text move the text cursor to the desired position and invoke the command Table gt New Table A dialog box appears to allow you to specify the number of rows and columns the table should contain New Table xi Rows s e Columns 3 el Margins Cancel Left o 04 in 3 Right o 04 in el Top o 04 in E Bottom o 04 in 3 When you confirm with OK TextMaker inserts the table in the text Note for users of older TextMaker versions Beginning with the 2006 version TextMaker allows you to insert tables within text frames This was not possible in earlier versions The current version of TextMaker no longer provides you with a command for inserting table frames because this new feature makes table frames superfluous When you open a TextMaker document that contains table frames with the current TextMaker version all table frames will be converted automatically into text frames containing a table Editing tables You can enter edit and format text within tables in the usual manner When you insert a new table TextMaker automatically places the text cursor in the first table cell so that you can begin typing immediately You can type multiple lines of text withi
85. it see section Document summary beginning on page 429 m Autosave document every minutes When you enable this option TextMaker automatically makes a backup copy of every open document in a temporary folder on a periodic basis You can enter a period of 1 to 100 minutes When you exit TextMaker in the normal manner these copies are automatically deleted However if TextMaker is abruptly shut down by a computer crash or a power failure for example while you are working on open documents these copies become available when the program is restarted TextMaker recognizes that there has been a failure and offers to open the backup copies of all the documents that had been modified but not saved just prior to the failure You can then check each of the restored documents to determine if any of the most recently made changes has actually been lost and then save them with File gt Save Recently used files TextMaker displays a list of the files most recently opened in it in the File menu Pocket PCs the Recent menu If you select an item on the list the corresponding file will be opened immediately Using the Recently used files option you can specify the number of files to be displayed in the list Document properties With the File gt Properties command you can make settings that apply only to the current document and are saved with it These settings are called document properties The settable docum
86. key __ to remove the keyboard shortcut you entered 6 Don t forget Click on Add to assign this shortcut to the command 7 Confirm with OK and exit the main dialog box with Close From now on you can execute the Format gt Standard command with the key combination Ctrl F12 Ctr1 F 12 482 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Available keyboard shortcuts Notice that some of the keystroke combinations that are possible on your keyboard are not allowed as shortcuts As a rule you should use alphabetic keys numeric keys or function keys for shortcuts You can combine them with Cirl Ctri AljAIt and or the Shift key Shift It is very easy to check to see if the key combination you want to use is allowed Click in the Please press accelerator field and then try to enter your key combination If it does not appear in the field it is not allowed Some examples of valid keyboard shortcuts m Crl ACtri A m Alt A Alt A However key combinations including the Alt key are not recommended Alt A Alt A for example is already assigned to the Extras menu m Ctrl Aln AyCtrl Alt A m Ctrl Shift A Ctrl Shift A E Ctrl Alt Shift A Ctrl Alt Shift A m Ctrl F1 Ctri F1 E etc Note Alphabetic keys by themselves are naturally not allowed Thus you cannot use A A or Shift A Shift A as a shortcut Shortcut already assigned If you press a shortcut that is already assigned the current assign
87. keyboard shortcut to it see below 6 After you have made all the settings click on OK to define the style 7 Exit the dialog box with Close The style is now defined and ready for use You will learn in a moment how to use it in section Applying paragraph styles Using keyboard shortcuts If you need a format style very frequently you can always give it a keyboard shortcut The advantage of doing that is that you can then apply the style very quickly using a single key press 122 e Styles User Manual TextMaker To assign a keyboard shortcut to a style switch to the Style property sheet in the Format gt Paragraph Style dialog position the text cursor in the Shortcut key edit box and press the desired key combination Note If you press a key combination that is already assigned the current assignment is displayed below the Shortcut key edit box In that case you should press the Backspace key __ to delete this key combination and then enter another one Otherwise you will overwrite the assignment for another style or even for one of TextMaker s commands We recommend using key combinations that include the keys Ctrl Ctrl and shift Shift since these are normally not assigned Applying paragraph styles To apply a paragraph style do the following 1 Select the paragraphs you want to format 2 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style 3 Select the desired style 4 Click on Apply Tip
88. of the selected text is displayed to the right of the font type at present 10 point is set Click with the mouse on the little arrow to the right of the 10 to open a list of the most commonly used font sizes Choose 8 from the list Now choose also a different font type To do this click on the arrow to the right of the font and choose the Arial font from the list If you have not installed this font you can choose any other font you like After these modifications the Formatting toolbar will look like this R Normal Arial iis x BZ U The Arial font in the 8 point size was set oF 212 Eee Next we would like to emphasize addressee s city and zip code with bold type Select the line with the city and zip code in the receiver s address and then click on the B in the Formatting toolbar or press the keyboard shortcut for bold Ctrl B Ctr1 B The line will immediately be formatted bold By the way you can apply an italic format to text just as easily with the icon or by pressing Ctrl Ctri likewise you can underline with the U icon or with Ctrl U Ctri U And to reverse this sort of formatting simply apply it once more to the same text In the end the sender s and receiver s addresses should look something like this i Letter tmd Of x Escher amp Sons Architects 78 Baker Street Atlanta GA 30009 Fred Backfish 7 Shepar
89. of your document the positions and sizes of the headers and footers are adjusted automatically 100 e Page formatting User Manual TextMaker The following pages present everything you will ever need to know about headers and footers Creating and editing headers and footers To enter a header invoke the Insert gt Header command TextMaker then positions the text cursor in the header frame in the top page margin Here you can enter and format textas usual The header frame is initially only one line high however it grows automatically as you type text that extends beyond this single line or when you begin a new line with the Enter key W To get back to the normal text from the header frame simply click anywhere in the normal text with the mouse If you should later want to edit the header again you can invoke Insert gt Go to Header or click in the header frame with the mouse to return to the header and perform your editing The insertion and editing of footers is accomplished in a similar way A footer is inserted in the bottom page margin with the Insert gt Footer command and edited with the Insert gt Go to Footer command Note By default the header and footer apply to the whole document If you want to use different headers and footers within the same document you must divide the document into chapters Then headers and footers can be set up for each separate chapter see section Dividing a document into chapters
90. or reduced as you increase or decrease the percentages If you check the Keep aspect ratio option changes you make to the height will be applied automatically to the width as well and vice versa Rotation group box Available only for drawings Here you can rotate the object To do so enter the angle about which the object is to be rotated positive values correspond to clockwise rotation beginning at 12 00 Flipping group box Available only for drawings Here you can flip the object vertically or horizontally 228 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker Object properties Filling property sheet Note This property sheet is available only for certain types of objects Also in the case of pictures changes in the filling affect only their transparent parts On the Filling property sheet you can specify a color pattern picture or gradient to be used to fill an object First you select the desired type of fill from the Fill type list Then depending on the type selected you can make additional settings to specify the fill more precisely The following list of all the fill types includes descriptions of the settings that can be made for them individually a No Filling When you select the first fill type in the list the object is not filled and thus remains transparent E Solid When you select the second fill type the object is filled with a solid color You can select the desired color directly from th
91. other objects Inserting frames Selecting objects Object mode Changing the position size and margins of objects Rotating and flipping objects Aligning and distributing frames Duplicating objects Changing the properties of objects Functions for advanced users are described in the next section Frames advanced functions Inserting frames As you learned in the introduction to this chapter pictures and other objects don t have to be inserted directly into the body text they can be inserted in the form of frames Thus for example instead of inserting a picture directly into your document you can insert a picture frame The difference A frame occupies a fixed area on the page As long as you don t deliberately move it it remains always at a fixed position on the page A frame does not move when you enter or delete text above it 214 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker When you insert a frame you must specify its placement and size You do this by drawing a rectangle with the mouse To insert a picture frame for example you do the following 1 Invoke the Object gt New Picture Frame command 2 Now with the mouse draw a rectangle in the document that has the desired position and size Or Alternatively you can simply click in the document at the place where you want the upper left corner of the picture to be positioned The size of the frame will then be adjusted automatically to matc
92. page option objects that have been inserted on the master page can be moved only in the master page view see also section Master pages beginning on page 107 462 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker If you activate the Guides option guides can no longer be dragged with the mouse and can be edited only from the Object gt Guides amp Grid dialog see also section Using guides beginning on page 486 By default both options are disabled Decimal separator Here you can specify the character to be used as a decimal separator This setting only affects the behaviour of decimal tab stops If you change the separator character from a period to a comma for example numbers at decimal tab stops will be aligned not on periods but on commas Compatibility button Here it is possible to make settings that affect functions internal to the program in order to make these functions compatible with documents created in older versions of TextMaker or in Microsoft Word These options are set automatically when such a document is opened and normally should not be changed Document properties Colors property sheet The Colors property sheet in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to edit the color palette for the current document When you open a color list for example the color list in the Formatting toolbar you see only a small subset of the more than 16 million colors that are available This subset
93. paragraphs where you want the bullets to be removed Invoke Format gt Bullets and Numbering 3 Switch to the Bullets amp Simple numbering property sheet 4 Turn bulleting off by selecting the option None in the Type group box 5 Confirm with OK Options The Bullets amp Simple numbering property sheet in the Format gt Bullets and Numbering dialog box allows you to make the following settings for bullets m Type Here you can specify either a Bullet or Numbering for the paragraph So for bullets you select the Bullet option You will find information about the Numbering option in section Simple enumerations beginning on page 156 If you set the Type to None any existing bulleting or numbering is removed You can transform a bulleted list into a numbered list any time you like simply by changing the Type to Numbering Naturally you can also do the opposite Default and Custom Here you can select the bullet to be used Predefined bullets are presented in the Default row The bullets presented in the Custom row can be edited to create user defined bullets see below m Color default bullets only You can select a different color for the bullet from the Color dropdown list The default colors presented in this list can always be supplemented with colors you compose yourself see section Document properties Colors property sheet beginning on page 463 Tip If you set the color to Automatic
94. placed Normally all you need to do is enter the desired spacing from the left page edge in the Offset field For example if you set the Offset to 2 in the left edge of the object will appear 2 inches from the left edge of the page But you can also can set the alignment to be rightward rather than leftward If you do that the object s right edge will appear 2 inches from the right page edge The options for Position and Relative to provide additional control over the positioning when that is required You can for example set the position relative to the page margin rather than to the page edge If you do that the object s position will move to the right as you widen the left margin and to the left as you shrink it with similar results for altering the right margin on a rightward aligned object Each of the various horizontal position options is given below together with a description Position With the Position options you specify how the object is to be aligned Option Effect Left The object is positioned from the left Accordingly the offset is from the left page edge page margin etc to the left edge of the object For example the object s left edge would appear 2 in from the left page edge Right The object is positioned from the right For example the right edge of the object would appear 2 in from the right page edge Centered The object is positioned from the center of the page page margins e
95. process in section Outlines beginning on page 363 TextMaker already knows from the outline what headings the text contains and what hierarchical relations they have to each other Accordingly the creation of a table of contents is easy 1 Position the text cursor at the beginning of the line on which the table of contents is to be placed 2 Invoke Extras gt Generate Table of Contents 3 Specify whether a new table of contents is to be created at the current position or an existing table is to be updated by selecting the appropriate option in the Placement group box As soon as you confirm with OK the table of contents in inserted into the text Sample from a table of contents TextMaker puts the headings at the left to the right of each heading it inserts a tab followed by the corresponding page Options The functions of the options in the dialog box for this command are as follows m You can select an option for Include levels to specify the outline levels to be included in the table of contents By default all levels 1 through 9 are included m When you check the Use up to first tab option TextMaker examines each heading to see if it contains tabs If a heading contains tabs all tabs except the first are ignored when the heading is imported into the table of contents m The Use numbering option is checked by default Thus if you have numbered the headings in your document they will appear
96. properties Filling property sheet beginning on page 229 m Lines Here you can specify bordering lines See the section Object properties Lines beginning on page 230 m Shadow Here you can specify a shadow See the section Object properties Shadow beginning on page 231 m Properties Here you can change general properties See the section Object properties Properties property sheet beginning on page 234 For OLE objects there is an additional property sheet that presents options described in the following section Picture property sheet On this property sheet you can change settings that affect the graphical representation of the object Colors group box Options that determine the colors with which the object will be rendered Original colors The object will be rendered with its original colors Grayscale The object will be rendered in shades of gray B W The object is rendered in black white monochrome As you wish you can select other colors with Foreground color and Background color Not applicable to all types of OLE objects Cropping group box Here you can cut away parts of the object This is useful when you need only a certain part of it The entries are percentages For example if you want to crop the upper forth of the object you must enter the number 25 in the Top field E Settings group box Here you can vary the brightness contrast and gamma value a color balance adjust
97. read password he is permitted to open the document but not to save it If he enters the write password he has complete access If he enters a false password or nothing at all access is completely denied Important Remember or jot down your passwords paying attention to the cases of letters If you lose the password for a read protected document you will have absolutely no way of opening it Detailed information about enabling and disabling document protection is given on the following pages Enabling document protection You can protect your documents from being read or saved by unauthorized persons by applying document protection or to be more precise read and or write protection to them For example you can require the entry of a password to open or save a protected document When a document is read protected it is also encrypted so that it cannot be examined with the use of programs other than TextMaker To protect a document do the following 1 Invoke the command File gt Properties 2 Switch to the Protection property sheet 3 Select the kind of document protection desired see below 4 Enter the read and or write password at least 4 and no more than 15 characters Important If you forget a password you can no longer open or save the document Therefore it is advisable to write down the password paying attention to the cases of letters 5 Confirm with OK 6 A di
98. sheet you can assign a different AutoShape to the object Thus for example you can turn a rectangle into a speech balloon or any other shape you like To change the AutoShape select the desired category of shapes and then select the desired AutoShape Inner Text property sheet only for AutoShapes containing text This property sheet appears only for text frames and AutoShapes containing text see the section Adding text to AutoShapes beginning on page 252 On this property sheet you can change settings that control the text contained in the AutoShape m Inner margins group box Here you can change the margins between the AutoShape and the text contained in it If you check the Automatic option the program automatically determines appropriate margins mu Overlapping objects group box These settings determine what happens when the object overlaps another object With the default setting Ignore object TextMaker does nothing Thus in the region of overlap the contents of both objects are rendered on top of one another If on the other hand you check the Wrap text option TextMaker automatically reformats the text in this object so that it flows around the area of overlap E Rotate by group box Here you can rotate the text by the given angle 254 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker Vertical Alignment group box These settings determine how the framed text is to be aligned between the top and bot
99. should underline German words whose first letters should be changed to or from uppercase in accordance with the spelling reform You can do this with the option Respect upper lower case rules Note This option is deactivated by default since it would find many errors that are not really errors for the simple reason that most of the words that should now be capitalized can occur in contexts where they should still be written in lowercase An example In the sentence Ich habe Derartiges noch nie gesehen the word derartiges must now be capitalized in accordance with the spelling reform However if it is used in a phrase like ein derartiges Vergniigen it continues to be written in lowercase Here TextMaker would underline the word in spite of the fact that it is written correctly because it knows only the fixed rule From now on this word must be capitalized as need be Editing user dictionaries Occasionally a mistake is made and the spell checker is taught a word that is not spelled correctly The command Extras gt Edit User Dictionaries was devised for such a situation With it you can remove from TextMaker s vocabulary words that you have taught it To do this invoke Extras gt Edit User Dictionaries select the word to be deleted and click on Delete The word is now removed the spell checker will from now on view this word as incorrectly spelled as it did before the word was added
100. since only numerals are allowed also the leading zero will be automatically removed Notes on the supported database formats Databases that you create with TextMaker are stored in dBase format a widespread database format supported by many database applications The dBase format comes in different variants When you invoke the Extras gt Create Database command you can choose the desired variant by selecting it in the Files of Type list The following variants are supported File format Description dBase DOS Database with DOS character set This is the default format see note below dBase Windows Database with Windows character set dBase Unicode Database with Unicode character set Please note that this format is not dBase compatible see below Note Most databases are stored in dBase DOS format Even most Windows database programs use the DOS format instead of the Windows format Note on the dBase Unicode format Besides the common dBase DOS and dBase Windows format TextMaker also supports databases in dBase Unicode format This is a special dBase format developed by SoftMaker that supports complex scripts Asian scripts for example Thus you can store e g Chinese text in this format which is not possible with dBase DOS and dBase Windows format However please note the following limitation of the dBase Unicode format 326 e Database User Manual TextMaker Important Databases
101. special features are available to you when working with HTML documents and what you need to consider when using them Page formatting Page formatting does not apply to HTML documents If you make changes in the page format with File gt Page Setup the changes are not saved in an HTML document Colored page backgrounds and background images HTML documents can have a colored backgrounds or background images These effects can be added as follows m Changing the background color To add color to the background of the document invoke the command File gt Properties and switch to the Internet property sheet There you can choose the desired color from the Background color list box 414 e Internet functions User Manual TextMaker Properties xi Summary View Colors Fax Internet Info Protection Forms Reviewing l I Do not save colors in HTML file Show blink style as Eriw Background color Oto YS Background image poo Browse Unvisited link Bse o visited link Bark magenta Current link mra conc If none of the existing colors suits you you can always compose your own colors To do so click on Define color the last item in the color list see section Document properties Colors property sheet beginning on page 463 Note If you plan to change the background color the Do not save colors in HTML file option should remain unchecked If you enable this option the color s
102. specify when a toolbar will be visible Option Meaning All modes The selected toolbar is always visible provided it is not disabled Edit mode The toolbar is visible only in normal Edit mode and not in Object mode see also section Object mode beginning on page 216 Example the Formatting toolbar Object mode The toolbar is visible only in Object mode and not in normal Edit mode see also section Object mode beginning on page 216 Example the Object toolbar Outline The toolbar is visible only in Outline view see also section Using the Outline view beginning on page 365 Example the Outline toolbar Database mode The toolbar is visible only in the database module Example the Database toolbar Picture The toolbar appears only when a picture is selected Example the Picture toolbar Header Footer The toolbar appears only when the text cursor is in a header or footer To change the setting for one of the toolbars invoke View gt Toolbars select the toolbar and choose the desired option in Visible in mode Note Normally it does not make sense to change this setting for the standard toolbars Function toolbar Formatting toolbar etc These options are primarily meant for user defined toolbars 472 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Positioning toolbars You can position individual toolbars anywhere you like on the screen To do this you can either use the View gt Toolbars
103. style but the formatting of some of the text segments to which this style had been applied didn t change accordingly This happens when those segments had been reformatted manually An example Let s assume that you define a style with the Arial font and apply it If you subsequently change the style s font to Times New Roman all the text segments that are formatted in this style are reformatted accordingly But If you had selected a completely different font for one of these text segments with Format gt Character or the Formatting toolbar any changes you make to the character style thereafter will no longer be applicable to this text segment That is to say manually applied character formats take precedence over styles If you want to free such a text segment of its manual formatting invoke Format gt Standard The formatting specified for the applied character style will then be restored to the segment The character style Normal A character style named Normal is present by default in every document and has a special significance It is the standard style for the text When you start typing text in a new document the text is automatically assigned the Normal style unless and until you select another style which becomes effective from the current position If you change the Normal style for example by specifying a new typeface for it the new typeface is applied to the entire existing text to the ex
104. term when it creates the index and it will include the numbers of all the pages on which the term occurs Editing the keyword list The content of the keyword list can be edited at any time after terms have been added To edit the list invoke the Extras gt Index gt Edit Index Entries command and proceed as follows Deleting an index entry Keywords added to the list by mistake can be removed with the Delete button To remove an entry select it from the list and click on Delete mu Searching for occurrences of a keyword You can find the position in the text at which a specified entry in the keyword list occurs with the Go to button To do this select the keyword from the list and click on Go to TextMaker places the text cursor at the position in the text where the term occurs If the several occurrences of the term are recorded the cursor is positioned at the first occurrence The Index field In conclusion some technical information for advanced users When a selected term is added to the keyword list TextMaker inserts an invisible Index field in the text immediately following the selection For example if the term is fish the index field inserted is Index fish You can make these index fields visible by invoking File gt Properties switching to the View property sheet and checking the Display field names option In this way you can examine the text to determine exactly what terms have be
105. text cursor is just positioned in the bottom margin This is the area in which you can enter footers This time we will select the Arial font in 8 point before typing So select this font with the aid of the Formatting toolbar Now when text is entered it appears immediately in the chosen font For the footer type for example the address of our architecture firm and some other information like our firm s bank details Of course you don t have to follow the example exactly if that is too much typing for you Escher amp Sons Architects 78 Baker Street Atlanta GA 30009 Telephone 555 555 4242 Fax 555 555 4243 1 SunTrump Bank Atlanta Account No 123 456 78 Routing Code STB6 543 Next center both footer lines select them first with the icon in the Formatting toolbar so that the footer lines appear on the screen something like this i Tour3 tmd Of x Escher amp Sons Architects 78 Baker Street Atlanta GA 300089 Telephone 555555424 Fax 5555554243 Sun Trump Bank Atlanta Account No 123 456 78 Routing Code STES 543 To get back to the normal text after setting up the footer lines simply click on any position in the text with the mouse Later if you want to edit the footer lines again all you have to do is click again with the mouse on one of the footer lines Give it a try click on the line under Bring your family along in the text and
106. text paragraphs are assigned to outline level 0 If you subsequently assign a specific paragraph for example to outline level 1 you promote it to a level one heading Thus you specify the document s major headings by assigning the corresponding paragraphs to outline level 1 If you want to add subheadings under the major headings you assign the corresponding paragraphs to outline levels 2 etc An example The heading Changing the outline levels of paragraphs for this section of the manual is at outline level 3 The next higher heading is Outlines which is at level 2 The major heading reads Working with large documents and is at level 1 To change the outline level of a paragraph do the following 1 Invoke the Outline view with the View gt Outline command 2 Position the text cursor in the paragraph of interest 3 Click on one of the following icons in the Outline toolbar Button Function Q raises the paragraph s outline level by 1 lowers the paragraph s outline level by 1 DD sets the paragraph s outline level to 0 normal text Tip By default keyboard shortcuts Alj AIt 1 through Alj 3 Alt 3 are defined for outline levels 1 through 3 The keyboard shortcut Al 0 AIt 0 is defined for level 0 normal text Thus you can use these key combinations to very quickly assign headings to levels through 3 or convert headings back to normal text Moreover these key combination
107. the Track changes function make the desired changes and return the document to your colleague She can then review your proposed changes and separately accept or reject each of them If she accepts a change it is saved permanently in the document if she rejects a change it is removed You can of course apply comments and use the Track changes function in combination You will find detailed information about both these functions on the following pages Using comments You can insert comments anywhere you like in the text of a document by invoking the commands from the Extras gt Comments menu Text to which a comment is attached is highlighted with color If you point to such text with the mouse the comment is displayed in a small window Or if the comments pane is enabled the comment is displayed there When enabled the comments pane appears in the right margin of the document and displays comments associated with the visible text at all times By default that is unless you have enabled the Print comments option in the document s properties comments are only displayed on the screen and are not printed Tip Using the Reviewing toolbar The easiest way to apply comments is to use the Reviewing toolbar YeOe AB The Reviewing toolbar This toolbar appears automatically whenever the document contains at least one comment If this toolbar is not displayed you have probably disabled it
108. the record s sequential position in the database The first data record has the number 1 the tenth 10 etc The record number is displayed at the lower left in the status toolbar The command Select gt By number keyboard shortcut Ctrl B Ctr1 B allows you to select or deselect a range of records delimited by record numbers A dialog box appears allowing you to enter the desired range The range of the entire database is shown initially Here enter the numbers of the first and last records in the desired range separated by a dash for example if you want to select records 10 through 20 inclusive enter 10 20 If you then click on the Select button all data records in this range will be selected on the other hand if you choose Deselect they will be deselected that is excluded from the selection 336 e Form letters User Manual TextMaker Selecting by condition With the help of the command Select gt By condition keyboard shortcut Ctrl U Ctrl U you can make a selection by means of a condition for example select all records that contain Smith in the NAMEI field All records that fulfill this condition will then be included in the selection Important It is necessary only that the content of the field begins with the search term Thus continuing our example if the NAME1 field of a given record contained Smithfield TextMaker would select this record too You can combine sever
109. the active data record is displayed at the lower left in the status bar 308 e Database User Manual TextMaker You can call up a data record in the database module directly by means of its record number To do this use the command Go to gt Record number or press the keyboard shortcut for this command the F5 F5 key A dialog box appears you enter the number of the desired record there and confirm with OK The corresponding data record is then immediately brought up IRAE by bal This is even quicker if you click with the mouse on the record number shown in the toolbar and simply type in the number of the desired record Searching the database With the help of the command Edit gt Search keyboard shortcut Cirl F Ctri F you can search for an item in the database displayed in the database module The search function can also be invoked with the a icon in the Function toolbar Search For In field Jan fields we Cancel Options I Search from beginning I Search backwards I Case sensitive I Search only selected records Accuracy Search term anywhere in the field E When you enter a search term and confirm with OK TextMaker begins searching As soon as the term is found in a data record TextMaker displays the record and terminates the search process Continuing the search To display the next record in which the term is found click the al icon in the toolbar or invoke the command Edit
110. the break before them ensuring that they will remain together on one page Page break at row When this option is checked TextMaker inserts a page break before the selected row ensuring that this row will always be at the beginning of a new page Allow page break in row When you check this option TextMaker is allowed to insert a page break within the selected rows If TextMaker determines that an automatic page break should fall within these rows the break will be inserted and some of the rows will remain on the current page while the rest will appear on the following page By default this option is unchecked if TextMaker determines that an automatic page break should fall within the selected rows it will insert the break before these rows Repeat as header row This option is only available in the first rows of a table It affects only tables that extend over more than one page When it is checked TextMaker repeats the selected rows at the beginning of every subsequent page This is useful for example when the first two rows of the table contain headers that you want to appear at the beginning of every page of the table To do so select the first two rows and activate this option for them Cell properties The appearance of the current table cell can be modified with the Table gt Cell Properties command It goes without saying that you can select more than one cell or even complete rows and columns before you invoke
111. the following A You can click on Replace to have TextMaker replace the selected occurrence of the search term with the replacement term and jump to the next occurrence of the search term B You can click on Search again to have TextMaker jump to the next occurrence of the search term without replacing the selected occurrence C You can click on Replace all to have TextMaker replace the selected occurrence of the search term and all subsequent occurrences it finds in the text D You can click on Close to end the search and close the search dialog Repeating a search replace To repeat a search or replace operation or to continue a search or replace operation that was interrupted you can invoke the command Search again or Edit gt Replace again or simply press the F3 F3 key TextMaker then continues the search when it finds another occurrence of the search term it displays that occurrence Expanded search functions When you click on the Enlarge button in the Edit gt Search or Edit gt Replace dialog the dialog expands to offer additional options When you click on Reduce the dialog contracts and the additional options are hidden Thus you can specify the expansion or reduction of the dialog according to your preference for having the most options at your disposal or for having as much of the text as possible visible while you are searching The expanded search replace dialog offers the following additional fu
112. the height of all cells in the table to 2 in Caution If you enter too many fields in the mask so that they will not fit within this 2 in TextMaker will automatically increase the height of the cells it is on this account that this setting is called the minimum height m Records Group Box Here you select the records in the database that are to be inserted All only the Selected records see section Selecting data records beginning on page 334 or a Range of records that you specify with the record numbers for the first and last records in the range When you confirm with OK the list label definition is saved To now insert it into the text click on Insert TextMaker then grabs the fields from the database and inserts them into the document as plain text according to the mask you specified record for record You can now save the document send it to the printer with File gt Print etc Summary How do create an address list 1 Place the text cursor at the position where the list is to be inserted or start a new document with File gt New 2 Invoke Insert gt Lists amp Labels 3 Click on New 4 Enter a name for the list 5 Select the database that contains the addresses 6 As described above enter the desired database fields in the Mask input field You can separate individual fields with commas for example NAME1 NAME2 STREET 7 Ordinarily select the Insert as text option under F
113. the name you give it For example if you save a document under the name Letter its complete filename will be letter tmd As desired you can save a file in various other file formats This is necessary for example when you want to do additional work on a TextMaker document with another program You can also open documents in TextMaker that have been created with other word processors and therefore have non native file formats Saving a document in a different file format To save the active document in a different file format invoke the command File gt Save as and open the dropdown list Files of type Choose the desired format enter a new filename if desired and confirm with OK Opening a document stored in a different file format To open a document stored in a different file format invoke the command File gt Open open the Files of type list and select the format of the file to be opened Then select the file and confirm with OK Supported file formats The Files of type list in the File gt Open and File gt Save as dialog offers among others the following file formats Format Use Document The native format for TextMaker documents and the format in which files are normally saved Template Document template for TextMaker documents see section Document templates beginning on page 126 Microsoft Word Documents can also be opened and saved in Microsoft Word format Rich Text Format The RTF form
114. the properties of OLE objects The Object gt Properties command gives you access to a dialog where all the properties of an object can be edited An object s properties include for example its size and margins along with numerous other properties that you can set To edit the properties of an OLE object first select the picture with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to bring up the appropriate dialog In this dialog you can make the following settings Layout Format Filling Lines Shadow and Properties property sheets The first six property sheets are present for almost all kinds of objects They contain the following options m Layout On this property sheet the only settings that apply to OLE objects are those for outside margins The other options are available only for OLE object frames See section Object properties Layout property sheet beginning on page 223 m Format Here you can change the size of the object See section Object properties Format property sheet beginning on page 228 208 OLE objects User Manual TextMaker E Filling Here you can change the filling of the object However this function is not supported by all OLE applications See section Object properties Filling property sheet beginning on page 229 m Lines Here you can specify bordering lines for the object See section Object properties Lines beginning on page 230 m Shadow Here yo
115. these lines the cross in the middle in the Sample field and then select the desired line style Shades property sheet Here you can specify a shaded or patterned background for the entire table The options accessible on this property sheet are the same as those for the Format gt Shading command see section Shading beginning on page 90 Converting a table to text With the Table gt Convert Table to Text command you can transform a table into text An example You want to turn a table with 2x2 cells into a list in which the contents of the cells will be separated by semicolons Proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor in any cell of the table 2 Invoke the Table gt Convert Table to Text command 3 Select the desired Separator character in this case the Semicolon 4 Confirm with OK The contents of the table are immediately converted into normal text from left to right and top to bottom So if you convert a table like this one 186 e Tables User Manual TextMaker Celll Cell2 Cell3 Cell4 you will get text like this Cell 1 Cell2 Cell3 Cell4 Each row becomes a separate paragraph The Separator is inserted between the contents of each cell in every row Depending on the separator you select you will get the following results Separator Result Paragraph break Here a new paragraph is started for each separate cell in the table Tabs A new paragraph is started at the en
116. to configure the toolbars Show or hide toolbars Position toolbars on the screen Manage toolbars create delete or rename your own toolbars m Customize the icons in toolbars add remove or repostion them Create user defined toolbar icons to start other programs of your choosing These topics are treated in detail on the following pages in the order listed Showing and hiding toolbars You can enable or disable individual toolbars at any time for example when you want to gain more room on the screen for text editing Proceed as follows 1 Invoke the View gt Toolbars command 2 Click on the check box in front of a toolbar s name to enable or disable it The toolbar is enabled when a small check is present in the check box 3 Exit the dialog box with Close The toolbars you have checked or unchecked are now enabled or disabled Tip There is a faster way to do this When you click with the right mouse button on any toolbar you will get the toolbars context menu Simply click in the menu on the name of the toolbar you want to enable or disable Visible in mode Some toolbars are visible only in particular working modes of TextMaker The Formatting toolbar for example is visible only in normal editing mode When you switch to Object mode which is only for editing objects it disappears since it has no function in this mode The Visible in mode option controls this behaviour With it you can
117. to the specifications for the character style To remove the style apply the Normal character style to the text Keep in mind that text to which a character style has been applied can always be given additional formatting with Format gt Character Modifying character styles It goes without saying that you can modify character styles whenever you want Important When a character style is changed the formatting of all text segments to which this style has been applied is automatically changed accordingly However this automatic reformatting is limited for any such text segments to which manual character formatting has also been applied see next section To edit a character style proceed as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Character Style 2 Select the style to be changed from the list 3 Click on Edit 4 Make the desired changes in the style 5 Click on OK 6 Exit the dialog box with Close Your modifications to the style are now effective Deleting or renaming character styles To delete a style in the current document click on it in the dialog box mentioned above and then click on the Delete button To give a style a new name click on Rename and type the new name To delete or rename a format style in a document template open the document template make the changes there and then save the template 118 e Styles User Manual TextMaker The scope of character styles You changed a character
118. transparent areas See section Object properties Filling property sheet beginning on page 229 m Lines Here you can specify bordering lines for the picture See section Object properties Lines beginning on page 230 m Shadow Here you can add shadowing to the picture See section Object properties Shadow beginning on page 231 m Properties Here you can change the general properties of the picture See section Object properties Properties property sheet beginning on page 234 Besides the above mentioned property sheets the dialog contains an additional property sheet especially for pictures This property sheet contains options described below Picture property sheet Here you can change various settings that are specific to pictures Colors group box Settings for the colors in which the picture is displayed Original colors The picture is displayed with its original colors Grayscale The picture is displayed in shades of gray B W The picture is displayed in black and white You can select other colors with Foreground color and Background color if you wish Cropping group box Here you can crop the picture This is useful when you need only a segment of the picture The entries are given in percent For example if you want to cut off the upper forth of the picture enter 25 at Top 200 e Pictures User Manual TextMaker E Settings group box Here you can change the brightness contrast a
119. used to qualify a noun a red flower Interjection An exclamatory word Hooray Oh 296 e Language tools User Manual TextMaker Conjunction A connective connecting parts of a sentence and or etc Number A cardinal or ordinal number one first etc Preposition A word indicating the relation of a noun to a verb adjective or other noun in on under etc Pronoun A word used as a substitute for a noun you your our etc Noun m A substantive masculine the fish the stool etc Noun f A substantive feminine the flower the sun etc Noun n A substantive neuter the house the child etc Verb vt A word denoting an action transitive always with a direct object I write a poem Peter throws the ball Verb vi A word denoting an action intransitive without a direct object J slept The river flows Verb vr A word denoting an action reflexive related back to the subject Z hurt myself He threw himself into the work There are words that are classified under several parts of speech Thus the word good for example is used both as a noun and as an adjective In this case both parts of speech are displayed separated by a comma SmartTexts TextMaker s SmartText feature provides a way to lighten your workload considerably you can define SmartText entries for frequently needed phrases and then call them out in your text quickly and easily For example define a SmartTe
120. variables in calculations do the following 1 Invoke Insert gt Calculation 2 Type the variable s name followed by an equal sign and then a value or formula for example VOLUME 23 13 7 Important When you confirm with OK two things happen m The calculation is performed and the result is displayed in the text m At the same time the result is saved in the variable VOLUME Now the variable VOLUME can be used in other calculations for example the formula VOLUME 10 would produce the result 2093 10 that is 2103 You can also just call out the content of the variable VOLUME at another place in the text Simply move the text cursor to the desired position invoke Insert gt Calculation and type just the variable name VOLUME in the Formula box As soon as you confirm with OK the content of the variable will appear in the text If you look at the Insert gt Calculation dialog box a little more closely you will discover that every variable that is currently valid is displayed in the Variable Field list box Any of them can easily be inserted into the formula by double clicking on them Important A variable is valid only from the position in the text at which it is defined So if you insert the formula VOLUME 23 13 7 in the third paragraph of your document and then try to call out its content or reference it in a formula in the second paragraph TextMaker will respond with the error message Unknown variable name
121. want to save the document Tip You can close all currently opened document windows in one step with the command Window gt Close All Maximizing a document window Note This feature is available only in the Windows and Linux versions of TextMaker Normally a document window covers only a part of the program window But you can maximize a window when you want to concentrate on the document it contains Mouse Click on the O button in the upper right corner of the window The window then occupies the entire work space and covers up all other windows To reduce the window to its original size click the E button Keyboard Open the window s system menu with Alt Alt Minus and select the Maximize command To return the window to its original size select the Restore command Minimizing the document window Note This feature is available only in the Windows and Linux versions of TextMaker 442 e Document windows User Manual TextMaker If you want to get a window off the work space for a while without closing it you can minimize it The window then appears only in the form of an icon in the lower left corner of the program window Proceed as follows Mouse Click on the button in the upper right corner of the window To restore the window double click on the window s icon or select it from the Window menu Keyboard Open the window s system menu with Alv Alt Minus and sel
122. will open the example file Tour tmd that is provided with the program It contains our practice document as it should look at this stage of our work To open a document invoke the command File gt Open from the menu or by using the keyboard shortcut Ctrl 0 Ctr1 O 42 e The TextMaker Tour User Manual TextMaker S E Documents and Settings Normal tmy LanSchool Files Miki S 3 My Documents Dictionaries G Inspiration Docs oftMaker Business Card Fax Letter Memo Misc PlanMaker Settings File type all documents tmd tmy doc dot sxw odt rtf psw pwd htm cancel New window Quick paths w Preview File Manager First change to the folder containing the example documents On the Nova5000 they are found in the SoftMaker folder under the folder My Documents Switch to this folder and double click on the file Tourl tmd to open it if this file was included in your SoftMaker implementation Setting up a letterhead Naturally our letter needs a distinguished looking letterhead with the company name in a larger font and perhaps a line that explains what our company has to offer Let s get to work With Ctrl Home Ctri Home move the text cursor to the beginning of the document Tour1 tmd you just opened Now type Escher amp Sons Architects Design and Planning of Construction Pr
123. with OK In general you proceed as if you wanted to create a form letter but without entering the text of the letter and then save the letter as a document template If you want to learn more about document templates read through the basic instructions in section Document templates beginning on page 126 To view an example you can open one of the document templates supplied with the program Using document templates The use of a document template with a database assigned is very simple begin a new document with File gt New TextMaker now asks you what template to use as a basis for the document 318 e Database User Manual TextMaker If at this point you select a template that has a database assigned to it TextMaker displays this database and lets you choose the data record to be inserted into your text You page to the desired record and then click on the Insert button Here is the step by step procedure 1 Invoke File gt New 2 Choose one of the document templates that have a database attached either a template that you have prepared or one of the templates supplied with the program except Normal tmy 3 The database is opened automatically 4 Page to the desired data record Tip If you enter a search term in the Filter field and click on Apply only those data records that contain the search term will be displayed You can also type a new address by first clicking the Append button to append a ne
124. you divide the document into chapters Each chapter can have its own page formatting You should divide the document into chapters when for example you want to change the paper format in the middle of the document see section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 109 Page margins The blank areas between the text and the edges of the printed page are known as page margins To change the page margins invoke the File gt Page Setup command and enter the desired values in the Margins group box The left right top and bottom page margins can be set separately Note Changes to the page margins affect the entire document unless you divide it into chapters Each chapter can have its own page format So when you need to change the page margins in the middle of a document you should divide the document into chapters see section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 109 Tip If all you want to do is change the left or right margin of one or more single paragraphs you should use indents instead of changing the page margins For more information on this topic see section Indents beginning on page 74 Headers and footers Headers and footers are lines of text that are always printed the same way at the top and bottom respectively on every page of the document TextMaker places headers in the top and footers in the bottom page margins When you change the margins
125. your business address to appear in the document These fields can be edited with the Settings button Generates a serial number There is more about this in chapter Automatic numbering beginning on page 155 When you have made your selection click on Insert The field is immediately inserted into the text and its content is displayed there By default what is displayed is the result of replacing the field symbol with the data for which it stands Thus if you insert for example the Print date field the current date will be shown in the text Updating fields Whenever a document is opened or printed all the fields it contains are updated automatically Accordingly if you print a document containing the Print date field tomorrow tomorrow s date will appear in the document at those places where the field was inserted You can update the fields manually at any time using the Extras gt Update Fields or the F9 F9 key All the fields and calculations in the document will then be brought up to date Showing field names and shading fields When you want control over the fields contained in a document you can check the Display field names option Then TextMaker displays field names in curly braces instead of the results for which these names stand for example Print time for the Print time field instead of the current time To get to this option invoke the File gt Properties command and switch to
126. 3 Switch to the Font property sheet You can now select the desired color for the text from the Text color list box You can also specify a background color for the text using the Background color list box By default text has a transparent background If you select a color for the background the text will appear against this color somewhat as if it was marked with a highlighter Tip The text color can also be changed using the color list L 7 in the Formatting toolbar You can click on this list which is situated to the right of the size list and select the desired color If none of the existing colors suits you you can always compose your own colors To do so click on Define color the last item in the color list see section Document properties Colors property sheet beginning on page 463 Superscripts and subscripts You can position text above or below the baseline and in this way create a superscript e g r or subscript e g H20 To do this select the text invoke the command Format gt Character switch to the Spacing property sheet and check the Superscript or Subscript check box If you wish you can specify the amount of offset above or below the baseline by entering a percentage in the Position edit box In addition you can specify the size reduction to be applied to the superscripted or subscripted text by entering a percentage in the Size edit box For example if you want a subscr
127. 4 e Form letters User Manual TextMaker If desired you can specify exactly those addressees to whom a form letter is to be sent To do this open the database containing their addresses and select the desired data records Note TextMaker saves the selection permanently It remembers which data records are selected even after you exit and restart TextMaker There are three ways to select data records and they can be used in combination as you choose So you can for example first select data records by means of a condition and then manually exclude some data records from the selection The following selection methods are available in the database module m Manual selection With Select gt Current record you can include the current data record in the selection or exclude it If you invoke this command when the current record is not selected it is selected and vice versa With Select gt Select all records and Select gt Deselect all records all data records can be either selected or deselected at once m Selection by specific record numbers With Select gt By number you enter a range of record numbers to be selected or deselected Selection by condition The command Select gt By condition lets you apply selection conditions like select all Smiths or select all recipients living in Houston Detailed information about this selection method is given on the pages immediately following Navigat
128. E 249 inserting CKAWINGS issiria arichnpranikkuyan hekk aare eu rankka KSE hekk 249 Adding text to AutoShapes ceseceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeneneees 252 Changing the properties of drawings cceseeeeeeeteeeeteeees 253 Forms 257 Filling OUt TONS aot a a Betis ata Yel 258 Creating forms risnu seien eneid aan iaeia t ea eiai aai 261 Types of forms objects ceeeeeceeeeeeee nesr eeesaeeeeeeeceaeeeeenaeetenees 261 Inserting forms objects sesesesessseneer nernet nssrnsetnsstn neen nsennnenn 262 Editing forms ObjeCts cccceeseeeeceeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeneeeeaes 264 Preparing an example fOrm ccccceeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeestaeeeeneeeeaes 264 Fams ODJOCIS seevvece device a eet bee detent a ature 267 Textticlds ian teint tia 8 tia tan vee 267 Text frameSaivn ae ait etiva lata dele tana 269 Checkboxes vais iadii eta a aaea aa aaide ie 269 Checkbox frames nc ek tian aerae aatia ee aiaeei ei 271 DropdowniliStSi cth dietitian a 271 Dropdown list fraMe s ceccccceseeeseeeceeeeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeessaeeseeeeeaes 273 Labels and QroOUPDOXES csecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeneeees 273 Forms advanced functions cccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeaeeneneeee 275 Changing the tab Ordel eccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeseneeees 275 Protecting forms ODj CtS cccceesceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeessaeeeeeeeeeaes 275 Prot cting TOFS sick alee st
129. ET CITY STATE_ZIP If for some data record the NAME2 field is empty TextMaker automatically removes the resulting empty line Thus it prints the first and last names and then prints the street on the immediately following line If both FIRSTNAME and NAME1 were empty this line would be entirely suppressed Preventing the automatic suppression of white spaces In certain cases TextMaker s automatic suppression of empty spaces and lines may not be desirable To prevent such suppression use protected space characters in place of normal space characters You can insert them with the key combination Ctrl Shift Space Ctrl Shift Space An example your form letter contains the following text segment FIRSTNAME lt protected space character gt NAME1 Here the space character is printed even if FIRSTNAME is empty Moreover the line is not suppressed even if both fields are empty Calculations in the text With TextMaker you can easily perform calculations in the text m You can insert calculations directly into the text the results are displayed and printed m You can even use variables in calculations so you can obtain partial results and use these in further calculations m You can use both database fields and the contents of objects in calculations For example Table1 A1 represents cell A1 in table Table1 The dialog box that appears when you execute the Insert gt Calculation command
130. ETE AEA ERNEA 351 Simple calculations with the press of a button eeceeeeeennees 352 Formulas and functions 0 ccccceeceeceeecsceaeeeeececseseaueeeeseeeeeeuananees 353 The structure of a formula cseeseeesesesseeeenesrsnrssrenrnnrnennsnrrnnenns 354 OPEFALONS se checebees tices cece eve iedeatd aa E E ET 357 An overview of the computational functions 358 Working with large documents 363 OUTINGS er Soe faced E EEE Secale se ee EAE ENES EA eae ee SA 363 Using the Outline ViOW cccccsscecsesseeesseseeeesescaeeesseneeeessaes 365 Formatting h adingS ccccccceeesecceceeeeeseeeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneaees 368 Tips for experts Managing headings with paragraph styles 369 Practical OUUINING enone ea ia 370 Numbering headings ecccceeeesseeeeeecneeeeeenaeeeeeenaeeeeseenaeeeeseaaes 371 Outlined documents and chapters sseseeseeeeeeeeeeereeereee 374 Tables of references TOC index etc enrere 375 NACE S n e aeania coe Jc eae ioe a a TAN 375 Tables of CONTENTS ou a aa a a a Ea anran 379 Bibliographia S sigara asa Aa AAE NT AEA AAAA A 381 Updating tables of references sseesseesseseseeeeesrereere rennene 387 Editing and formatting tables of references eeeeeeeeee 388 CroSS referenCe 00 eeceecceceteceeeeceeseeeeeeeesaeeeeaaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaaesteaeeesaes 390 Inserting a Cross reference i eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeceaeeteneeeeees 390 Editing and updating a cross r
131. Filling Lines Shadow 3D and Properties property sheets The first seven property sheets are present for almost all kinds of objects They contain the following options m Layout On this property sheet you can change the position and outside margins of the drawing and specify how the body text should flow around it See the section Object properties Layout property sheet beginning on page 223 m Format Here you can change the size of the drawing See the section Object properties Format property sheet beginning on page 228 m Filling Here you can change the filling See the section Object properties Filling property sheet beginning on page 229 m Lines Here you can change the styles of the lines with which the object is drawn See the section Object properties Lines beginning on page 230 m Shadow Here you can specify a shadow See the section Object properties Shadow beginning on page 231 m 3D Here you can specify a 3D effect See the section Object properties 3D property sheet beginning on page 232 m Properties Here you can change general properties See the section Object properties Properties property sheet beginning on page 234 For some types of drawings the following additional property sheets will appear on the dialog giving you access to more options AutoShapes property sheet only for AutoShapes This property sheet appears only for AutoShapes On this property
132. General property sheet in the Extras gt Preferences dialog allows you to set various general preferences Open documents in new windows If this option is checked whenever you open a document using File gt Open or File gt New a new document window will be created If it is unchecked the current document will be closed and the new document will be opened in the same document window Note You only set the default state of this option here The File gt New and File gt Open dialogs have their own New Window checkboxes which allow you to specify on a document by document basis whether or not a new window should be opened for a document Beep on errors When this option is enabled a sound plays when TextMaker displays an error or warning message Use SHM extensions Linux only When this option is enabled TextMaker uses shared memory caching to speed up the responsiveness of the display Note Depending on the particular system in certain cases the amount of shared memory available might not be sufficient for TextMaker In such cases TextMaker automatically disables this option Show warning when loading OLE objects Pocket PCs and Handheld PCs only When this option is enabled TextMaker displays a warning that OLE objects cannot be displayed on Pocket PCs and Handheld PCs when you open a document containing such objects Show hide keyboard automatically Pocket PCs only If this option is enabled the on screen keyb
133. Inserting the page number date etc Headers and footers often contain the page number date etc With TextMaker you can insert this sort of information using what are called fields To do this move the text cursor to the desired position in the header or footer invoke the Insert gt Field command and select the desired field for example Page number or Print date You will find information about the various kinds of fields in chapter Fields beginning on page 147 Tip There are some buttons in the header and footer toolbar for inserting the most frequently used fields page number date etc See the previous section Example inserting the page number in a footer For example to insert the page number in a footer proceed as follows 1 Click in the footer to position the text cursor there 102 e Page formatting User Manual TextMaker 2 Invoke the Insert gt Field command 3 Select Page number from the Field type list and the desired representation of the number from the Data list e g Arabic 1 2 3 or Roman I II III 4 Confirm with OK TextMaker now inserts a page number field in the footer Controlling page numbering By default the first page of every document is assigned the number 1 However if necessary you can instruct TextMaker to begin with a different number To do this invoke the Format gt Chapter command change the Page number setting from Increme
134. Internet functions TextMaker is equipped with functions for editing HTML documents for the Internet E Opening HTML documents Internet pages are usually in HTML format With TextMaker you can open HTML files directly Invoke the command File gt Open and choose the HTML format from the Files of Type list box E Editing HTML documents The second section of this chapter covers the editing of HTML documents Here you will learn what functions are available for HTML format and how to use them E Saving HTML documents The last section covers the use of the command File gt Save as to save documents in HTML format once they have been prepared Detailed information is provided on the following pages Opening HTML documents Internet pages are usually saved in HTML HyperText Markup Language format HTML documents can be recognized by the extension htm or html appended to their filenames They can be opened in TextMaker as follows 1 Invoke the command File gt Open 2 Choose the HTML format in the Files of Type list box 3 Specify the file to be opened and confirm with OK TextMaker opens the HTML document and displays it on the screen Note The presentation of a document in TextMaker can differ from a web browser s presentation of it However you can always check the way the document will look in a browser by opening it in your own browser Editing HTML documents In the following pages you will learn which
135. LE object frame that will remain at a fixed position on the page You will find more information about this in section OLE object frames beginning on page 246 Acquiring an OLE object from a file Note The use of OLE objects is possible only with the Windows version of TextMaker If you don t want to create a new OLE object but want to embed as an OLE object a document that already exists in the form of a file created previously in another application you still invoke Object gt New OLE Object command but in this case instead of accepting the option Create New that is set by default in the dialog you select the Create from File option With this selection the look of the dialog changes Instead of the Object Type list a File entry field is displayed Here enter the full file name of the document file or click on the Browse button to bring up a dialog box that will enable you to search your hard disk for the file When you have specified a file and confirmed with OK the file is inserted as an OLE object When the OLE object is being inserted Windows checks the file name extension to see if it is associated with a program that can be started and handles the insertion process in accordance with the results of this check If the file name extension is not registered the embedded file is merely represented by a symbol On the other hand if Windows can relate the file name extension to an OLE capable program
136. Maker saves the file under the specified name and automatically appends the extension tmd for TextMaker document Thus the full filename reads Letter tmd The next time you invoke File gt Save this dialog box will not appear since the document now has a name Hereafter it will be saved immediately under its name By the way you could have exited the dialog box without executing the Save command You could have done that by clicking Cancel instead of OK on the control panel or by pressing Esc ESC This escape route is available to you in all dialog boxes Simple formatting Now we come to the more interesting functions for example to text formatting and thus to the application of fonts text emphasis bold italic etc indentation etc First we will insert a line with our return address above the address as is customary for letters that are to be sent in windowed envelopes So let s position the text cursor two lines above the address line 5 and type the address of our firm Escher amp Sons Architects 78 Baker Street Atlanta GA 30009 Of course this line is much too wide for a windowed envelope s view window and so we would like to decrease the font size a bit In this way we come to an important topic selecting First select then format Note You will find detailed information about selecting in chapter Working with selections beginning on page 57 To format
137. Maker lets you define a new database in dBase any time you want Working with form letters There is astonishingly little expense associated with the creation of form letters in TextMaker you set up a letter in the normal way place database fields in it and select the database records to be used You will find information about form letters in the chapter Form letters beginning on page 329 TextMaker uses the dBase format for databases This is the native format for DataMaker and many other database programs So you have a bridge between your word processor and the industry standard in the database world Opening a database To open a database in TextMaker invoke the command Extras gt Edit Database A dialog box appears and TextMaker asks for the name of the database to be edited Type the name or select a file from the list of databases displayed Databases with the following formats are supported File format Description dBase DOS Database with DOS character set This is the default format see note below dBase Windows Database with Windows character set dBase Unicode Database with Unicode character set This is a special dBase format developed by SoftMaker that supports complex scripts Asian scripts for example However apart from TextMaker only very few database programs support this format To select a database format open the Files of type list in the dialog mentioned above 304 e Datab
138. TextMaker will automatically set the color of the bullet to the color assigned to the paragraph at its right Size default bullets only Here you can change the size in points of the bullet as required Tip If you select the option Automatic TextMaker will automatically set the size of the bullet to the font size specified for the paragraph at its right Character button custom bullets only If you have selected a bullet from the Custom row the two options mentioned above are replace by a Character button Click on this button if you want to change the character formatting size color emphasis etc of the bullet Tip If you do not make any changes to the character format the bullet will automatically use the character format of the paragraph at its right Horizontal position Specifies how far the text is to be inset to the right to make room for the bullet m Vertical position Specifies the vertical position of the bullet on the line A negative value makes the bullet lower a positive value makes it higher Numbered lists property sheet This property sheet gives access to an additional option for creating bulleted or numbered paragraphs numbered lists Numbered lists can be saved and re used whenever you need them In addition numbered lists can have hierarchical numbering 1 1 1 1 1 1 etc 88 e Paragraph formatting User Manual TextMaker You will find information about numbered lists in sectio
139. User Manual TextMaker 2006 For the Nova5000 1987 2005 SoftMaker Software GmbH 2006 Fourier Systems Ltd Copyright This manual and the programs on the supplied media are protected by copyright The copyright lies with SoftMaker Software GmbH and its licensors Therefore neither software nor manual may be copied or distributed without the consent of SoftMaker Software GmbH Violators will be subject to civil and criminal prosecution SoftMaker Software GmbH D 90427 Nuremberg Germany and its licensors hold all rights and title to this program and manual Program and Manual 1987 2006 SoftMaker Software GmbH and its licensors Parts MicroVision Computer Hyphenation Spell Finder Microlytics Inc Xerox Corp Word Finder Microlytics Inc Selfware Inc Xerox Corp Swedish Thesaurus Alva Stromberg s Synonymordboken Linux Version Parts The FreeType Project www freetype org Nova5000 Fourier Systems All rights reserved The information in this document is subject to change without separate notice The software described in this document is supplied on the basis of the license agreement that accompanies the program package The use of the software is permitted only in accordance with the terms of this agreement Whoever duplicates the software or the documentation for any purpose except as permitted for his own use is liable to prosecution As arule names are mentioned in this work without reference t
140. User Manual TextMaker Master pages This chapter has already introduced you to headers and footers which have to be entered only once and then appear on every page This is a very useful thing but TextMaker has yet another trick up its sleeve The master page is likewise applicable to every page of the document However as its name implies it is not limited to a few lines at the top and bottom margins but can cover an entire page However only frames are permitted on a master page thus for example text frames picture frames etc For example if you wanted to enhance a letter with a watermark you would simply insert a picture frame containing an appropriate picture on the master page and set the Text wrapping property of the picture to Behind text The watermark would then appear on every page of the document and the text would flow right over it Editing the master page If you want objects to appear on every page of a document or chapter simply put them on the master page To do this switch to the master page view and insert the objects there Note Only frames text frames picture frames etc and drawings can be inserted on master pages You can find information about working with these objects in chapter Frames and drawings beginning on page 213 You edit the master page as follows 1 Switch to the master page view with View gt Master Pages 2 Make the desired changes For exa
141. When you do this all the selected cells are split in a single step Notice that the above described dialog presents a Join selected cells before splitting option if multiple cells are selected If offers the following options E If you choose Treat the selection as one cell and split it the selected cells are combined into a single cell before the splitting operation is carried out m If you choose Each selected cell will be split individually each of the selected cells is split into the specified number of rows and columns Splitting tables With the help of the command Table gt Split Table you can split a table horizontally The result is two separate tables To split a table do the following 1 Position the text cursor in any cell of the row at which the table is to be split 2 Invoke the Table gt Split Table command The table is immediately broken into two separate tables Formatting tables The following pages will acquaint you with the commands Table gt Row Properties and Table gt Cell Properties These commands are used to format table cells With them you can specify among other things the heights widths and margins of cells and change their shading and borders Row properties The Table gt Row Properties command is for modifying the formatting of complete rows in tables Before invoking this command select the rows whose format is to be changed If you do not select any rows the changes will be ap
142. With the help of text frames you can create text boxes within the body text for example you can highlight especially important information by placing it in such a box A text frame like all types of frames occupies a fixed position on the page Thus it does not move when you add or remove body text above it By default the normal body text is automatically broken at the boundary lines of the frame it flows around the frame Linking text frames Users who have experience with desktop publishing should be interested in the fact that text frames can be linked together at will When text frames are linked the text entered in them flows from one frame to the next See the section Linking text frames beginning on page 241 Inserting text frames To insert a text frame do the following 1 Invoke the Object gt New Text Frame command If you have activated Object mode you can alternatively click on the icon in the Object toolbar 238 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker 2 With the mouse draw a rectangle in the document to indicate the desired position and size for the frame The text frame is created and you can immediately begin entering text in it Important When TextMaker displays a red bar at the lower margin of a text frame this indicates that the frame cannot completely accommodate the text that has been entered In this case you must either enlarge the frame or reduce the amount of text
143. a along the page edges that it cannot reach For this reason text can be clipped on the page if small values are used for the page margins In such a case increase the appropriate margin or adjust the layout of the label mask If required using the commands Table gt Cell Properties and Table gt Row Properties you can fine tune the layout of individual labels which are nothing but table cells However such fine tuning is not usually necessary Managing lists and labels When you invoke the command Insert gt Lists amp Labels a list of all the lists and labels you have already defined is displayed You can manage them with the dialog s buttons Button Function Insert Insert a list label into the document New Create a new list new label see the previous section Delete Delete a list label Rename Change the name of a list label Edit Edit a list label Copy Copy a list label You can exit the dialog with Close Creating a database With TextMaker you can not only use existing databases but also create new databases To do this proceed as follows 1 2 Invoke Extras gt Create Database Input a filename for the database to be created and confirm with OK Define the first database field To do this give the field a unique Name select the appropriate field Type and the desired Length and then only for numeric fields enter the desired number of decimal places at Decimals Explanations of
144. abase you should consider carefully what fields you need what field types are appropriate for them and the maximum number of characters that each field must accommodate Notes about the field type With the field type you specify what kind of data can be entered into the field The field types are as follows the allowed length for each field is given in parentheses Field type length Allowed input Character 1 to 254 Character fields allow any type of input Numeric 1 to 19 Numeric fields accept only numbers as input You can set the desired number of decimal places with Decimals You can perform calculations on the contents of such fields see chapter Calculations in the text beginning on page 341 Date always 8 Date fields are intended for date entries Logical always 1 Logical fields are intended for yes no entries The allowed entries are limited to Y Y for Yes or N N for No Memo always 10 Memo fields accept any type of input Notes that you enter in these fields can only be viewed and edited not printed The width is always given as 10 but in fact you can enter up to 4000 characters Tip For numeric entries like telephone numbers zip codes etc select Character rather than Numeric Here numeric fields provide no advantages on the contrary If you try to enter the telephone number 011 49 911 3567 in a numeric field TextMaker will not allow the
145. about footnotes is presented on the following pages Inserting and editing footnotes When at some point in your text you want to refer your reader to an explanatory remark simply insert a footnote at that point and then type the explanatory remark TextMaker does the rest the formatting placement and numbering of the footnote for you You insert a footnote this way 1 Position the text cursor immediately after the word or phrase to which you want to append the footnote 2 Invoke the Insert gt Footnote command A submenu opens Select the Footnote command from the submenu 3 A dialog box appears There you can specify whether the footnote marker should be numbered automatically or assigned a user defined number Normally you should leave the setting at Auto numbered If you change the setting to Custom you must enter a number for the footnote yourself and the footnote will then be assigned this number 4 When you confirm with OK TextMaker inserts a superscripted footnote marker normally an automatically generated number It then creates an area for the footnote at the bottom of the page inserts a copy of the footnote marker in this area and repositions the text cursor in this area immediately following the marker 5 Now you can enter the text of the footnote To find out more about the settings hidden behind the Options button in the above described dialog refer to section Footnote options beginning o
146. aeeeseeaeeeeseaaes 169 Numbering with Auto NUMDEIS eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeteneees 169 Adding line NUMDETS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeecaeeeeeeeseceeeesaeeesaaeeeeneeees 170 Tables 173 INS rtiNng al talble se fear T eE cede haceha tees 173 ECILING TADOS ss csc Fete et ieee Sneed NE AAKA Gee the eee 174 Selecting table cells and cell Content ccecccsseeeessteeeeessaees 175 Deleting copying moving cell contents eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeeees 175 Deleting and inserting cell contents eee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 176 Deleting Cells from a table ceeeceeceseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeetaeeteneeeeaes 176 Inserting Cells in a table ceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeessaeeseeeeeaes 177 Joining and splitting table CellS ccecceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 178 Joining table Cals aorar ainan ek SATTAR OAE 178 Splitting table CellS ceeecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeseeeeseaeeneaeeee 179 Splitting tables annainn annant eas annaa aat 179 Formatting tables ee cccceseecceeseeeeeeeseeneeeeseeneeeseseeneeeeeeeneeteeeeneeees 180 ROW Properes otaa aaa T AAEE AEEA AAR ORASE ate 180 Cell properties 2 0 2 ecececececeeeeeeaeeeeneeceeeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeeeaaeseeneeees 182 Changing the overall properties of tables cceceeeeeeeees 185 Converting a table to text eccccececeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeteneeeeaes 186 Converting text into a table eee eceecec
147. ake a font selection Note also that once character formatting has been applied it can be removed at any time using the Format gt Standard command or the Reset button in the Format gt Character dialog box The text will then appear in the default font without any emphasis or other special character formatting Additional information on the topic of character formatting is presented on the following pages Typeface and font size To change the typeface and or the font size do the following 1 Select the text to be modified 2 Invoke the command Format gt Character 3 Switch to the Font property sheet Now you can set the desired typeface and font size m To change the typeface open the Typeface dropdown list box by clicking with the mouse on the small arrow to its right and select the desired typeface The most useful font sizes are presented in the Size dropdown list box You can select one of these sizes or enter a different size manually Type sizes can be given with a precision of a tenth of a point thus a size such as 12 7 is allowed Font sizes are customarily given in points abbreviated pt As a rule you should use font sizes between 10 and 12 points for normal text and a somewhat larger 64 e Character formatting User Manual TextMaker size say 14 to 18 pt for headings Major headings may be even larger 24 pt for example Using the Formatting toolbar You can also change the typeface an
148. al conditions as required for example NAME1 Smith and STATE_ZIP GA 30327 to select all Smiths in Georgia with the zip code 30327 When you invoke the command Select gt By condition the following dialog appears Select records by conditions xi Conditions Select Deselect Cancel Delete all Delete Database field Content To select for example all data records containing Smith at the beginning of the NAME field you would proceed as follows 1 Select the desired field from the dropdown list box Database field NAME1 following the above example 2 Enter the value you are seeking in the edit field Content Smith following the above example 3 Click on the Add button to complete the definition of the condition It will then be displayed in the Conditions list box You can now add additional conditions by repeating the three steps above 4 Click on Select to add all the data records that fulfill the condition s you have defined to the selection Or click on Deselect to exclude these records from the selection So if you now click on Select all the data records in which the field NAME1 begins with Smith will be added to the selection With the help of the Delete and Delete all buttons in the dialog box mentioned above you can delete previously defined selection conditions whenever you no longer need them Note Be aware that once data records have been selecte
149. all versions of TextMaker This chapter on OLE objects concludes with some information about the SoftMaker Equation Editor which can represent mathematical formulas in graphical form You communicate with the Equation Editor via OLE as described in the previous sections Thus to add a graphical representation of a formula to your document you insert an OLE object for which the Equation Editor is the source application To do this proceed as follows 1 Move the text cursor to the desired position in the TextMaker document 2 Invoke TextMaker s Object gt New OLE Object command 3 Select the SoftMaker Equation Editor entry from the Object Type list 4 Confirm with OK to start the Equation Editor 5 Create the desired formula Tip You can get information about the operation of the Equation Editor by pressing the F1 F1 key to activate the program s help function 6 When you have finished building the formula simply exit the Equation Editor The formula is immediately embedded in the TextMaker document as an OLE object You can edit objects created with the Equation Editor by double clicking on them Following a double click the Equation Editor is restarted and the formula object is opened in it After you make the desired changes simply close the Equation Editor again Moreover you can change the properties of an Equation Editor object by selecting the object with a single mouse click and
150. ally reformatted so that it flows around the frame Instead of creating a new object for insertion into the frame you can use an object that already exists in a file You do this at step 3 in the above described procedure by selecting the Create from File option and then specifying the file to be linked in rather than by selecting an object type You will find additional information about working with OLE objects in the chapter OLE object beginning on page 203 Changing the properties of OLE object frames To edit the properties of an OLE object frame first select the frame with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to gain access to the command s dialog In this dialog you can make settings as described below Layout Format Filling Lines Shadow and Properties property sheets These property sheets are present for almost all types of objects The settings they allow you to make are summarized below m Layout On this property sheet you can change the position and outside margins of the frame and specify how the body text should flow around it See the section Object properties Layout property sheet beginning on page 223 m Format Here you can change the size of the frame See the section Object properties Format property sheet beginning on page 228 a Filling Here you can change the filling However this function is not supported by all OLE applications See the section Object
151. alog appears and requires you to verify the read and or write password by reentering it 7 Confirm with OK 8 Exit the dialog box with OK 9 Save the document to make the changes effective From now on anyone who attempts to open this document will be asked automatically for the password If the correct password is entered the protection will be lifted for the duration of the edit session Using the above described dialog you can select any of the following types of protection mu No protection The document is not protected This is the default setting 436 e Document protection User Manual TextMaker m Write protection When the document is opened the user is given the opportunity to enter the write password The document can be saved only when the correct write password has been entered If the user enters a false password or no password at all the document is opened write protected and cannot be saved not even under another name m Read protection When anyone tries to open the document he is given the opportunity of entering the read password If he enters a false password or no password at all the document is not opened Furthermore the document is saved in an encrypted form so that it cannot be examined with programs other than TextMaker mu Protection depending on password Here the protection depends on whether the read or the write password is entered in response to the query at the time the documen
152. also be invoked by clicking on the icon in the Reviewing toolbar Make the desired changes in the small editing window that appears When you have finished editing click anywhere in the text to close the comment window The comment now reflects your changes Deleting comments To delete a comment do the following ie Position the text cursor anywhere within the text whose comment you want to delete 2 Invoke the command Extras gt Comments gt Delete Comment Tip This command can also be invoked by clicking on the Gl icon in the Reviewing toolbar The comment is now removed Displaying and printing comments There are two ways of viewing comments mu In the comments pane always visible When you insert a comment into a document for the first time or when you open a document that already contains comments the comments pane is automatically displayed in the right margin of the document The comments pane is a white area in which all the document s comments are displayed To clarify the relationships between comments and text each comment is connected by a line to the segment of text to which that comment refers You can turn the comments pane on or off as needed by invoking the command Extras gt Comments gt Automatically Show Comments Pane Tip This command can also be invoked by clicking on the E icon in the Reviewing toolbar Note Even with this option enabled the comments pane will not be
153. ame Wormal tmv File type ai documents tmd tmy doc dot sxw odt rtF psw pwd htm w cancel New window Quick paths w Preview File Manager The form of this dialog box can vary a little depending on the operating system but the function is always the same through this dialog you communicate to TextMaker what document it is to open To do this you can simply type in manually the name of the file to be opened However it can be done simply by selecting a file from the list since all files in the current folder are listed here and can be conveniently selected New window To open a document in a new document window you must have activated the New window checkbox Otherwise the document already in the active window is closed and the file is opened in its stead Opening files with other formats TextMaker can open not only its own documents but also other word processors files All you have to do is select the format of the file you want to open from the Files of Type list You will find information about the supported formats in chapter Working with other file formats beginning on page 439 Using quick paths With the Quick path button you can set up or cancel quick paths in order to be able to change quickly to a specified folder when opening or saving files You will find more information about this in section Quick paths beginning on page 427 The file manager With t
154. ames By default TextMaker searches only in the text frame in which the text cursor is presently positioned If the text cursor is in the body text only the body text is searched However if you check this option TextMaker searches not only the body text but also all text frames present in the document including headers and footers Reset button The Reset button clears the contents of the Search for field or the Replace with field including formatting depending on which of these fields contains the text cursor Format button The Format button enables you to search a document for specific formatting for example for all segments of text in bold characters or for all centered paragraphs Click on this button and set the formatting for which you want to search You will find more information about this function in the next section Searching replacing formatting Special button The Special button enables you to search a document for special characters and to use symbols for such things as any character Paragraph break a searches for the paragraph mark that is found at the end of every paragraph m Line break z searches for a manual line break Shift Shift E Tab t searches for tabs m Any number if you specify for example a search for 2004 TextMaker will find occurrences of 2000 through 2009 mu Any letter i
155. and by clicking the Edit button in the View gt Toolbars dialog box 3 Use one of the procedures described below to add remove reposition etc an icon 4 Exit the dialog with Close Tip The Extras gt Customize gt Toolbars command can also be invoked from the context menu for toolbars or by double clicking on an empty area in any of the toolbars When you invoke this command a dialog box appears and presents a list of all the icons that are available for addition to a toolbar Customize Ea Command Save as Save all x Edit Hint Use your mouse to drag any of these symbols into the desired control strip The icons for the individual commands are organized under several categories to make them easier to find If you select a category in the Group list all the available icons in that category will be displayed in the Command list Editing the icons in a toolbar works as follows m Adding an icon Simply drag the icon with the mouse from the dialog box directly to the desired position on the toolbar 476 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Deleting an icon Drag the icon off the toolbar into the text for example to delete it Repositioning an icon Drag the icon to the desired position in the toolbar with your mouse When you drag an icon to a position between two other icons it is inserted there You can also drag an icon from one toolbar to another Inserting a sepa
156. ange the text in tables of references anyway and there are much more elegant ways to change their formatting Tip Tables of references are automatically formatted using paragraph styles and their formatting can be conveniently modified with the help of these styles When you create a table of contents index or bibliography TextMaker creates the following styles for each 388 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker TOC 1 through TOC 9 Paragraph styles for entries in the table of contents according to outline level Entries for the first outline level i e for major headings are formatted with the TOC 1 style entries for the second level are formatted with the TOC 2 style etc Index The paragraph style for entries in the index Index Heading The paragraph style for the large letters that are used as headings for sections of the index when the First letter option has been selected prior to the creation of the index Bibliography The paragraph style for entries in the bibliography Thus if you want to change the formatting of a table of references you can change one or more of these styles For example if you want to increase the font size for the major headings in the table of contents all you have to do is change the TOC 1 style accordingly I 2 3 4 5 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style Select the TOC 1 style from the list
157. aphy database This is a database in dBase format in which information about all the sources can be entered It is recommended that each document have its own bibliography database However if you are planning to write multiple documents that will refer to exactly the same sources then of course you can set up a single database that will be common to all those documents The structure of a bibliography database A bibliography database must contain at least the following fields m afield for a unique abbreviation for the source see below E afield for the name of the author of the source E afield for the title of the source The abbreviation must be distinct for every source By convention the abbreviation consists of author s initials and the year of publication For example if the source were a book the author Harry Smith had published in 1979 HS1979 or HS79 would be used as the abbreviation Apart from the requirement that it must contain the above listed three fields the database can be organized in whatever way is preferred For example it can contain fields for the date of publication the publisher etc 382 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker Tip TextMaker s document folder contains a simple example database called biblio dbf that you can examine Under Windows this file can be found in the SoftMaker folder under My Documents Setting up a new bibliography database Unless you already have
158. aragraph s indentation is taken into account Thus if Position is set to Left for example and you increase the left indent of the paragraph by 0 5 in the object will move to the right by 0 5 in If necessary you can review the description of anchors in the section Changing the position of objects beginning on page 218 Offset Finally you can set the desired spacing in the Offset field Example If Position is set to Left Relative to Page borders and Offset to 2 in the left edge of the object will appear 2 in from the left page margin If this margin is 1 in wide the left edge of the object will be 3 in from the left page edge 224 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker Vertical Position group box This option is available only for frames and drawings The same goes for setting the vertical positioning as for setting the horizontal You can use the default settings and simply enter the distance from the top of the page at which you want the object to be positioned in the Offset field Alternatively you can make use of the expanded options to specify the position Position The Position options allow you to specify how the object is to be aligned Option Effect Top The object is positioned from the top If the offset is 2 in for example the top of the object will be positioned 2 in from the top edge of the page top page margin etc Bottom The object is positioned from the bottom If
159. are available for this OLE object There is an Edit command for editing the object Invoke this command 3 The application from which the OLE object originated now starts Make the desired changes To return to TextMaker simply exit the object s source application When exiting some applications you will be asked if you want to update the object in the TextMaker document Answer Yes otherwise your changes will be discarded 206 e OLE objects User Manual TextMaker Editing links If you acquire an OLE object from a file with the Link option checked see Acquiring an OLE object from a file beginning on page 205 you can edit the resulting link to the source file with the Edit gt Link command When you invoke this command a dialog box appears and displays a list of all the existing links in the current document When you select a link from the list the name and type of the source file to which the link refers are displayed in the lower part of the dialog box The dialog s buttons allow you to perform the following functions Button Function Update Updates the OLE object Use this button if the source file has been modified by Now another program and the changes are not visible in the TextMaker document Open Starts the application associated with the OLE object allowing you to edit the Source object in the application Tip Double clicking on the object has the same effect Change Lets you select a
160. art of the manual These chapters are organized by subject like a referencebook and describe all the functions of TextMaker in detail Typographical conventions Menu commands and dialog box components are identified with bold type throughout this manual For example File gt New refers to the command New in the File menu File names are given as follows c images beach jpg The Enter key is represented by the direction keys by lt 4 etc To enter a key combination such as Alt F AIt F press the F F key while holding down the Al Alt key Important Especially important notes or useful tips are highlighted like this Starting TextMaker Use the Start menu to start TextMaker Go to Start gt Programs gt SoftMaker Office gt TextMaker to open TextMaker Note When opening TextMaker for the first time you will be asked to enter your name and contact information This is not for registration purposes but allows you to insert your name mailing address etc in documents through the USERFIELD function You can change this information at any time 16 e Welcome User Manual TextMaker The application screen On the following pages we present you with the individual components of TextMaker s user interface If you have not had much experience working with computers you should pay special attention to this chapter Eile Edit Yiew Format Insert Object Table Extras Window Help x QeoRia
161. arts a new number sequence at the selected paragraph in other words resets the numbering of paragraphs at the current level to 1 Note If multiple paragraphs are selected when the command is invoked the first selected paragraph becomes the basis for resetting the numbering Changing list levels with the Formatting toolbar When working with paragraphs to which a hierarchical numbered list has been applied you can use the following buttons in the Formatting toolbar to conveniently change the paragraph s list levels Lowers the list level Raises the list level Modifying numbered lists You can modify a previously defined numbered list at any time To do so proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command 2 Switch to the Numbered Lists property sheet 3 With a mouse click select the numbered list that you want to edit 4 Click on the Edit button 5 Make the desired changes 6 Confirm with OK The numbered list is immediately modified in accordance with your new settings If you want to apply the modified list to the paragraphs currently selected in the text click on Apply Otherwise click on Close Note Changes to a numbered list affect all paragraphs that have been formatted with this list 168 e Automatic numbering User Manual TextMaker Deleting and renaming numbered lists To delete a numbered list select the list in the above mentioned dialog and then click on the Delete button
162. ase User Manual TextMaker Note Most databases are stored in dBase DOS format Even most Windows database programs use the DOS format instead of the Windows format If you are not sure whether a database contains the DOS or the Windows format open the file as dBase DOS and check if characters with accents or umlauts e g or a are displayed correctly If they are not close the database and reopen it in dBase Windows format Using the database module When you open a database as just described TextMaker s database module appears In TextMaker for Windows Linux and Handheld PCs a large database module with expanded database functions is integrated On Pocket PCs only a small database module with basic functions is available Note This section of the manual is concerned exclusively with the large database module for Windows Linux and Handheld PCs If you are using TextMaker on a Pocket PC you may want to skip this section and jump to section Using the database module beginning on page 315 The database module s main window Let s assume that you open the database tmw dbf format dBase DOS that was supplied with the program Under Windows this file can be found in the SoftMaker folder under My Documents You are presented with a database window that looks something like this TextMaker Database tmw dbf ofi x FE Eile Edit view Goto Select Window H
163. at is especially suitable for document exchange It supports practically all kinds of formatting and can be read by many word processors HTML HTML format for Internet documents see chapter Internet functions beginning on page 413 TextMaker DOS Opens a document that was created with TextMaker for DOS version 3 0 or higher import only saving in this format is not possible Text file Text file without any formatting with standard Windows character set ANSI Text file DOS Text file with DOS character set required by DOS applications only Text file Unicode Text file with Unicode character set All three major variants little endian big endian and UTF 8 can be read in Text file UNIX Text file in Unix format lines end with linefeed LF characters only rather than with carriage return and linefeed characters CR LF Besides these the list contains various other word processor file formats that TextMaker can open save 440 e Working with other file formats User Manual TextMaker Document windows In TextMaker every document that you create or open is displayed in its own document window This feature allows you to work on multiple documents at the same time and copy data between them as needed In this chapter you will learn how to use document windows Creating a document window To create a new empty document window invoke the File gt New command If you would like to create a new window and
164. at the same time open a file in it use the File gt Open command Both commands are described in chapter Basics beginning on page 23 Note A new document window is opened only when the New Window option in the File gt New or File gt Open dialog is enabled Otherwise TextMaker replaces the content of the currently active window By the way with the help of the Extras gt Preferences command you can change the default setting for the New Window option If you disable the Open documents in new windows option on the General property sheet a new window will no longer be set up by default when you create or open a document Activating a document window Keyboard entries and menu commands always affect only the currently active document window To activate a specific window you can do one of the following Keyboard Open the Window menu It contains a list of all open document windows along with the corresponding document filenames Here you can choose the window you want to activate Mouse only in Windows and Linux versions Click anywhere within the window you want to activate provided it is visible Closing a document window If you want to conclude your work on a document you can close it by invoking the File gt Close command The active document window together with its content is now closed If the document has changed since it was last saved a message box appears first questioning whether you
165. at their fixed positions on the page This means that a frame does not move when you add or delete text above it Thus frames are useful whenever you want to include text boxes pictures or similar objects in your document and you want those objects to remain at specified positions on their pages A frame can be inserted right on top of existing body text The existing text is then automatically reformatted in such a way that it flows around the frame In this chapter you will learn everything you need to know to becomefamiliar with frames and drawings The chapter is divided into the following sections m Frames basic functions beginning on page 214 Here you will get acquainted with basic operations such as inserting selecting and editing frames and other objects E Frames advanced functions beginning on page 235 This section is for advanced users Here you will learn how to hide group etc frames In the final sections we describe individually and in detail the kinds of frames that you can use m Text frames beginning on page 238 contain boxed text Picture frames beginning on page 242 contain pictures OLE object frames beginning on page 246 contain OLE objects m Drawings beginning on page 249 are frames that contain drawing objects including lines rectangles and other shapes Frames basic functions In this section you will find basic information about working with frames drawings and
166. ately for each amount select the corresponding calculation field invoke Insert gt Calculation choose the Fixed option for Decimals and enter a 2 beside it Table cells in calculations You can also use the cells in tables for calculations much as you would the cells of a spreadsheet Pay attention to the status toolbar at the bottom edge of the program window as you move from cell to cell in a table The coordinates of the active cell in the table are shown there TextMaker designates the rows of a table with numbers the columns are assigned the letters A to Z then AA AB AC etc just like in a spreadsheet icici Soci nice So the first cell in a table has the coordinates column A and row 1 or Al for short To insert calculations on the contents of cells into a table invoke Insert gt Calculation and simply enter the coordinates preceded by signs So the correct formula for add the contents of cells Al and A2 would be A1 A2 The sign tells TextMaker that it should treat the content of the cell as a number If the cell s content is to be treated as text use the dollar sign for example Al Calculations with table cells are possible only within a table If you typed C5 D28 outside a table in normal text TextMaker would not know what to do with it Nevertheless there is a way to reference calculations with table cells in the text Carry out the calculation i
167. be modified select them 2 Invoke the Format gt Paragraph command 3 You will find the options for line spacing in the Line spacing group box First select the method you want to use to specify the line spacing see below from the dropdown list box Then enter the spacing in the edit box to its right When you confirm with OK the line spacing will be changed according to your settings 76 e Paragraph formatting User Manual TextMaker Methods of specifying the line spacing You can specify the line spacing in three different ways The dropdown list in the Line spacing group box which was described above allows you to choose from the following methods m Auto automatic line spacing With automatic line spacing TextMaker determines the optimum line spacing automatically If you increase the font size in the paragraph it increases the line spacing automatically If you decrease the font size it automatically reduces the line spacing To the right of the list box you can enter a percentage The default value of 100 percent corresponds to a normal automatic line spacing if you enter 150 the automatically determined spacing is multiplied by 1 5 etc m Exactly fixed line spacing Here you can enter the line spacing manually in points Tip a rule of thumb for correct line spacing is line spacing font size x 1 2 So for a 10 point font a line spacing of about 12 points is suggested E At least automatic line
168. ble this option numbers 1000 and above are represented with thousands separators For example 1230000 is shown as 1 230 000 m Hide result If you choose this option the result of the calculation is not visible in the text This makes sense when for example you want to perform intermediate calculations with variables and do not want to show the results Note To make a hidden calculation visible again invoke the command File gt Properties change the View property sheet and activate the Display field names option Now you can select the calculation again invoke Insert gt Calculation and disable the Hide result option Decimal places With the default setting Floating as many decimal places are shown as are required to represent fully the result of the calculation You can select instead the Fixed option and enter a fixed number of decimal places to be shown For monetary amounts for example the number of decimal places should be fixed at 2 Attention The value is not actually rounded by setting a fixed number of decimal places only its representation is rounded see below Actually rounding variables It is essential to note that the options for setting the number of decimal places just described change only the way the results of a calculation are displayed In reality the variable retains its original precision In practice this means that if you assign a value of 2 5 to variable A and set the number of decimal place
169. box invoke the Object gt New Forms Object gt Label or the Object gt New Forms Object gt Groupbox command Then use the mouse to draw a rectangle in the document to represent the desired position and size of the object Usage of labels and groupboxes In contrast to all other types of forms objects labels and groupboxes cannot be filled in They can be used only to add non editable captions or legends to the form Changing the properties of labels and groupboxes After you have selected a label or groupbox with a mouse click you can invoke the Object gt Properties command to change the properties of the object The following options are available Layout property sheet On this property sheet you can change the object s position and outside margins as well as other properties See the section Object properties Layout property sheet beginning on page 223 Format property sheet On this property sheet you can change the size of the object See the section Object properties Format property sheet beginning on page 228 Properties property sheet On this property sheet you can make settings that affect general properties of the object See the section Object properties Properties property sheet beginning on page 234 Label property sheet On this property sheet you can make settings for the text that is displayed in the label or groupbox mg Text group box Here you enter the text to be displayed
170. ces command These settings apply to the program as a whole and thus to all documents E Changing document properties To modify the properties of a document use the File gt Properties command These settings affect the current document only Customizing the document display This section describes how to adjust the way a document is presented on the screen and how to set the zoom level Most of the necessary commands are found in the View menu Customizing toolbars To customize toolbars such as Function toolbar Formatting toolbar etc use the View gt Toolbars command m Customizing keyboard shortcuts To customize keyboard shortcuts for menu commands use the Extras gt Customize gt Keyboard Mappings command mu Using guides and grid Guides and grid are aides for positioning objects like frames and drawings that you insert or move They can be adjusted with the command Object gt Guides amp Grid These topics are treated in detail on the following pages in the order listed Preferences To modify TextMaker s global preferences use the Extras gt Preferences command These settings apply to all documents The dialog box associated with this command contains several property sheets each of which presents options relating to a different topic If you click on the Files property sheet for example you will be able to make settings that control the opening and saving of files Preferences View prop
171. ck on one of the small arrows to the right of the list to move the item up or down 272 e Forms User Manual TextMaker m Lines max Available only for dropdown list frames Determines the maximum number of lines to be displayed when the list is opened E 3D effect If you check this option the list is drawn with a 3D effect With dropdown list frames you can also specify the character formatting font size color etc for the list items Dropdown list frames You insert dropdown list frames with the Object gt New Forms Object gt Dropdown Frame command The usage and behavior of a dropdown list frame correspond to those for a dropdown list see the previous section The difference A dropdown list frame like all types of frames has a fixed position on the page Thus it does not move when you insert or delete text above it The normal body text is automatically formatted in such a way that it breaks at the boundaries of the frame it flows around the frame Labels and groupboxes Besides the forms objects described above there are two additional types of forms objects that are intended not to be filled in but to be used merely for captions Labels Any caption or legend that should appear in the form can be entered in a label Groupboxes A groupbox is a rectangle with a caption at its upper left Groupboxes can be used for the visual grouping of related parts of a form To insert a label or a group
172. ck this option to cause TextMaker to skip these paragraphs when assigning numbers Character button You can click on this button to change the character formatting font size emphasis etc for the numbers Horizontal position Allows you to specify how far the text should be indented to the right to make room for the numbers Vertical position Allows you to specify the vertical position of the numbers Negative values cause the numbers to be lowered positive values cause them to be raised Numbered lists property sheet This property sheet provides control over the creation of numbered lists A numbered list has special features that distinguish it from a simple enumeration the layout of a numbered list can be saved and reused In addition a numbered list can have a hierarchical organization 1 1 1 1 1 1 etc Information about numbered lists is presented in the next section Numbered lists Advanced TextMaker users will already appreciate the advantages of paragraph styles which are described in chapter Styles You can save a frequently needed paragraph format in a paragraph style and then apply it over and over again to any paragraphs you wish Something similar is available for enumerations numbered lists These work somewhat like paragraph styles When you want to apply a certain kind of enumeration frequently in a document set up a numbered list When you do so a dialog like the one for simple
173. cking on it Changing the properties of dropdown lists You can change the properties of one of these objects by selecting it with a mouse click and then invoking the Object gt Properties The following options are available Layout property sheet Available only for dropdown list frames On this property sheet you can change the object s position and outside margins as well as other properties See the section Object properties Layout property sheet beginning on page 223 Format property sheet Available only for dropdown list frames On this property sheet you can change the size of the object See the section Object properties Format property sheet beginning on page 228 Properties property sheet On this property sheet you can make settings that affect general properties See the section Object properties Properties property sheet beginning on page 234 Dropdown property sheet On this property sheet you can make settings that are specific to dropdown lists List entries group box Here you specify the items that should appear in the dropdown list You do this as follows To add an item Enter the name of the item in the New entry field and press the Enter key or click on the Add button To remove an item Select the item in the list of entries and click on the Remove button To change an item Remove the item and reinsert it To change the order Select one of the items in the list and cli
174. create a new document template proceed as follows 1 Start a new document or open a document or document template that you want to use as a basis for the new template 2 If the document template is to contain text create and edit this text in your new document 3 Make any desired changes to the character and paragraph styles 4 Invoke File gt Save as 5 Select the entry Template from the Files of Type list box 6 At this point TextMaker switches automatically to the folder where document templates are kept 7 Type a name for the template in the File name edit box omitting the extension TextMaker automatically appends the filename extension tmv 8 Confirm with OK Organizing templates in several folders You can use the New Folder button at any time to set up a new folder under the Templates folder then switch to the new folder and save the template there In this way templates can be stored in separate folders according to application For example the document templates supplied with TextMaker are organized under folders named Letter etc Applying document templates To make use of a document template simply begin a new document with File gt New TextMaker automatically asks you what template you want to use as a basis for the new document So you do the following 1 Invoke File gt New 2 A dialog appears allowing you to select the desired document template from a list You will see both templat
175. ct gt New Forms Object command 2 A submenu opens There select the desired object type 262 e Forms User Manual TextMaker 3 Only for frames Draw a rectangle in the document with the mouse to represent the desired position and size of the object 4 For some types of objects a dialog appears at this point to enable you to make various settings for the object After you have made the necessary settings confirm with OK The object is immediately inserted You will find detailed information about each individual type of forms object in the section Text fields and in following sections of this chapter beginning on page 267 Using the Forms toolbar You can also use the Forms toolbar to insert forms objects To activate or deactivate this toolbar invoke the View gt Toolbars command and click on the checkbox to the left of Forms Editing Forms editing 5 a m B eae The Forms toolbar contains the following icons from left to right Insert text field Insert checkbox Insert dropdown list Insert text frame Insert checkbox frame Insert dropdown list frame Insert label Insert groupbox Enable disable the shading of forms fields emphasizes all text fields checkboxes and dropdown lists in the text with gray shading Activate deactivate Forms mode corresponds to the menu command View gt Forms Mode Tip When you move the mouse pointer over one of the icons without clicking a text box appears in
176. ction Text frames beginning on page 238 Checkboxes You insert checkboxes with the Object gt New Forms Object gt Checkbox Checkboxes can be used in forms for yes no entries The box is checked to represent yes when unchecked it means no Usage of checkboxes Simply click on the box not the text to put a checkmark in it that is to check it If you click on it again the check mark is removed Changing the properties of checkboxes You can change the properties of one of these objects by selecting it with a mouse click and invoking the Object gt Properties command The following options are available Layout property sheet Available only for checkbox frames On this property sheet you can change the object s position outside margins and additional properties See the section Object properties Layout property sheet beginning on page 223 Format property sheet Available only for checkbox frames On this property sheet you can change the size of the object See the section Object properties Format property sheet beginning on page 228 Properties property sheet On this property sheet you can make settings that affect general properties See the section Object properties Properties property sheet beginning on page 234 Checkbox property sheet On this property sheet you can make settings that are specific to checkboxes m Text Here you can enter the text that should be displayed to th
177. ctions by using the buttons Button Function 294 e Language tools User Manual TextMaker Look up Looks for alternatives to the selected synonym Replace Replaces the word in the text with the selected synonym Close Exits the thesaurus The translation dictionary Note The translation dictionary is not included in all versions of TextMaker Some versions of TextMaker contain an especially useful tool for writing foreign language documents With the translation dictionary you can translate words to and from German English French Italian and Spanish with the press of a button Using the translation dictionary Simply place the text cursor on the word to be translated The word s language doesn t matter it is recognized automatically by TextMaker If you want to translate a phrase consisting of several words you must select them all beforehand Then invoke Extras gt Translation Translation xi Word Look up Tisch x Replace word to look up Translations Close Languages w 1 eit Type noun m es e Type noun s Info Info If TextMaker does not recognize the word it presents a list of words with similar spellings Otherwise possible translations of the word are presented If you want a word to be translated into German you will just get the German translation On the other hand if you start with a German word you are supplied with translations
178. culates the total for the current database record So using Insert gt Calculation insert appropriate calculations at the desired positions 6 When everything has been entered you can save the document Next select some database records and print your invoices with File gt Print Merge You will find an example in TextMaker s document folder the files invoice tmd and invoice dbf Tip If you check the Display field names option on the View property sheet of the File gt Properties dialog you will see the formulas themselves rather than the results they give and you will then better understand how this self calculating form letter works Objects in calculations Certain kinds of objects can also be used in calculations So for example you can create a form that contains text fields and use the contents of these text fields in calculations All the objects in a document have distinctive names as described in section Changing the names of objects beginning on page 237 You can address each individual object by means of its name For example TextField1 references the content of the text field TextField1 You evaluate the contents of objects in calculations as follows E Text fields and text frames TextField1 Text or TextField1 for short returns the content of the text field with the name TextField1 as text without any formatting TextField1 Value on the other hand interprets the content of the text
179. culations of any complexity using variables etc The command Edit gt Evaluate is suitable only for more simple calculations but it is much easier to handle You enter and select a formula directly in the text invoke Edit gt Evaluate and immediately see the result in the text An example 1 Type The total is 90 55 220 2 Select 90 55 220 3 Invoke the command Edit gt Evaluate or press the F8 F8 key 4 The formula 90 55 220 is calculated and the result is inserted in the text It doesn t get any easier or faster select a calculation and press F8 F8 Important In contrast to calculations with Insert gt Calculation here the result is not entered as a field but inserted into the document as plain text Associative rule Multiplication and division operators have precedence over addition and subtraction operators so that multiplication and division are always performed before addition and subtraction Accordingly 2 3 4 gives 14 You can influence the way operations are performed with parentheses 2 3 4 gives 20 Using functions Not only basic operators but also functions are allowed in expressions see section Formulas and functions on page 353 If you type 352 e Calculations in the text User Manual TextMaker SQRT 2 select it and invoke Edit gt Evaluate you will get the square root of 2 as a result One line limit The selected calculation must be within one line
180. d on page 108 mu Facing pages This option is useful when your document is to be printed double sided When it is checked different master pages and by extension headers and footers can be set up for left and right facing pages E Inside gutter Here you can set the inside page margin for documents that are to be printed doubled sided On left pages the gutter margin is added to the right margin on right pages it is added to the left margin mu Page Setup button This button gives you access to the dialog for the File gt Page Setup command where you can set the paper format and page margins Don t forget that you can specify a different page format for each separate chapter So if you have divided a document into several chapters and you want to change the page formatting for the whole document you must first select the whole document Navigating among chapters You can page to a specific chapter with the Edit gt Go to command To do this invoke the command choose the Chapter option in the Go to list and then select the desired chapter 114 e Page formatting User Manual TextMaker Styles Styles are very useful aides for advanced word processing users When you need a specific character or paragraph format frequently it pays to create a style for it You can then apply the style to any segment of text you like and this text will be formatted as you have specified in the style definition And
181. d over the space available Any of these three options can be applied in any combination within the same table Thus you can set up for example a table in which the cells in the first column have a fixed width while those in the remaining columns have widths set to Auto If you set up such a table and subsequently increased the width of the first column the widths of the remaining columns would automatically decrease proportionally Tip Cell widths can also be changed with the mouse To do so drag the right border of a cell left or right with your mouse If you have not selected any cells the width of all the cells in the current column is changed If you have selected some cells only the width of the selected cells is changed Vertical alignment This setting determines how the content of cells will be aligned with respect to the top and bottom edges of the cell Option Explanation Top The cell content will be aligned flush against the top edge of the cell This is the default setting Bottom The cell content will be aligned flush against the bottom edge of the cell Center The cell content will be centered between the top and bottom edges of the cell Justify The lines of text within the cell will be equally spaced in such a way that the top line will be flush against the top edge of the cell and the bottom line flush against the bottom edge Rotate by Here you can specify the angle of rotatio
182. d enter the desired width as a fixed value Thickness Here enter the line thickness in points E Justification Here you choose how the line should be justified Left at the left margin Right at the right margin or Center in the middle of the page E Color Here you can choose the line s color You can always define new colors to supplement those that are available by default see section Document properties Colors property sheet beginning on page 463 E 3D Shading If this option is enabled the line is rendered with a shadow effect Tip With thin lines this effect is hardly noticeable Thus it is recommended to increase the line s thickness when using the 3D shading effect Color of 3D Shading Choose the color of the 3D shading here Creating links You can also put links in TextMaker documents and then follow them by clicking with the mouse For example you can place a link to a website in a document When the user clicks on it the web browser starts automatically and presents the page You can also insert a link to another TextMaker document allowing the document to be opened automatically by clicking on the link 418 e Internet functions User Manual TextMaker Creating a link To create a link proceed as follows 1 Select the text that is to be made into a link 2 Invoke the command Format gt Link 3 Enter the target of the link in the URL or file name box that is enter the path
183. d font size with the Formatting toolbar XS Normal Times New Roman fio x LE ulz 3 28 e d d di The Formatting toolbar This is done by selecting the text you want to format opening the dropdown list box containing typefaces or the one containing type sizes and selecting the desired format from the list with a mouse click Text styles Text styles like bold italic underline etc are formats that give emphasis to text TextMaker provides the following text styles E Italic A slanted variant of the typeface Bold A heavier thicker variant of the typeface E SMALL CAPS Lowercase letters are replaced with small uppercase letters m ALL CAPS All letters are rendered in UPPERCASE E Strikeout The text is struck through Blinking The text blinks for HTML pages not visible in all web browsers m Hidden The text does not appear on the screen or on the printed page or both see the section Hiding text beginning on page 69 Protected The text cannot be modified see the section Protecting text beginning on page 70 Underline You can give text a single or double underline The underline can be continuous or by word only spaces not underlined Superscript e g r and subscript e g H O These text styles are found on the next property sheet see Superscripts and subscripts beginning on page 67 E Text color and Background color see the next section m Langua
184. d lists to apply numbering to the headings in a document automatically You will find information about this in section Numbering headings beginning on page 371 Numbering with Auto numbers Besides the above mentioned methods for numbering paragraphs TextMaker provides a general purpose method for automatic numbering you can insert instances of an Auto number field anywhere in the text Successive instances of this field are automatically numbered incrementally Adding line numbers In addition you can have TextMaker show line numbers alongside the document text The line numbers are inserted in the left page margin both for display and for printing These topics are treated in detail on the following pages in the order listed Simple enumerations The section Bulleted lists beginning on page 85 describes how you can add bullets to paragraphs with the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command This command is also suitable for enumerating paragraphs TextMaker automatically indents the paragraphs at the left to make room for the numbers and then numbers the paragraphs incrementally kil Manual tmd Ael x A Pe Pe Ce ee ene en To jump to a specific page do the following 1 Invoke the Edit gt Go to command 2 Select Page from the list of Go to options 3 Enter the desired page number The page is then immediately brought into view 4 Click Close to close the dialog E Pa
185. d of every row in the table The contents of the cells in each row are separated by tabs Semicolon A new paragraph is started at the end of every row The contents of the cells in each row are separated by semicolons User defined Here you can specify the separator yourself To do this enter the desired character in the edit box You can enter more than one character if desired For example if you enter a comma followed by a space as the separator the cell contents of every line will be separated by a comma and a space accordingly It is also possible to proceed in the opposite way you can convert text in tabular form into a table see the next section Converting text into a table The previous section described how to convert a table into paragraphs of text It is also possible to proceed in the opposite direction with the Table gt Convert Text to Table command you can convert text in tabular form into a table To do this proceed as follows 1 Select the paragraphs of text that you want to convert into a table 2 Invoke the Table gt Convert Text to Table command 3 First select the Separator that is used to delimit the entries in the text see below 4 Next specify the number of rows and columns the table should have TextMaker automatically attempts to suggest appropriate values 5 Confirm with OK The text is immediately transformed into a table Each line of text becomes a row in the table
186. d s Way Salmon River Oregon 77123 Now it is time once again to save the document with File gt Save When something goes wrong Note You will find detailed information about this topic in section Undoing changes beginning on page 28 As you saw in the last lesson segment you can switch off bold for example by re applying the bold attribute to text that is already formatted bold TextMaker has an additional feature that is very practical You can reverse the most recently completed text modifications with the Edit gt Undo command For example if you format some text with a different font all you need to do is invoke Edit gt Undo to make it undone This works not only with formatting but also with practically all kinds of text modifications so you can also for example undo the entry or deletion of text The command Undo can be applied repeatedly as needed For example invoke it five times to cancel the last five text modifications By the way you can also invoke this frequently needed command with the key combination Ctrl Z Ctrl Z There is also an opposite to the Undo command the command Edit gt Redo key combination Ctrl y Ctri Y It restores the effect of your most recently canceled action So you can undo the cancellation of a text modification Opening files Note You will find detailed information about this topic in section Opening a document beginning on page 31 Now we
187. d they remain selected until they are explicitly deselected So if you select records first with NAME1 Smith and then with NAME1 Jenkins all records with the name Smith or Jenkins will be selected If in fact only the Jenkins are to receive letters you must deselect all data records by invoking the command Select gt Deselect all records before you apply the condition NAME1 Jenkins Automatic suppression of superfluous white spaces If when printing TextMaker comes upon two database fields that are separated by one or more space characters and the first of these fields is empty TextMaker automatically suppresses the space characters An example You have inserted fields for first and last names into the text and separated them with a space character FIRSTNAME NAME 1 At this point TextMaker normally prints the first name the space character and the last name However if the FIRSTNAME field of a given data record is empty TextMaker prints only the last name and removes the space character since in this case it is superfluous Automatic suppression of empty lines with database fields If a text line contains only database fields and separating space or tab characters and if for some data record none of these fields has any content the entire line is suppressed 338 e Form letters User Manual TextMaker An example your form letter contains the following text segment FIRSTNAME NAME 1 NAME2 STRE
188. d to another The function TODAY returns the current date But this result is immediately evaluated by the MONTH function which returns only the month of the date as a number So on September 16 2006 the formula would produce the value 9 Example INT B 1000 Here the function INT which converts a floating point number to an integer by removing its fractional part is applied to the calculation B 1000 If B has the value 3752 70 the formula gives the value 3 In summary the arguments of functions can be other functions any sorts of calculations database fields table cells references or any combination of these Variables The result of a formula can be assigned to a variable Tip All variables that are defined at a given moment appear in the Variable Field list box in the dialog box for Insert gt Calculation You can insert any one of them in the formula by double clicking on it Example PRICE 17 99 Here the formula is just the constant value 17 99 The entry as a whole defines the variable PRICE and sets it to 17 99 Its value is valid from the position in the text at which you insert it to the end of the text unless you assign another value to the PRICE variable farther down in the text Note Whenever you assign a value or a calculation to a variable the value of the variable appears at the active position in the text If you don t want this for example because you only want to perform an int
189. dates all the calculations and fields in the document Note It is only necessary to use this command in the situations described above when you want to update the screen display of the calculations Before printing a document TextMaker updates all calculations and fields automatically TextMaker ensures that you will never print a document with results that are out of date Conditional text TextMaker also allows you to work with conditional expressions using the function IF By this means you can for example use conditional text in your documents A typical case You have an address database with a field called GENDER and the record for each person contains either an M for male or an F for female in that field indicating the person s gender Using the following IF expression you could have TextMaker form a salutation according to gender IF GENDER M Dear Madam Dear Sir If you use this calculation in a form letter TextMaker looks at each data record to see if the GENDER field contains an M If it does TextMaker outputs Dear Sir as the replacement for the formula given above otherwise it outputs Dear Madam Simple calculations with the press of a button There is an alternative to the command Insert gt Calculation described in the previous sections the command Edit gt Evaluate The difference The command Insert gt Calculation is suitable for cal
190. ddress 306 e Database User Manual TextMaker In the lowest line of the database window you can see the following information m First the number of the active data record the record number and the total number of records in the database are shown Record 1 of x m To the right of the record number the following status information is displayed Deleted if the record is marked for deletion Selected if the record is selected For more information on selecting records see section Selecting data records beginning on page 334 m At the very right you can read the active field s field type which determines what entries are allowed in the field Field type Allowed entries Character Any Numeric Numbers Date Date entries in the form MM DD YY e g 06 24 06 or in the form MM DD YYYY e g 06 24 2006 Logical Only Y Y for yes or N N for no Memo Notes these can be edited after pressing the F9 F9 key The maximum length of the field is given after the field type Which century Notice when filling in a date field if you enter the year as two digit number between 0 and 29 TextMaker automatically prefixes 20 For year numbers between 30 and 99 TextMaker prefixes 19 Thus the entry 01 01 29 is interpreted as 1 1 2029 the entry 01 01 30 as 1 1 1930 List and form view The database module can display the database in two different ways m The list view offers th
191. de When Forms mode is enabled only forms objects text fields checkboxes dropdown lists etc can be filled out Access to the rest of the document and to most of TextMaker s functions is blocked Note When you save a document in Forms mode Forms mode will still be active when you reopen the document You can enable or disable Forms mode with the Forms mode activated option Tip You can also use the View gt Forms Mode command to do this When you enable Forms mode and in addition enter a Password to deactivate anyone who subsequently attempts to disable this mode will be prompted for the password The mode will be disabled only if the user supplies the correct password Important If you save a document with Forms mode enabled and a password set and then forget the password you will never again be able to disable this mode So be sure to make a note of the password and keep it in a safe place You will find detailed information about working with forms in chapter Forms beginning on page 257 Document properties Reviewing property sheet The Reviewing property sheet in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to make settings that control the way comments and document revisions are handled You will find information about these settings in the following sections E Settings for comments beginning on page 405 Settings for the Track changes function beginning on page 411 468
192. dicating the function of the icon Editing forms objects Like all other types of objects forms objects can be edited after being selected with a mouse click You can delete move and copy them change their properties with the Object gt Properties command etc Tip In addition using the Object gt Tab Order command you can specify the position of a forms object in the logical sequence that is the basis on which the user can jump from one object to another in Forms mode using the Tab Tab key see the section Changing the tab order beginning on page 275 General information about working with objects is available in the chapter Frames basic functions beginning on page 214 Preparing an example form We come now to a practical example we will prepare a form for gathering client data The form should contain some text fields for the entry of the client s address and beyond those a dropdown list for recording the client s gender and a checkbox that is to be checked in case the client is new Name Address City Gender lfemale New client O yes tele E Start a new document with File gt New And we re on our way 264 e Forms User Manual TextMaker Text fields for unrestricted text entries The first line of the form should contain a text field for the entry of the client s name The best way to proceed is first to provide a description of what is to be ent
193. different file as the source for the OLE object see also Source section Acquiring an OLE object from a file beginning on page 205 Break Link Cuts the link to the source file As a result the object is embedded permanently in the TextMaker document Changes to the source file no longer have any effect on the document However the object can still be edited by double clicking on it Changing position and size of an OLE object An OLE object inserted with the Object gt New OLE Object command is treated by TextMaker like a character within the text When you want to change the position of such an object all you need to do is cut it and paste it at another place using the familiar Edit menu commands The size of an OLE object can be changed in either of two ways Dragging the boundary lines Click on the OLE object to select it When the object is selected red lines are displayed on its borders When you drag one of these lines with the mouse the size of the object is changed accordingly E Entering values manually You can also enter precise numeric values for the size and margins of an OLE object To do this select the object with a single mouse click and then invoke the Object gt Properties command A dialog box appears to facilitate changes to the object s properties see also the next section Switch to the dialog s Format property sheet and enter the desired measurements in the Size group box Changing
194. ding on the type of list you want to create see the introduction and section Options in the Numbered Lists dialog below 7 Make any additional required settings for the numbering see section Options in the Numbered Lists dialog below 8 Confirm with OK The new numbered list is now set up If you want to apply it to the paragraphs currently selected in the text click on Apply Otherwise click on Close You will find additional information about the application of numbered lists in section Applying numbered lists beginning on page 167 Options in the Numbered Lists dialog In the dialog box for setting up and editing numbered lists you can make the following settings General options m Simple list or Hierarchical list The option you select here determines the overall layout of the numbered list for it controls the type of the list Select Simple list for a simple enumeration with only one level thus 1 2 3 etc Select Hierarchical list for a hierarchical enumeration with multiple levels for example 1 1 1 1 1 1 etc mu Use paragraph s outline level as list level Available only when the type of the numbered list has been set to Hierarchical list When this option is checked the outline levels of the paragraphs to which the numbered list is applied are used as the levels in the automatic numbering of the list For example if a paragraph has an outline level of 3 is thus a third order h
195. document template Each time you invoke File gt New TextMaker allows you to select a document template as the basis for the new document If at this point you select a document template that you have created all character and paragraph styles that you stored in the template will become available to you in the new document Document templates can also include text for example a letterhead So you can kill two birds with one stone set up a document template with your letterhead and your favorite styles for letters another for business reports and so forth 126 e Styles User Manual TextMaker Templates with database links It gets even better You can attach a database to a document template and then insert database fields into it Then when you create a new document on the basis of this template the TextMaker database appears automatically allowing you to select a record and insert it into your letterhead etc Creating a letter becomes child s play invoke File gt New choose the letter template select the addressee and the letterhead is completely filled out and ready Tip TextMaker comes with numerous prepared document templates for letters etc Try them out sometime simply invoke File gt New and select a template from one of the sub folders You will find more information about this topic in section Importing individual addresses beginning on page 317 Creating document templates To
196. e Important A frame or drawing that is anchored to a paragraph always appears on the page on which the paragraph to which it is anchored appears Accordingly if you insert so much text above this paragraph the new text forces the paragraph to the next page the object that is anchored to this paragraph is forced to the next page along with it An object s anchor can be moved at any time To move an object s anchor select the object and then while holding the mouse button down drag the anchor to another paragraph The object will then be anchored to the new paragraph Tip You can disable the above described behavior for any object so that the object will always remain on a specific page To do this select the object invoke Object gt Properties switch to the command dialog s Layout property sheet select Fix on page in the Object group box and enter the number of the page on which you want to fix the object The object is then no longer anchored to a paragraph and will remain always on the specified page Accordingly when you subsequently select the object again a non moveable anchor will appear at the upper left corner of the page You will find information about the functions of the other anchor options on this dialog in the section Object properties Layout property sheet beginning on page 223 Changing the size and margins of objects You can change the sizes and the margins of objects as follows m
197. e indicating that you can enter the text You can set the formatting for the text as required using the Format gt Character and Format gt Paragraph command When you have finished entering your text click anywhere outside the object If you want to return to this text later to edit it you can do so by reselecting the AutoShape right clicking to obtain the context menu and selecting Edit Text from this menu Important When TextMaker displays a red bar in the margin below the text this indicates that the area available for text within the AutoShape is not large enough to accommodate all the text that has been entered In this case you must either enlarge the object or reduce the amount of text Note Text frames which are described in an earlier section of this chapter are really nothing more than AutoShapes in this case simple rectangles to which text is added Thus all the information in the section Text frames beginning on page 238 applies with equal validity to text frames and to AutoShapes containing text 252 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker Changing the properties of drawings To edit the properties of a drawing first select it with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to gain access to the command s dialog Tip You can also invoke this dialog by double clicking on the drawing In this dialog you can make settings as described below Layout Format
198. e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker General information about comments and document revisions is available in chapter Document revisions beginning on page 401 Customizing the document display You can adjust the way the document appears on the screen and either hide or bring into view various components of the TextMaker window with the commands in the View menu View menu Function command Standard Switches the document view to standard view This is the view that you normally use when working with TextMaker often referenced as normal view in the manual Continuous Switches to the continuous view For the most part this view is like the normal view however the document is presented not as a sequence of separate pages but as a single continuous text Some users find it easier to survey a document in this view Note In the continous view some components of the document including page headers and footers frames drawings and footnotes cannot be edited Master Pages Switches to the master pages view In this view you can edit only the document s master page s Objects residing on the master page will be replicated on every page of the document see section Master pages beginning on page 107 Outline Switches to the Outline view In this view you can see the structure of the document assign text to a header and assign existing headers to higher or lower levels see section Outlines be
199. e Gallery or you can open the Foreground color list and select the color there If none of the existing colors suits you you can always compose your own colors To do so click on Define color the last item in the color list see section Document properties Colors property sheet beginning on page 463 If desired you can also change the Transparency of the fill Under Windows values between O no transparency and 100 full transparency are permitted If you set the value to 50 for example the filling will have 50 transparency Under other operating systems only the option Semi transparent is available It sets the filling to 50 transparency a Pattern When you select the third fill type the object is filled with a pattern of lines or dots You can select a specific pattern from the Gallery and then select the desired colors from the Foreground and Background lists Picture When you select the fourth type of fill the object is filled with a picture You can use the Open button to bring up a file selection dialog in which you can specify the picture to be used If the specified picture is larger than the object to be filled it is cropped to fit If the picture is smaller than the object you can specify how it is to be displayed in the Position group box with the Tile option multiple copies of the picture are arranged like tiles to fill the area of the object with the Stretch option the picture is aut
200. e Object gt New Picture Frame command If you have activated Object mode you can alternatively click on the Kl icon in the Object toolbar 2 With the mouse draw a rectangle in the document to indicate the desired position and size of the frame Or If you prefer you can simply click on the position at which you want the upper left corner of the picture to be The picture will then be inserted in its original size 242 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker 3 A dialog now appears to enable you to select the picture that is to appear in the picture frame To select the picture type its filename or click in the list on its filename Tip If you check the Preview option the dialog displays a small preview of the currently selected picture file 4 Confirm with OK The picture frame is immediately inserted No special action is required to insert a picture frame on top of existing body text the text is automatically reformatted in such a way that it flows around the frame Options in the dialog The options available in the above mentioned dialog box function as follows E Save with document If this option is checked TextMaker saves a copy of the picture in the document and uses this copy instead of the original If this option is unchecked TextMaker saves only a reference to the picture file in the document m Copy to document s folder If this option is checked TextMaker creates a copy of the picture fi
201. e Paragraph formatting User Manual TextMaker To set tab stops proceed as follows 1 Select the paragraphs of interest 2 Invoke the command Format gt Tabs Tabs xi Tabs Tab leader C he A see Alignment Clear Cancel Left 7 cl ll Default width mma o 5in Ej 3 In the Tabs edit box enter the desired position relative to the left page margin thus 0 corresponds to the left page margin 4 If desired select another Alignment and another Tab leader for the tab see the next pages 5 Don t forget Click on the Set button 6 Set up any additional tab stops you need in the same way before you exit the dialog box with OK Once tab stops have been set you can use the Tab key Tab Tab to insert tabs in the text to move from one tab stop to the next You can enter a value for the Default width to specify the spacing between the predefined tab stops mentioned earlier normally 0 5 in However once you have defined your own tab stops for a given paragraph the predefined tab stops are ignored Tab alignment With Format gt Tabs you can specify not only the position for a new tab stop but also its alignment Left A normal tab stop similar to one on a typewriter The tab stop determines where the following text begins Right Here the text following the tab is aligned flush right Thus the tab stop determines where the text ends Center The text after the tab is centered on the tab posit
202. e added to the dictionary When you exit TextMaker it forgets the list of ignored words Add Word Advises TextMaker to add the word to its user dictionary and in this 286 e Language tools User Manual TextMaker way to enlarge its vocabulary Use this option for correctly spelled words that TextMaker does not yet know TextMaker remembers these words permanently As soon as you correct the spelling or allow TextMaker to ignore or add the word the red underscore disappears Is the spell checker working incorrectly If the spell checker frequently underlines words that in fact are correctly spelled it is likely that the text segment in which they occur is formatted in the wrong language In this case select the text segment invoke Format gt Character and set the Language option on the Font property sheet to Default or to the language in which the segment was composed Words underlined in blue If you have activated the Underline old German spelling in blue option you might also see words underlined in blue instead of red This is for German words that are spelled according to the old German conventions and that should be spelled differently according to the new spelling conventions Read about this in the next section Converting to new German spelling Note This whole section only applies to text in German language If you never work with documents composed in German you may want to skip it and continue readi
203. e best overview of the database Here you see several data records listed one after another in tabular form The form view is better suited to the inspection of individual data records Here the fields of a single data record are displayed in a form Important In list view no data can be entered This is possible only in form view To switch between list and form view invoke the command View gt Form If the form view is active a check mark appears in front of this menu item Otherwise list view is active Tip You can switch very quickly between these two views with the F2 F2 key Moreover a double click on a data record in list view displays the record in form view Browsing through data records Both keys and icons are available for moving among the data records of a database Key IconFunction PgUp2 PgUp 4 Go to the previous data record in list view to the previous page PgDn 4 PgDn D Go to the next data record in list view to the next page Ctrl Alt PgUp2 Ctr1 Alt PgUp Y Go to the previous selected data record Ctrl Alt PgDn 4 Ctri Alt PgDn Go to the next selected data record Ctrl PgUp Ctri PgUp 14 Go to the first data record Ctrl PgDn4 Ctrl PgDn Dil Go to the last data record Calling up a data record by its record number The Data record number record number for short is a simple counter The first data record has the number 1 the tenth 10 etc The record number of
204. e changed At the left you can set the Line style none single double and the line width Let s proceed as follows to place a line above the paragraph 1 Go to the Sample field where border lines are selected By default all the lines top bottom left and right are pre selected This is indicated by the little arrows that appear at the ends of the lines Since we only want to change the top line all the other lines must be deselected To deselect the unwanted left bottom and right lines click on each of them in turn In the end only the top line should remain selected and little arrows should appear only to the left and right of this line 2 At present None is the selected Line style and up until now no line has been drawn Select Single for a single line 3 The line width is normally set at 1 point If you want a thicker or thinner line select the desired width from Thickness 1 It s as easy as that first select the lines to be changed in the Sample field then specify whether you want a single or double line under Line style and finally change the Thickness To remove lines that have already been applied invoke the command once more select the lines to be removed and then click on the line style None Normal text paragraphs can be furnished with lines using the same method as for footers Finished Our TextMaker Tour ends here You will find the final example document for the completed TextMak
205. e database The number of the current page represented in Arabic 1 2 3 or Roman I II IHI numerals according to the Data selection The total number of pages in the document The number of the current chapter represented in Arabic 1 2 3 or Roman I I HI numerals depending on the Data selection See also section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 109 The file name of the current document optionally including the complete path e g c documents test tmd or without the path e g test tmd Any of several items of information about the current document Subject Author Keywords etc You can edit the contents of these fields by clicking on Settings See also section Document summary beginning on page 429 The first name last name or initials of the user who last modified that is saved the document These fields work only when the user has invoked Extras gt Preferences switched to the General property sheet clicked on the User Home button and entered her name Any of several items of personal information that can be edited with the Settings button You can insert one of these fields in the text if you want your name address telephone number etc to appear in the document These fields are used for example in the document templates supplied with the program You can use these fields in the same way you use the home address fields see above when you want contents of
206. e following options are available m You can select Use reference field to specify that the references should be shown as abbreviations for the sources based on entries in the database for example DNA1979 m You can select Number entries to specify that the references to the sources should be shown as numbers generated automatically for example 42 The source for the first reference that you insert receives the number 1 the source for the second reference receives the number 2 etc Note When you switch from one of these options to the other the appearance of all the references in the document immediately changes in accordance with your selection On the other hand the bibliography itself if it already exists will not reflect your changes until you update it see section Updating tables of references beginning on page 387 m The Brackets option allows you to specify the type of brackets in which the references will be enclosed If you specify the setting for example instead of the default setting all the references will be enclosed with curly braces rather than with square brackets as before Accordingly instead of DNA1979 you will see DNA1979 Step 4 Creating the bibliography In the final step you have TextMaker generate the bibliography at the end of the document The bibliography will list all the sources from the bibliography database to which you inserted referenc
207. e following pages 1 If you have not yet recorded the addresses of the recipients in a database create or open a database and enter the addresses in it The database tmw dbf that is included with the program is very well suited for recording addresses however you can use any database you wish 2 Start anew document 3 With Extras gt Set Database assign the address database to the document This is necessary so that TextMaker knows what addresses it should merge in later 4 Compose the text of the letter 5 With Insert gt Field gt Database field insert the name street city etc fields from the database at the places where the address should appear in the printed document 6 If you don t want to write to all the addressees open the database with Extras gt Edit Database and select the addresses you want included not possible with the Pocket PC version of TextMaker 7 Print the letter with File gt Print Merge When it prints TextMaker replaces the database fields with the data from the database record by record Accordingly the data from the first data record are used for the first letter the data from the second record for the second letter etc The following sections describe each of the required steps in detail from the creation of a form letter to the sending of the completed document to a printer Assigning a database to a document Before you insert the fields of a database into a form le
208. e headings of a large document are often numbered For example a major heading might have the numbering 1 and its sub headings the numberings 1 1 1 2 etc TextMaker can number the headings of a document for you automatically You can instruct it to do so as follows 1 Create the document and outline it 2 Create a numbered list with the desired type of numbering In the Numbered List group box select the Hierarchical list option and check the Use paragraph s outline level as list level option 3 Apply the numbered list to the paragraph style Heading 1 Without having to do anything more a numbering is immediately applied to each heading in the document in accordance with its level and your specifications For example level 1 headings might be numbered 1 2 3 etc while level 2 headings would be numbered 1 2 1 3 and so forth The procedure for accomplishing this is given in detail in the following steps Step 1 Creating and outlining the document First you must of course create the document and outline it It makes no difference whether you begin constructing the outline as you begin the document or do your outlining only after you have entered the entire text You will find information about outlining documents in section Outlines beginning on page 363 Step 2 Creating an appropriate numbered list The next step is to create a numbered list appropriate for headings To do this proceed as follow
209. e language in which the segment was composed Spell checking as you type What we call on the fly spell checking silently examines the spelling of every word you type and only announces itself in case of a typing mistake a dialog box then appears for use in correcting the spelling To activate on the fly correction invoke Extras gt Preferences switch to the Language property sheet and there switch on Check spelling as you type Now every time you type a word TextMaker quickly looks up that word in its dictionaries As long as you type words that the spell checker knows nothing visible happens But if you type an unknown word the spell checker displays a dialog box This dialog box is like the one for retroactive spell checking that was presented in the preceding section You can read there about how to use this dialog You will notice that there is also a SmartText button in the dialog box This is for creating SmartText entries You will learn more about this feature in section SmartTexts beginning on page 297 Background spell checking Background spell checking constantly checks the entire text for spelling errors However in contrast to the on the fly spell checker see the preceding section it does not present a dialog box in case it detects a typing mistake Rather incorrectly written words are merely indicated with a red underscore Activating background spell checking To activate background spell checki
210. e object In practice this means If you select an object that is part of a group the whole group is selected If you move this object all the other objects in its group are moved with it Moreover grouping objects that belong together in a certain arrangement prevents them from being moved accidentally with respect to one another with the mouse To group objects you do the following 1 Select the frames or drawings to be grouped To do this click on each of them in turn while holding down the Shift key Shift or switch to Object mode and press the mouse button and draw a rectangle around all the objects to be grouped 236 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker 2 Click on the wl icon in the Object toolbar or invoke the Object gt Group command Ungrouping objects To ungroup objects do the following 1 Select the group by clicking on one of the objects in it 2 Invoke the Object gt Ungroup command Changing the names of objects Every object in a document must have a unique name This is necessary so that you can for example perform calculations on the contents of table cells or text fields Normally you don t need to concern yourself with these names since TextMaker assigns them automatically if you insert a rectangle in an empty document the rectangle is automatically names Rectangle1 If you insert a picture it is named Picture1 A second picture would be named Picture2 etc
211. e right of the box mg Value group box Here you can specify the initial state of the checkbox checked or not Specifying a checked state here has the same effect as checking the box in the completed form 270 e Forms User Manual TextMaker E 3D effect If you check this option the checkbox is drawn with a 3D effect With checkbox frames you can also specify the character formatting font size color etc for the text Checkbox frames You insert a checkbox frame with the Object gt New Forms Object gt Checkbox Frame The usage and behavior of a checkbox frames correspond to those for checkboxes see the previous section The difference A checkbox frame like all types of frames has a fixed position on the page Thus it does not move when you insert or delete text above it The normal body text is automatically formatted in such a way that it breaks at the boundaries of the frame it flows around the frame Dropdown lists To insert a dropdown list at the text cursor position you use the Object gt New Forms Object gt Dropdown command You encounter dropdown lists in many dialog boxes Such lists offer several alternatives from which you can select only one These lists are ideal for forms since they reduce the amount of typing needed when forms are filled out and prevent typing errors Usage of dropdown lists To open a list you click on the small arrow to the right Now you can select an entry by cli
212. e something like See also the index beginning on page and insert a cross reference to the bookmark The cross reference would show the number of the page on which the index begins Cross references are updated automatically when the document is printed They can also be updated manually if desired with the Extras gt Update Fields command The following pages contain detailed information about working with cross references Inserting a cross reference To insert a cross reference in the text do the following 1 If you want to insert a cross reference to a bookmark you must first set the bookmark at the target position with the Insert gt Bookmark command see also section Bookmarks beginning on page 144 2 Then move the text cursor to the place in the text where the cross reference is to be inserted 390 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker 7 Invoke the Insert gt Cross reference command Select the kind of text element that the cross reference should target from the Type list a Bookmark a Footnote or an Object Select the specific bookmark footnote or object to which the cross reference should refer from the Target list From the Show list select either Page to specify that the cross reference should show the page number of the target or Number to specify that the cross reference should show the target s own number see Options section below Confirm with OK TextMa
213. e sure that the Guides option in the Document window group box is checked Guidelines will now be displayed Note Guidelines are displayed on the screen only they do not appear on the printed page Adding guides under menu control To set up new guides do the following 1 Invoke Object gt Guides amp Grid 2 Under Horizontal or Vertical enter the position at which the guideline should be placed and then click the Set button Adding guides with the mouse Alternatively you can set up new guides with the mouse 1 Click on the RI icon in the Formatting toolbar or invoke the command View gt Object Mode to activate Object mode 2 Now you can pull vertical guides out of the vertical ruler and horizontal guides out of the horizontal ruler To do this click with the mouse in one of the rulers and drag the mouse pointer left mouse button held down into the text area Release the mouse button when you reach the position at which the guide should be set 3 Finally click once more on the RI icon or invoke View gt Object Mode again in order to exit Object mode Note If the ruler you want to use is not displayed invoke Extras gt Preferences switch to the View property sheet and there enable Horizontal ruler or Vertical ruler as needed Changing the tolerance for guides By default a frame or drawing snaps automatically to a guide when it is moved with the mouse to within 8 pixels of the guide You can change th
214. e used much like paragraph styles First select the paragraphs to be formatted then apply the numbered list Thus you do the following 1 Position the text cursor in the paragraph to which you want to apply the numbered list or select multiple paragraphs 2 Invoke the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command 3 Switch to the Numbered Lists property sheet 4 Select the desired numbered list 5 Click on Apply The paragraphs are immediately formatted with the numbering specified in the selected list Note When you apply a hierarchical list in which the Use paragraph s outline level as list level option is checked numberings will appear only on headings Normal text paragraphs with outline level zero will have no numberings Options The options in the dialog box for this command are given below with their functions m List level Here you can specify the list level for the paragraph to which a hierarchical numbered list is to be applied For example if you set this option to 1 the paragraph will formatted as a list item at level 1 and will have a number of the form 1 while if you set the option to 3 the paragraph will have a number of the form 1 1 1 etc Note The list level can not be specified if you have checked the Use paragraph s outline level as list level option because in that case automatically uses the paragraph s outline level as the list level Restart numbering St
215. each chapter To recapitulate a page format encompasses Paper format orientation and margins 110 e Page formatting User Manual TextMaker Headers footers and master pages E Page numbering When you begin a new document the document consists initially of a single chapter Accordingly if you change something related to page formatting your change affects the whole document If you divide the document into chapters with Insert gt Breaks gt Chapter break each new chapter assumes at first the page formatting of the original document In general the following holds Important When you insert a chapter break the new chapter that is created takes on the page formatting and the master page layout of the current chapter However when you subsequently modify the page formatting and master page layout of the new chapter your changes affect only that chapter Accordingly you can set up different headers and footers for each chapter set a different paper format for each chapter etc Chapter formatting Chapter formatting goes beyond the page formatting that can be applied to chapters on a chapter by chapter basis and involves formats that are specific to chapters as such To modify a chapter s page formatting use the commands described in chapter Page formatting beginning on page 97 To modify a chapter s chapter formatting proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor anywhere within t
216. ead sua ctsee ta pentaysccuebennesatepeniceebestoeneets 276 Calculating with forms ObDjeCtS ccecccesseeeeeseceeeeeestaeeeeneeee 278 Language tools 279 Setting the lANQUaQe cececeeeseceeseeceeeeeceaeeeesaeseeeeeeseaeeessaesteneeesaes 280 Setting the default laNQUAGE esceeteeeeeteeeeneeeeeteeeeeaeeeeneeees 281 Formatting text in another language cceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 281 Application examples eriden akeas aiae 282 List of available language modules ccceeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeeeees 283 Retroactive spell CHECKING ccccceeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeees 284 Spell checking as you type ssesseeesseesieesiesiessiesinsrnssrnssrrssrresre 285 Background spell ChECKING ccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeeaeeeeseaaes 286 Converting to new German spelling ccccceeseeeeereeeseeeeeseeeeeees 287 Activating conversion to the new German spelling 5 288 Correcting words with old German spellingS c0ceeeee 288 The Info command of the spell checker ccceceeeeeeeeseees 290 Settings for the new German spelling scceeeceeeeeeeeteeees 291 Editing user dictionaries sieren ieii e eei R 293 TWHOSAUUS ai i An i ee a ate it 294 The translation dictionary 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeneeeeeeteeeeeetnaeeeenene 295 SMAMRCXtS wt tae eth elie tevin eed ate Pela bia ate ey it 297 Creating SmartText entries cccccceeeeee
217. eading it becomes a level 3 list item when the list is applied thus 1 1 1 for example Note When this option is checked numbering is applied only to headings Normal text paragraphs with outline level zero is not numbered You will find information about document outline levels in section Outlines beginning on page 363 If the Use paragraph s outline level as list level option is not checked you can set the list level manually with the List level option in the main dialog see also section Applying numbered lists beginning on page 167 E Level Available only when the type of the numbered list has been set to Hierarchical list 162 e Automatic numbering User Manual TextMaker Here you can select with a mouse click the level of the list you want to modify For example if you click on 3 you can change the settings for the third level Each level of a hierarchical list can have its own settings For example you can set the color for the numbers at level 1 to blue and the colors of the numbers at all the other levels to black Preview The Preview field shows how the numbering will look with the current settings In addition it provides an alternative means of selecting the level you want to edit You can make a selection in the Preview field in exactly the same way you make a selection in the Level field by clicking on the desired level Display higher levels Available only for l
218. ect 232 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker To apply a 3D effect check the Use 3D effect option You can then click on the desired type of effect in the Gallery If required you can specify the effect more precisely with the additional options The 3D property sheet presents the following options E Use 3D effect Check this option to apply a 3D effect to the object m Perspective When you check this option the object is rendered in perspective Otherwise it is rendered isometrically Em Wire frame When you check this option the object is rendered as a wire frame E X angle Y angle and Depth Here you can set the depth of the 3D object and the angles about which it is rotated on the horizontal and vertical axes Colors group box By default TextMaker sets the color for the object s surfaces automatically If you want to select the color yourself check the Side faces option The side surfaces of the object are shaded in accordance with the settings that are in effect for the lighting of the 3D object If the Affect front side option is checked the front surface of the object is also shaded in this manner You can change the lighting settings with the More button a More button When you click on this button you gain access to a dialog where you can adjust the lighting of the object To do so click in the Lighting field at the point where the light source should be positioned You can also set the Intensity of
219. ect gt Checkbox 3 In the dialog that appears at this point you can if required enter additional text that will appear next to the checkbox For this example type yes 4 Exit the dialog with OK 5 Press the Enter key twice To align the forms objects vertically you should now select all the lines you have entered and then use Format gt Tab to set a tab stop at the appropriate place for example at 1 2 in T Form tmd Address City Gender lfemale pd New client O yes E R D He Our form is now complete You can now save the document and test it see also the section Filling out forms beginning on page 258 The best way to test the form is to use View gt Forms Mode to activate Forms mode 266 e Forms User Manual TextMaker Forms objects In this section we describe in detail the individual types of forms objects Text fields You insert a text field with the Object gt New Forms Object gt Text Field command Text fields are used frequently in forms They allow the entry of unrestricted text accordingly they are suitable for entries of names addresses etc Usage of text fields To fill out a text field you simply click in the field to position the text cursor there and enter the text Changing the properties of text fields After positioning the text cursor in a text field or selecting the text field with a mouse click in Object mode yo
220. ect the Minimize command To restore the window select it from with Window menu Arranging document windows Note This feature is available only in the Windows and Linux versions of TextMaker TextMaker can arrange your document windows automatically as required m With the command Window gt Cascade you tell TextMaker to stack the windows one behind another as in a file cabinet The active window is placed at the top of the stack m With Window gt Tile Vertically the windows are arranged one below another m With Window gt Tile Horizontally they are arranged one beside another To change the size and position of a window manually do the following Mouse If the window is not maximized you can position the mouse cursor in the window s title bar hold down the mouse button and drag the window to a new position You can change the size of a window by dragging the right or bottom edge of the window to a new position Keyboard Open the window s system menu with Alt Alt Minus and select the Move or Size command Now you can change the position or size of the window with the arrow keys These commands are not available when the window is maximized Customizing TextMaker TextMaker gives you control over numerous program settings allowing you to adapt the program to your personal working style E Changing TextMaker s preferences To modify TextMaker s global preferences use the Extras gt Preferen
221. ectangle Yellow triangles will then appear at its corners By dragging one of these triangles you can change the rounding accordingly AutoShapes The AutoShape tool allows you to draw AutoShapes These are ready to use shapes appropriate for a wide variety of applications standard shapes like rectangles and ellipses as well as arrows flow chart symbols stars speech balloons etc When you activate this tool a dialog appears There select the type of AutoShape you want to draw Then draw a rectangle with the mouse to represent the desired size and position of the shape Note With some types of AutoShapes yellow triangles appear on the object when it is selected If you drag on one of these triangles a parameter governing the shape of the object is changed Such triangles are present for example on stars where they can be used to change the lengths of the points Tip You can enter text in an AutoShape just as you can in a text frame You will find information about this in the section Adding text to AutoShapes beginning on page 252 Adding text to AutoShapes You can add text to an AutoShape if you wish The text is then displayed inside the AutoShape exactly as it would be in a text frame To add text to an AutoShape do the following 1 Select the desired AutoShape 2 With a right click invoke the context menu and there select the Add Text command A blinking text cursor now appears in the AutoShap
222. ed Green and Blue controls Colors can also be specified by their red green and blue components The controls labeled Red Green and Blue are provided for this purpose Here values between 0 and 255 are allowed m Using the Standard property sheet accessible only from color lists When you access the color dialog by selecting Define color from the color list in another dialog rather than by invoking the File gt Properties command the color dialog will contain an additional property sheet labeled Standard This property sheet will present a selection of common colors To choose a color simply click on it Document properties Internet property sheet The Internet property sheet in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to change the color scheme and background of an HTML document You will find detailed information about working with HTML documents in chapter Internet functions beginning on page 413 Do not save colors in HTML file If you enable this option the color settings you make on this property sheet will apply only within TextMaker They will not be saved in the HTML document So if you open the HTML file in a web browser the document will appear there in the browser s default colors not in the colors set here Show blink style as Text that is formatted with the HTML blinking attribute is not displayed in TextMaker as blinking but is indicated with the color selected here By default
223. ed page However you can specify in the document s properties whether hidden text is to be visible on the screen and whether it is to be printed To do this invoke the command File gt Properties and switch to the View property sheet In the Hidden text group box you will find the following options E Show hidden text This option controls the visibility of hidden text on the screen By default this option is checked so that hidden text is visible Hidden text is displayed with a dotted underline to distinguish it from normal text If you disable this option hidden text is not visible on the screen Print hidden text The Print hidden text option controls the printing of hidden text along with the document s normal text By default this option is not checked and hidden text is not included on the printed page If you want all hidden text segments to be printed you must enable this option Removing the Hidden format If you want to remove the Hidden format do the following 1 Make sure that the Show hidden text option in the document properties is enabled see above so that you can see the text Select the hidden text invoke Format gt Character and uncheck the Hidden option on the Font property sheet The text is now without the hidden property Protecting text You can protect a segment of text to prevent it from being changed or deleted Protecting text To protect text do the following
224. ed end notes all the footnote texts appear together at the end of the document Numbering group box Here you make settings that control the numbering of the footnotes m Type Here you can change the type of numbering used For example you can select letters instead of numerals as markers for successive footnotes The succession of footnotes is then represented by A B C rather than by 1 2 3 E Start at Here you can specify the number with which the enumeration should begin The default value is 1 If you enter 42 for example the first footnote will be numbered 42 the second 43 etc E Mode By making a selection from this list you can specify whether the footnote numbering should be reset to 1 on every page or every chapter Continuous numbering The numbering is never reset This is the default setting Restart on each page The numbering is reset to 1 at the beginning of every page of the document Restart on each chapter The numbering is reset to 1 at the beginning of every chapter Separator line margins group box Here you can set the margins for the separator line that is inserted automatically above the footnote area The Top margin determines the minimum spacing between the text and the separator line while the Bottom margin determines the spacing from the line to the footnote texts As you increase the Left margin the separator line starts further to
225. ed with the mouse or keyboard From this point on the size and position can be changed only by entering values in the dialog box for the Object gt Properties command Tab stop Available only for forms objects e g text fields and text frames checkboxes and dropdown lists In Forms mode you can jump back and forth among forms objects with the Tab Tab key or the FI1 F11 key see section Changing the tab order beginning on page 275 234 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker However if an object s Tab stop option is unchecked that object is skipped m Protected Available only for objects that contain text e g text fields and text frames When this option is checked text contained in the object cannot be changed while the document is edited in Forms mode However the default setting is unchecked allowing the text in the object to be edited even in Forms mode You will find more information about this in section Protecting forms objects beginning on page 275 E Link Here you can enter a link to a page on an internet site for example To do so click on the Select button select the type of link desired and type in the desired target Additional property sheets For some types of objects the dialog presents additional property sheets containing more options You will find information about these additional property sheets in the sections that cover those objects Frames advanced f
226. eeeeeaeeeeneeseeeeeteaeeeseaeeeeaes 470 Customizing toolbars 00 cece cee eeeeeeceeeee cee eeeeaeeeeaeeeseaeeesaeeteneeeeaes 471 Showing and hiding toolbars c ccceeeceeseeeeeneeteeeeeeeeaeeeeneeees 471 POSITIONING tOOIDALS nsaan ariran kuran ee iania raain karain beken 473 Managing tool0ars sea saa aia AE SATE NAR AAE 474 Customizing toolbar iCONS ssssseeeessesesisesissriesrisssrrssrrssrresre 475 Creating user defined toolbar iCONS ccccccceseeeeesteeeeeees 477 Customizing keyboard Shortcuts cceccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeteaes 478 Activating a keyboard Mapping cceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 480 Creating a new keyboard Mapping cccceeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 480 Renaming or deleting a keyboard Mapping 0cceeeeeee 481 Editing the shortcuts in a keyboard mapping ceeeeeees 482 Resetting the shortcuts in a keyboard mapping eeee 484 USING he ONG oara araara aE r AE FAAR AANE AAEE 485 WE eka Tle e A E E E A A A NAS 486 Keyboard shortcuts 489 Keyboard shortcuts for menu commands sssssseseeesseeesresserese nese 489 Keyboard shortcuts for editing text eeeeeeereerereerrreernrre 491 Welcome Welcome to TextMaker 2006 for the Nova5000 You have purchased a word processor that combines user friendliness with powerful features at an affordable price With TextMaker you will be able to complete your writing tasks quickly and c
227. eeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseaeeeeneeees 298 Inserting SmartText entries eccceceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeaes 300 Editing SmartText entries cceccceceeeeeseeeeeseeseeeeesetaeeseeeeeaes 301 Database 303 Opening a database eieae eaa etetete Meck Pvedisetaveethis seach 304 Using the database MOQUIE ceceeeeneeeeeenteeeeeeaeeeeeenaaeeeeeenaes 305 istand form View neien e nanain ea naaa deat ev aaner Ta aaa aaia diea 307 Browsing through data recordS eeccceeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeenaes 308 Calling up a data record by its record numbet 0 eee 308 Searching the database ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeneneeees 309 Adding and editing data records eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 311 Deleting and restoring data recordS eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaes 312 Sorting the database cccecceesceceeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeteaeeeeeeaeen 313 Closing a databasen mirean aean daeta aaraa aaa Miveitevests 314 Using the database module assssesssrsesssrresrsrnesrnrnnsrennnsnnennesnnnnes 315 Importing individual AdCreSSES ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeaeeeeeenaeees 317 Preparing a document template ecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaes 318 Using document templates eee eee eres eeeeeeeees 318 The list and label QeneratOr ceccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeecaeeeeaeeeeeeeees 319 Creating lists and labels 0 cccceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeene
228. eeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeestaeeeeeeeeaes 187 Sorting table Seinasta ree dat Pete te tastes aklngaetastntiivbescentth 189 Sorting TeX secleatiaaietes netic ieee Asante cut staats advise ceils 191 Pictures 195 Inserting a picture into the text ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 195 Inserting a picture from the clipboard ceeeeeeeseeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeees 197 SCANNING IN pictures ierices a e aR O E 197 Changing position and size of a picture seesseesseeseeeee eeren 199 Changing picture properties cceccecsseceeeesneeeeesnteeeeessseeeeseaaes 199 OLE objects 203 Embedding OLE Objects cccccccccseccecessesceeeesseeeeesseeeeesssnaeeess 204 Acquiring an OLE object from a file e eener 205 Editing OLE objects eraen angana a eraa a aeran aeina edie eat 206 elaro Mne E A E A 207 Changing position and size of an OLE object sseesseeeese eeen 207 Changing the properties of OLE objects 0 cceecceseeteseeeeeees 208 Using the SoftMaker Equation Editor 0ccccceeeeeeeeteeeeteeeeenees 210 Frames and drawings 213 Frames basic functions ccesceceeeeceeeseeceeeeseseeeeesseeeaeeeseesaeens 214 Inserting frAMeS eee cece eect ceeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeaeseeeeeeseaeeesaaeeteneeesaes 214 Selecting objects 2 00 ecccecececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeseeeeeeseaeeeeaeseeneeee 215 Object MOde Yat secs Aen eis 216 Changing the position size and margins of objects
229. eference cccsccceceesteeeeeneees 392 FOOUNOLES ies checscatens fect tee ee eco Ace ete aster eee dads 393 Inserting and editing footnotes 0 0 ee ceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteees 393 Changing the formatting of footnotes ceseeeereeeseeeeeeneees 395 FOOtNOte oplosan anara E S aA AAEE S 396 Document revisions 401 Using COMMENTS ereunna nti atlanta ete 401 INS MtING COMMENTS asoita e keea R 402 ECItING COMMENTS sins Aii a aint a E 403 Deleting COMMONS seian e ani e i aE KR aa TERRENS 403 Displaying and printing ComMmMments ssssssssseesssereseerrssrerresseerns 404 Locating commen S eak deii e t A E a E 405 Settings for COMMENHS cccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeesaeeneneeees 405 Tracking changes in a document ssessesssssrrssssrrssesrrnsrsrnrssrernssne 407 Step 1 Enabling the Track changes function sseeeeee 408 Step 2 Making the desired changes 409 Step 3 Accepting rejecting Changes ssessieesesseerresrreese 409 Settings for the Track changes function 411 Internet functions 413 Opening HTML document tccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetsaeeeteneeeeaes 413 Editing HTML Gocument cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeaeees 414 Page formatting ieies eeina ierann aaa aaia aea aaah 414 Colored page backgrounds and background images 414 Pictures in HTML documents ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeeaaes 416 Tables in HTML docume
230. elp la x KE A Dil AE E E SALUT ADDR ff SALUT_BODY Dear MrBackfisch 0 NAME1 feackfisch SS NAME2 Cashflow Consulting Corp FIRSTNAME Mmeo STREET 25 Main Street St STATE ZIP casa st s cITy Janytown PHONE fsss s55 5555 FAX 555 555 5556 Record 1of1 Selected Characte The example database tmw dbf in form view If a tabular list of data records appears instead of a form like the one pictured above you can invoke View gt Form to switch to the form view If you like you can use the example database tmw dbf as your personal address database right away It includes all the database fields needed to store addresses SALUT_ADDR Form of address e g Mr SALUT_BODY Salutation in a letter e g Dear Mr Smith NAMEI1 First line for names e g the last name NAME2 Second line for names e g the company name FIRSTNAME First name STREET Street and number STATE_ZIP Zip code and state CITY City PHONE Telephone number FAX Fax number REMARKI1 First line for remarks REMARK2 Second line for remarks REMARK3 Third line for remarks What you now see on the screen is the first record in the database It consists of several fields A field is an individual part of a record containing an item of information for example a first name Each field contains a different item of information name street city etc and together they make up the record which contains a person s complete a
231. en a letter in this folder all you need to do is click on the Quick path button in the File gt Open dialog and select its quick path The Open dialog changes immediately to the c letters IRS folder Quick paths are available not only in the File gt Open dialog but also in all other dialog boxes that have to do with opening or saving files Defining quick paths To define a new quick path do the following 1 Invoke the command File gt Open 2 Click the Quick path button 3 A menu opens below the button Select the Create new quick path command from it 4 At Name of quick path enter whatever name you like for the quick path for example Letters to the IRS 5 At Path enter the desired folder for example c letters IRS 6 Confirm with OK TextMaker now knows that it should change to the c letters IRS folder when the quick path letters to the IRS is invoked Quick paths with file filters You can specify an unqualified path like cMetters IRS or you can qualify it by appending a filter expression For example you can define a quick path to c Metters IRS 99 which tells TextMaker to change to the c letters IRS folder and display only those files whose names begin with 99 Keyboard shortcut The amp sign can be used in a quick path name to give the name a shortcut For example if you enter amp Letters as the name the quick path of this name can be invoked b
232. en added to the keyword list and exactly where they occur This method does not apply to terms that have been added to the list with the Index all occurrences option checked because no index fields are inserted for such terms They are handled by functions internal to the program Creating the index In the course of adding terms to the keyword list with the Extras gt Index gt Add Index Entry command you have made TextMaker aware of the words that are to appear in the index Now you can have TextMaker create the index itself To do this proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor at the beginning of the line on which the index should be placed 2 Invoke Extras gt Index gt Generate Index 3 Specify either the creation of a new index at the current position or the updating of an existing index by selecting the appropriate option in the Placement group box 4 Select the desired form of the index in the Heading group box None Index entries follow each other without breaks Blank line A blank line is inserted before each index entry that begins with a new first letter First letter A large letter representing the first letter of the immediately following index entries is inserted before each entry that begins with a new first letter As soon as you confirm with OK TextMaker inserts the index into the text Q Quantum mechanics 78 R Raster 102 163 Registration card 11 Right arrow key 20 Roman 151
233. en you want to fill out a form This will save you a great deal of work Forms mode can be activated and deactivated with the View gt Forms Mode command You will know whether Forms mode is activated or not from the program s title bar If Forms Mode is displayed there after the name of the document the mode is activated In Forms mode TextMaker s behavior changes as follows m You can use the keys Tab Tab and Shift Tab Shift Tab to jump from one forms object to the next m Forms objects can be filled out but the normal text is no longer editable Most of the menu commands are grayed out and thus no longer available The purpose of this is to prevent changes to those parts of the form that are not intended to be filled out Thus when using Forms mode you can fill out a form with the same degree of convenience that you experience when you use a database program s input mask Note When you open a document that was in Forms mode when it was last saved Forms mode is reactivated automatically When Forms mode can t be deactivated You will encounter some forms in which the author has blocked the deactivation of Forms mode by protecting it with a password This has been done to prevent unauthorized persons from changing those parts of the form that are not intended to be altered 260 e Forms User Manual TextMaker If a form is protected in this manner an attempt to deactivate Forms mode w
234. ent properties are grouped by topic and each group is presented on one of several property sheets For example if you click on the Summary property sheet you can enter summary information about the document Document properties Summary property sheet The Summary property sheet in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to enter summary information about the current document The summary information can include descriptive entries about the current document subject author key words etc that the file manager can use in searches You can find information on this topic in section Document summary beginning on page 429 Document properties View property sheet The View property sheet in the File gt Properties dialog contains settings that affect the way a document appears on the screen Display field names Controls whether the fields date page number etc are displayed as they would appear when printed or symbolically in the form of the field name surrounded by braces Normally you want to see the printed rendition so leave this option disabled see also chapter Fields beginning on page 147 By default this option is disabled 460 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Show bookmarks You can set bookmarks in a document with Insert gt Bookmark see section Bookmarks beginning on page 144 Normally these text markers are invisible However if you enable Show bookmarks they are
235. er s Outline view allows you to view and edit a document in outline form You can change heading levels and move headings together with subordinated text with a click of the mouse E An outlined document is often provided with a table of contents TextMaker can create one from the outline with the press of a button A large document frequently needs an index In this chapter you will learn how TextMaker can create one for you from words that you select for it m TextMaker can also help you create a bibliography a collection of references to cited literature for the document TextMaker s database module provides a convenient way to enter and edit the sources m With TextMaker it is also possible to insert cross references to other parts of the text or to objects for example see the picture on page 12 E Finally you can insert footnotes that TextMaker controls automatically Outlines You should use outlines to organize large documents An outline presents the entire subject matter of the document in summary form as a structure of major and minor topics This structure is based on headings that you give to different parts of the body text The headings break the text into manageable segments An outline provides an overview of the document and allows you to easily easy manipulate document segments to obtain the desired organization of the text Once you have invoked the View gt Outline command you will be ab
236. er Tour in the file Tour4 tmd if this document was included in your SoftMaker implementation You now know many of the program s basic functions and you ought to take some time at this point to investigate them further It would be a good exercise for example to format the letter differently to give it a more attractive font and to put in your own address Next you can delve into the rest of the manual It has been intentionally put together in such a way that you can read a single chapter at a time as it becomes necessary in the course of your work So step by step you can familiarize yourself with the functions as you want to use them Have fun with TextMaker 56 e The TextMaker Tour User Manual TextMaker Working with selections This chapter marks the beginning of the reference section of the manual This section provides detailed descriptions of all TextMaker s functions organized into chapters by subject matter as is customary in a reference book The reference material in this chapter is about working with selections When you want to delete copy or move a part of a document you must first select it This is the case for objects pictures drawings etc as well as for text In addition you must select a text segment before you can apply certain commands that modify its formatting For example if you want to format a single word in a specific font you must select the word before you specify the font The follow
237. er will perform spell checking automatically Automatic spell checking is disabled by default as indicated by the selection of Disabled However manual spell checking is still available and can be started with the Extras gt Check Spelling command see section Retroactive spell checking beginning on page 284 456 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Check spelling as you type If you enable this option TextMaker will check the spelling of text as you type As soon as you make a mistake a dialog box will appear to facilitate a correction see section Spell checking as you type beginning on page 285 There is an additional option associated with this option Beep on errors When this option is enabled TextMaker issues a warning tone when it encounters an unknown word while checking spelling as you type Background spell checking If you enable this option TextMaker will continuously scan the entire document for spelling errors in the background Incorrectly spelled words are indicated with wavy red underlines and can be corrected at any time by right clicking on them For more information see section Background spell checking beginning on page 286 The following additional options are applicable when background spell checking is enabled Underline typos in red Normally any incorrectly written word is indicated with a wavy red underline When you disable this option the wavy underlines are not disp
238. ered in this field for example Name and then to insert the text field itself to the right of this description So do the following 1 Type Name and then insert a tab with the Tab Tab key 2 Insert a text field with Object gt New Forms Object gt Text Field 3 At this point the text cursor is positioned in the text field Press the 4 key to return it to the main text 4 Press the Enter key twice The first line of the form is now complete Use the same procedure to add two additional lines with the labels Address and City Dropdown lists Next a dropdown list is to be inserted below the three text fields Dropdown lists allow users to choose among several alternatives Proceed as follows 1 Type Gender and then press Tab Tab 2 Invoke Object gt New Forms Object gt Dropdown 3 Now you must enter the items that are to appear in the list Enter male in the New Entry field and click on Add then enter female and again click on Add 4 Exit the dialog with OK 5 Press twice Checkboxes for yes no entries Lastly a checkbox is to be inserted Checkboxes can be used for yes no entries If the box is checked it means yes If the box is not checked it means no Accordingly we will add a checkbox that should be checked only when the client is new 1 Type New client and then press Tab Tab 2 Invoke Object gt New Forms Obj
239. erence etc and the line under it have been set we want to put something in the second line Move the text cursor to the beginning of this line line 18 and type MB Tab Tab 1 28 05 Tab TabHG Tab Tall 1 25 05 You see since this line was selected along with the line above it when the tab stops were set those same tab stops are used here too Of course what is still missing is today s date In the next lesson segment we will let TextMaker insert it automatically and in this way we will get acquainted with fields 50 e The TextMaker Tour User Manual TextMaker Inserting dates and other fields Today s date should be inserted in the area below Date which has remained empty up until now Of course we don t want to type it manually rather we leave this task to TextMaker Insert a tab following the text you just entered with the Tab Tab key and invoke the command Insert gt Field Insert Field xi Field type Data Roman uppercase Roman lowercase Close User Home xl The dialog box for Insert gt Field From the Field type list select the field Print date The Data list changes automatically here you can select the format in which the date is to be inserted Choose the desired format and click on Insert TextMaker now inserts the current date in the text and our letterhead looks something like this i Tour2 tmd Ol x Escher amp Sons Arch
240. ering line invoke the Format gt Borders dialog again First select in the Sample field the line or lines you want to modify then make the desired changes To remove lines choose the option None from the Line style list Options The dialog box for the Format gt Borders command presents a number of options that you can set Line style Determines the kind of line to be drawn None Single or Double Thickness Determines the width of the line For double lines you can change the width of the inner line with Thickness 1 and the width of the outer line with Thickness 2 m Separation Only for double lines determines the spacing between the inner and outer lines m Clearance Determines the distance from the border to the text Bounds Determines where the lines should begin and end Option Meaning Margins Lines extend from the left page margin to the right page margin Indents Lines extend from the paragraph s left indent to its right indent This is the default setting Text Lines are the same width as the text they surround m Color Here you can change the colors of the lines You can use the colors presented or colors that you compose yourself see section Document properties Colors property sheet beginning on page 463 m Sample field Here you can select the individual lines you want to add or change You select or deselect lines by clicking on them with the mouse When lines are selected
241. ermediate calculation whose result should not be shown enable the Hide result option in the dialog box for Insert gt Calculation Example MY_MONTH MONTH TODAY Here the month of today s data is calculated and shown At the same time the result is saved in the variable MY_MONTH Naturally you can insert such a variable in other formulas 356 e Calculations in the text User Manual TextMaker Example PRICE 1 16 This formula gives the current value of the PRICE variable multiplied by 1 16 Operators The following operators can be used in formulas Operator Function Addition with numbers or concatenation with text strings Subtraction Multiplication Division Modulus remainder after division The plus sign is used not only to add numeric values but also to concatenate text strings For example the formula Text Maker gives TextMaker An associative rule applies Multiplication and division operators take precedence over addition and subtraction operators so that multiplication and division are performed before addition and subtraction 2 3 4 gives 14 The order of operations can be modified by using parentheses 2 3 4 gives 20 In addition there are comparative and logical operators that are needed for example for the IF function Operator Function Is equal lt gt Is not equal Is greater than gt Is greater than or equal to lt Is less than lt
242. ers and INES riinan teriery ernia AAs AE E N SAR AKATA ANAE AE 92 Outline OVElla is sccss caecses aavactthaagatetete r aa e AEn Ea e SA AR h 94 Forcing breaks before paragraphs ececeeeceeeeseceeeeeseteeeseaeeeeaes 95 Paragrapi COMO esaret ar aiT Ea PAAA AASE AEE SAIE ES 95 Non breaking SPaCES corio ani aaike pane e Anei u taikina na ieii 96 Page formatting 97 Entering page breaks eenia T E R E RS 98 Paper format and page orientation ccccccseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeesaeenenes 98 Fage maidh sisrate T a E 100 Headers and footers ainei iai i eede aai iea iaa kaada aiii 100 Creating and editing headers and footers sesesseesseeee ene 101 Inserting the page number date etC ccccsseceeeesteeeeeeeees 102 Changing the properties of headers and footersS 008 103 Setting the beginning page for a header and footer 105 Different headers footers on left and right facing pages 106 Deleting headers and footers ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeteeeeeaes 106 Master pages ci a tte nl eileen tha erent 107 Editing the Master Page sosisceiiatonsiat noier a R 107 Dividing a document into chapters ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 109 Inserting and removing chapters cceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeenaaes 110 Chapters and page formatting cccccccccceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 110 Chapter formatting aa e eiaa Raai aaia 111 Navigating among chapters
243. erted see below 4 Click on Insert to insert the new cells before the current cell or on Append to insert them at the end of the table The cells are immediately inserted If you did not select complete rows or columns prior to invoking the Table gt Insert Cells command a dialog appears that allows you to specify the way the cells are to be inserted Insert or Append Cells Ea ci Entire columns Append Single cells Number 1 Ej tht Cancel The dialog presents the following options Option Meaning Entire rows Complete rows of cells are inserted Entire columns Complete columns of cells are inserted Single cells Cells are inserted on a cell by cell basis depending on the current selection For example if you selected 4x4 cells prior to invoking the command 4x4 cells are inserted An additional option allows you to specify the Number of cells to be inserted If for example you select Entire rows and then set the Number to 10 10 rows will be inserted instead of only one Tip Quick insertion of complete rows or columns There is a shortcut for inserting new rows or columns Select either an entire row or an entire column of cells before invoking Table gt Insert Cells TextMaker will then immediately insert a new row or column ahead of the selected row or column without first displaying the above described dialog Tip If you select multiple rows or columns before invoking thi
244. erty sheet The View property sheet in the Extras gt Preferences dialog allows you to specify what will be displayed in the main window and in document windows Document window group box Here you can choose the tools to be displayed in the document window mu Table guidelines Here you specify whether or not a grid of gray lines should be used to make the the boundaries of table cells visible on the screen These lines serve simply as visual aides They are not printed By default this option is enabled m Frame guidelines Here you specify whether or not gray lines should be used to make the boundaries of text frames visible These lines merely indicate the position and size of the text frame on the screen They are not printed By default this option is enabled OLE object guidelines Windows only Here you specify whether or not gray lines should be used to make the boundaries of OLE objects visible These lines merely indicate the position and size of the object on the screen They are not printed By default this option is enabled 446 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Guides As described in section Using guides beginning on page 486 you can set up guidelines for each document that will simplify the accurate positioning of objects With this option you specify whether or not these guidelines should be displayed on the screen By default this option is enabled Note If you disable this opt
245. es and folders in the list The folders can be opened by double clicking on them They contain prepared document templates for writing letters etc 3 Select a document template and click on OK A new document is now set up from this template and all the character and paragraph styles saved in the template become available to you If the template contains text text corresponding to it is displayed in the new document and can be edited just like normal text Tip TextMaker is distributed with various prepared document templates These contain complete letterheads etc and are linked with the address database tmw dbf They can lighten your daily writing load considerably read about this in section Importing individual addresses beginning on page 317 Modifying document templates Modifying a document template is no different from editing a normal document You open the template make your changes and save the template Important Naturally when you modify a document template your modifications will affect all documents that are subsequently created on the basis of this template 128 e Styles User Manual TextMaker To modify a document template proceed as follows 1 Invoke File gt Open 2 Select the entry Template from the Files of type list box 3 Find the template to be modified and confirm with OK 4 Make the desired changes in the text or in the character and paragraph styles 5 Invoke File
246. es in the text as described in step 3 To insert a bibliography proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor at the beginning of the line on which you want the bibliography to be placed 2 Invoke Extras gt Bibliography gt Generate Bibliography 3 Specify whether a new bibliography is to be created at the current position or whether an existing bibliography is to be updated by selecting the appropriate option in the Placement group box 4 As required you can modify the way the source listings will appear in the bibliography using the large edit field at the bottom of the dialog see below When you confirm with OK the bibliography is inserted into the text Note As mentioned in the introduction to step 4 only those sources from the bibliography database that are actually referenced in the document see step 3 appear in bibliography Changing the appearance of the bibliography Before clicking on OK to close the above described dialog you can if required change the form in which the source listings will appear Editing text You can always edit the text that appears in the edit field Use the standard editing commands for this purpose 386 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker Changing formatting The formatting can also be changed To change formatting first select the segment of text you want to format in the edit field and then use the miniature Formatting toolbar displayed above it t
247. es on off Go to the previous change Go to the next change Accept the current change Reject the current change Accept all changes Reject all changes Accept or reject changes under dialog control Show changes on off Detailed information about the individual functions of these buttons is given in the following sections Step 1 Enabling the Track changes function To enable the Track changes function open the document that you want to revise and invoke the command Extras gt Changes gt Track Changes In the menu the icon next to the command is highlighted to indicate that the Track changes function is enabled 408 e Document revisions User Manual TextMaker Tip When the document already contains tracked changes and the Reviewing toolbar is displayed this command can also be invoked by clicking on the icon in the Reviewing toolbar Step 2 Making the desired changes Next make the desired changes in the document as you normally would You can alter delete and add text change the formatting etc Thus the document can be edited just as if the Track changes function didn t exist There is only one important difference Your changes are not immediately applied to the document but are highlighted in color and otherwise marked as follows m When you add text it is colored and underlined m When you delete text it is colored and strack through m When you change the formatting of text it is col
248. eseeeeeseaeeneneeee 320 Managing lists and labels ccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeees 323 Creating a database 0 ecccccceceeeseeceeeeeceneeeeaeeeeneeeseaeeeeaeeteeeenaes 324 Form letters 329 Assigning a database to a document ee eceetteeeeetteeetttteeeeeeeee 330 Inserting database fields eccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeetaeeneaeeees 331 Viewing test records in the text 0 ecececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeaes 332 Practiceleter niera tet a celta ted Net See a tl ta 333 Selecting data reCOrds c ccccecceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeneeceeaeeeeaesesneeeeaes 334 Selecting single records manually 336 Selecting by record NUMDESS ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 336 Selecting by condition 200 2 eee eet eeeeee cent eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeneneeees 337 Calculations in the text 341 Inserting calculations e ae aana a aa aana aa a tae abled 341 Variables in Calculations ccccccccccccccccsseeeeceseseeeesseueeeseeeeeeees 342 Table cells in calculations cece ccecceseeeeccssseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaas 345 Database fields in calculations cccccccccccceceeeseseeeeaeaeanaeaeaes 347 Objects in CalCulationS cc ccccccsececeeseeeeeessteeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeees 348 Formatting and rounding calculations ccececeeeeeeeeeeeetteeees 349 Updating Calculations e enaena na aaee aa a aeran a nde cdevdieeceate 351 oine LOIA T ALENA EE E EE EEE EAE PEE N
249. et the Type to None existing bullets or numbers are removed 158 e Automatic numbering User Manual TextMaker You can always transform a numbered list into a bulleted list simply by changing the Type to Bullet Naturally you can proceed in the opposite direction as well Before and After As required you can specify text to be added before and or after the number that TextMaker will assign to the paragraph For example if you want the numbers surrounded by dashes 1 2 3 etc you should select the Format 1 2 3 and enter in each of the Before and After fields Format Here you specify the format for the numbering Besides the usual 1 2 3 you can select for example letters A B C or Roman numerals I II HI BJs Numbering starts with By default TextMaker starts every enumeration with 1 If you want to use a different starting value enter it here Skip numbering It is often the case that a numbered list includes an individual item that needs to span more than a single paragraph In such a case only the item s first paragraph should be numbered numbering should skip succeeding paragraphs that belong to that item and resume only with the paragraph that constitutes the following item TextMaker provides the Skip numbering option for such a situation When numbered paragraphs that are to be grouped as one item with a preceding numbered paragraph have been selected you can che
250. etc Thus if you want to change the appearance of all headings at a specific level all you have to do is edit the corresponding paragraph style To do this proceed as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style 2 Select the style corresponding to the headings you want to modify from the list For example if you want to modify all level one headings select the Heading 1 style 3 Click on Edit 4 A dialog box appears to enable you to set the desired paragraph formatting By clicking on the Character button you can also set character formatting for the selected style Make the desired changes 5 Click on OK 6 Exit the dialog box with Close If necessary you can review the detailed information about styles that is presented in chapter Styles beginning on page 115 Note When you edit the structure of a document in Outline view TextMaker automatically applies the Heading 1 9 styles to the corresponding headings You should not attempt to change the names of these styles or to apply other styles to the headings Any such attempts would work but not for long because TextMaker would automatically reapply its styles when you subsequently changed the outline levels of paragraphs in the Outline view Tips for experts Managing headings with paragraph styles When you change the outline level of a paragraph in Outline view nothing much really happens TextMaker merely applies one of the paragraph styles
251. eted an image of the original will appear as a picture in the document Scanning into a picture frame The procedure just described inserts the scanned picture into the text Alternatively you can insert the picture into a freely movable picture frame To do this simply switch to Object mode using the View gt Object Mode command before invoking the File gt Acquire command You will find more information about picture frames in section Picture frames beginning on page 242 Selecting other sources When several scanners are connected to your PC you can switch among them with the File gt Select Source command To switch scanners invoke the command select the desired device and confirm with OK 198 e Pictures User Manual TextMaker Changing position and size of a picture A picture inserted with the Object gt New Picture command is treated by TextMaker like a character within the text When you want to change the position of such a picture all you need to do is cut it and paste it at another place using the familiar Edit menu commands The size of such a picture can be changed in either of two ways u Dragging the boundary lines Click on the picture to select it When the picture is selected red lines are displayed on its borders When you drag one of these lines with the mouse the size of the picture is changed accordingly E Entering values manually after double clicking Double click on the picture to br
252. etting is valid only in TextMaker and is not saved in the HTML file Accordingly if you later open the document in a web browser it will appear with the browser s standard color not the color selected in TextMaker m Adding a background image To use an image as the page background either enter the image s filename manually in the Background image box or click on the Browse button to locate the image file on your hard disk It is recommended to use graphics in the JPG GIF and PNG formats only since these formats can be displayed by almost any Internet browser The background image file should reside in the folder where the HTML document is stored If it resides somewhere else you should place a copy in this folder You will find detailed information about inserting graphics in section Pictures in HTML documents beginning on page 416 Pictures in HTML documents To insert a picture into an HTML document you can use the command Object gt New Picture see chapter Pictures beginning on page 195 However you should take note of the following points mu The picture should reside in the same folder as the document As a rule the picture should reside in the folder where the document is saved So either copy the picture to that folder manually before adding it to the document or simply check the Copy to document s folder option in the Object gt New Picture dialog and allow TextMaker to do this for you m
253. eviously described 48 e The TextMaker Tour User Manual TextMaker Please select the line you just entered and the line below it because we want the tab stops for the next line which is to be filled out later to be set the same way 2 Choose the desired tab type in the Formatting toolbar At the right end of the Formatting toolbar four different tab icons are presented L Flush left tab Flush right tab the text ends at the tab position aj Centered tab the text is centered on the tab position Decimal tab numbers are aligned on the decimal separator Now click on the icon for flush left tabs 3 Click on the desired tab position s in the ruler With the mouse click on the approximate positions 1 inch 3 inches 4 inches and 5 5 inches to set tab stops at those positions Notice how the text is adjusted according to your settings By the way you could have proceeded in the opposite way You could have defined the tab stops before you typed the line Your reference etc and then typed the text along with the tabs The ruler and text should now look something like this i Tour2 tmd Of x Your erence Your letter ot Our reference Our letter of Date The tab stops are now set and are displayed in the ruler If the position of a tab stop doesn t suit you you can shift it right there in the ruler First select the paragraphs to be modified as necessary then with your mouse point at the tab s
254. ext box appears giving the icon s function Document window The document window used for editing documents takes up the largest part of the screen Every document that you open or create is displayed in its own document window Thus you can edit several documents at the same time and move data back and forth between them A document window has the following components Horizontal ruler The horizontal ruler is found at the top of the document window The margins and tab stops for the active paragraph or for all the paragraphs that might be selected at a given moment are shown there The unit of measure used is inch or centimeter depending on your computer s settings Indentations and tab stops are not just shown here they can also be changed here using the mouse You will learn how to change them in the sections Indents beginning on page 74 and Tabs beginning on page 82 Document The document itself takes up the largest area of the window To learn more about working with document windows see chapter Document windows beginning on page 441 Status toolbar The status toolbar is found at the bottom of the TextMaker window L37coi8 Section Chapter1 Page 1 of 2 Ins When you move the mouse cursor over the buttons of a toolbar or over the commands on a menu a short explanation of the object is given in the status toolbar Additionally the following information is dis
255. ext menu contains several suggestions and one of them has Primary spelling written after it this is the spelling that is preferred Background The German spelling reform specifies a primary spelling and secondary spellings for many words Normally the primary spelling should be used but the secondary spellings are still allowed Example Wagon should now be written for the word Waggon since the former is the new spelling But Waggon is still permitted E Alternative spellings If several suggestions are displayed and none of them is designated as the primary spelling all the spellings given are equally allowed You yourself can choose the spelling you would like to use Example Either Delphin or Delfin can now be written for the word Delphin as you choose The Info command of the spell checker When you invoke the spell checker s context menu as described in the previous section an additional item appears for German words in the old spelling the Info command This command refers to additional options and shows information about the rule governing the change in the word s spelling under the German spelling reform This command s dialog box provides the following functions Item Function List of suggestions Here all spellings that are correct according to the reformed German spelling rules are displayed If you click on one and then push the Change button TextMaker replaces the
256. ey represent database fields Instead whenever you get to one of them invoke Insert gt Field select the item Database field in the Field type list box select the field name in the Data list box and then click on Insert In this way the database fields will be entered into the text The Society of American Calligraphers FIRSTNAME NAME1 Attn NAME2 STREET CITY STATE_ZIP SALUT_BODY We are pleased to announce that the Society of American Calligraphers will no longer have to rely on handwriting for its official communications We have decided to convert everyone in the office to personal computers We are now using TextMaker which has an integrated database allowing us to send personalized form letters to all our members All in all TextMaker provides enormous savings in time and cost not to mention quills and ink With best regards Now you have created a template that TextMaker can fill in with the field contents from the database records when it prints the form letters Bring up the example database tmw dbf and enter a few data records Naturally it is up to you to choose the names and addresses When you have entered the records exit the database with File gt Close All the basic steps have now been taken and you could now print your form letter Selecting data records Note Selecting records is not possible with the Pocket PC version of TextMaker 33
257. f you specify for example a search for TextMaker will find occurrences of a through z and A through Z including letters with umlauts and other accents m Any character searches for any character whatsoever letter number or punctuation sign E Any Smart quote q searches for any kind of Smart quote like or Neutral quotes like and will not be searched for m Caret searches for the caret To include one of these symbols in the search term click on the Special button and select the desired symbol with a mouse click You can repeat and combine these symbols at will within the same search term Moreover you can use them together with normal text A search for gallons of would yield all occurrences of this form for example 10 gallons of oil 42 gallons of gas etc Searching replacing formatting The Edit gt Search and Edit gt Replace allows you to search not only for text but also for formatting and to replace the specified formatting with other formatting as required With this command you can for example replace a specific font with another font at all the points in the text where the former occurs To search for formatting proceed as follows 1 Invoke Edit gt Search 2 If the Format and Reset buttons are not displayed in the dialog click on the Enlarge button to expand the search dialog 3 C
258. fault From now on TextMaker will always offer this template as the default when you create a new document Multi column page layouts In TextMaker it is possible to lay out text in multiple columns Within a document you can change the number of columns as often as you like Entering text in a section of the document that has multiple columns is not much different than entering text in a single column section The one difference when you reach the end of the first column your text is not continued on a new page instead it is continued in the next column on the same page In other words a column break is automatically inserted A page break is inserted only when you continue typing past the end of the last column Manual column break You can direct TextMaker to break a column above the point at which it would insert a break automatically by manually invoking the Insert gt Breaks gt Column break command at the desired place TextMaker then breaks the column immediately Detailed information about setting up multi column text is given on the following pages Changing the number of columns To reformat a section of single column text in e g three columns all you have to do is select the text and change the number of columns with the Format gt Section command To do this proceed as follows 1 Select the text section you want to reformat 2 Invoke Format gt Section Columns Line numbers r Presets r P
259. file Note Only files in GIF or PNG format can contain transparency data No transparency The picture is not displayed with transparency even if the file contains transparency data Color Allows you to select manually the color that is to be rendered as transparent For example if you select the color white all white areas of the picture will be rendered transparent Rotate by Here you can rotate the picture by a given angle a File button With this button you can select a different picture file m Export button Available only for pictures that are saved in the document You can use this button to export a picture that is to save a copy of it on your hard disk under any file name you like If you check the Create link to file option TextMaker first copies the picture from the document to a file and then removes the picture from the document replacing it with a reference to the new file Thus the picture is no longer saved in the document Tip Some of the above described settings can also be made with the help of menus After selecting the picture either choose the Object gt Properties command or right click on the picture to open the context menu OLE object frames Note OLE objects can be used only in the Windows version of TextMaker In the chapter OLE object beginning on page 203 you learned what OLE objects are and how to insert them directly into the text OLE objects can al
260. ge If necessary you can also specify the language of a section of text only required when you use more than one language in a document see section Setting the language beginning on page 280 Text styles can be combined as desired Applying text styles To apply text styles invoke the command Format gt Character and switch to the dialog s Font property sheet Now you can turn the desired styles on and off For example to turn on bold or italic open the Style list to the right of typeface size and select the desired format from the list Regular Italic Bold or Bold Italic To apply other text styles turn them on or off by clicking with the mouse on their checkboxes in the Styles section of the dialog Using the Formatting toolbar The most useful text styles can also be applied using the Formatting toolbar LS Normal Times New Roman 7 fio x LE B ulz Z EE e d L E Click on the icon for the format you want to apply or remove The B stands for bold the J for italic and the U for single underline Tip There are also keyboard shortcuts for the application of these formats Ctrl B Ctri B for bold Ctr Ctri for italic and Cirl U Ctrl U for single underline 66 e Character formatting User Manual TextMaker Text color You can specify color for both the text itself and for its background To do this 1 Select the desired text 2 Invoke the command Format gt Character
261. ge of the chapter in the adjacent field For example if you type 42 the first page of the chapter will be page 42 the second page 43 etc You will find additional information about the use of page numbers in section Inserting the page number date etc beginning on page 102 112 e Page formatting User Manual TextMaker mu Chapter starts on Whenever you insert a chapter break TextMaker adds a page break Accordingly new chapters always begin on new pages Now when you change the setting of Chapter starts on from Either page the default to Right page for example TextMaker makes sure that the chapter always begins on a right page by automatically adding a blank page as necessary at the end of the previous chapter For example it is customary for every chapter in a printed book to begin on a right page This allows the reader to page through the book quickly to find the beginning of any chapter of interest E Master page You can specify the page beginning on which the master page and by extension its header and footer is to be applied by entering the page number in the Starts on page field The default setting is 1 accordingly by default the master page will be applied beginning on the first page of the chapter You will find additional information in the section Setting the beginning page for a header and footer on page 105 and in The beginning page to which the master page should be applie
262. ginning on page 363 Actual Size etc You can set the zoom level with the commands View gt Actual Size through View gt Custom see section Changing the zoom level beginning on page 470 Object Mode Turns Object mode on or off In Object mode you can no longer edit text However this mode provides many functions that lighten work with objects like pictures frames etc see section Object mode beginning on page 216 Forms Mode Turns Forms mode on or off In Forms mode only forms objects text fields checkboxes lists etc can be filled out Access to the rest of the document and to most of TextMaker s functions is blocked See chapter Forms beginning on page 257 Toolbars Opens a dialog box that allows you to show hide toolbars reposition them or edit them see section Customizing toolbars beginning on page 471 Horizontal Ruler Turns the horizontal ruler on or off Additional settings for customizing the display of documents are available with the following commands m Extras gt Preferences allows you to make general settings that are valid for all documents see section Preferences View property sheet beginning on page 446 m File gt Properties allows you to make settings that are valid only for the current document see section Document properties View property sheet beginning on page 460 Changing the zoom level TextMaker offers you several different ways t
263. gs Select font in Formatting toolbar Boldface on off Italics on off Underlining on off Superscript Subscript Remove super or subscript Paragraph formattings Increase left indent Decrease left indent Increase hanging indent Decrease hanging indent Automatic single line spacing 100 Automatic one and a half line spacing 150 Automatic double line spacing 200 Alignment Flush left Alignment Flush right Alignment Centered Alignment Justified 490 e Keyboard shortcuts F3 F3 F5 F5 or Ctrl G Ctri G F8 F8 Ctrl Space Ctrl Space Ctrl D Ctrl D Crl B Ct B Ctr Ctri 1 Ctrl U Ctr1 U Ctrl Shift Num Ctr Shift Num Ctrl Shift Num Ctrl Shift Num Ctrl Shift Num Ctr Shift Num Ctrl M Ctri M Ctrl Shift M Ctri Shift M Cerl T Ctd T Ctrl Shift T Ctrl Shift T Cr Ctri 1 Cr 5 Ctr 5 Ctrl 2 Ctri 2 Cul Ctrl L Cr R Cti R Ctr Ct E CulCtri J User Manual TextMaker Command Keyboard shortcut Paragraph styles Apply paragraph style Normal Apply paragraph style Heading 1 Apply paragraph style Heading 2 Apply paragraph style Heading 3 Insert gt Calculation Insert gt Breaks gt Page Break Insert gt Breaks gt Column Break Extras gt Changes gt Track Changes Extras gt Update Fields Aln O Alt 0 Al Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 2 AlN 3 Alt 3 F2 F2 Ctrl Ctri Ctrl Shift C
264. h Always on the other hand you allow hyphenation to be performed whenever possible on any line of the paragraph But what do the other two options do It is not always a good idea to hyphenate at every point where it would be possible to do so When working with text in narrow columns for example that could lead to a broken word at the end of almost every line and consequently to a reduction of the document s legibility In such cases you can use the Every 2 Lines or Every 3 Lines option to direct TextMaker to attempt hyphenation only in every second or third line Manual modifications to hyphenation The hyphen that TextMaker inserts when performing hyphenation is not a normal dash Rather it is known as a soft hyphen If you change the text in such a way that the hyphenation becomes superfluous the soft hyphen separating the word disappears automatically Should TextMaker perform a hyphenation in the wrong place or fail to hyphenate when a hyphen is needed you can insert soft hyphens in the text manually To do this use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl Ctrl Minus minus sign Tip Soft hyphens that you insert manually always have priority over hyphens that TextMaker sets automatically This priority allows you complete control over the automatic hyphenation Characters The dialog box for the Format gt Paragraph command has a button called Character With the help of this button you can modify the character forma
265. h large documents User Manual TextMaker Tables of references TOC index etc TextMaker provides functions that authors can use to significantly lighten some of the most time consuming work associated with the preparation of large documents The creation of tables of contents and indices is easy with TextMaker and TextMaker even supports the creation of bibliographies collections of references to cited literature m For an index see page 375 you merely have to tell TextMaker what words are to be indexed and where they are in the text This is done by selecting each word and invoking the Extras gt Index gt Add Index Entry command for it When all the keywords have been set you can tell TextMaker to create the index with Extras gt Index gt Generate Index m For a table of contents see page 379 all you have to do is outline your document as described at the beginning of this chapter The outline already contains all the information TextMaker needs about the hierarchy of the headings to enable it to create the table of contents as soon as you invoke the Extras gt Generate Table of Contents command m For a bibliography see page 381 you first enter all your sources in a bibliography database and assign it to the document You can then insert references to your sources into the document When you finally invoke Extras gt Bibliography gt Generate Bibliography TextMaker automatically generates a list of all the referenced
266. h the original size of the picture 3 A dialog appears to enable you to specify the picture that is to appear in the frame Select the desired picture file and confirm with OK The picture frame is immediately inserted You use a similar procedure to insert other kinds of frames You will find detailed information about individual kinds of frames the in sections on Text frames Picture frames etc beginning on page 238 Selecting objects Before you can edit an object you must first choose it that is select it To do this simply click on the desired object A red frame will appear around the object to indicate that it is now selected Note This does not work with text fields text frames and other objects that have transparent fills To select such an object you can click on its border if it has one Otherwise you must switch to Object mode see the next section There you can select any kind of object with a simple click of the mouse You cannot modify the normal text while an object is selected only the selected object can be edited When you want to return to the text to continue editing it simply click with the mouse at the desired position in the text This action will deselect the object Object mode Object mode provides the simplest way to work with frames drawings and all other objects Normally you work with TextMaker in Edit mode In this mode you can enter edit format etc text Whe
267. hapters when for example you need to change the document s page headers and footers or you want to change the paper format in the middle of the document see section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 109 You can influence page formatting not only by setting the above mentioned options but also by setting manual page breaks Normally TextMaker fills the pages from top to bottom When the text reaches the end of a page an automatic page break is inserted and the text is carried over to the next page If you want the text to be broken before it reaches the end of a page you can insert a manual page break see the next section Units of measure You can enter values in TextMaker s dialog boxes not only in inches but also in other units of measure To enter a value in specific units simply add one of the following units of measure after the number Unit Explanation cm centimeter in inch 1 in equals 2 54 cm pt point 72 pt equals 1 in pi pica 1 pi equals 12 pt The default unit of measure depends on your computer s region settings For example if you type 5 08 cm for the left page margin TextMaker sets it to 2 in 5 08 cm Entering page breaks By default TextMaker automatically fills the pages of a document from top to bottom When the text reaches the end of a page an automatic page break is inserted and the text is continued on the following page If you
268. hat you have created two text frames on one page and that you want text to flow from one to the next You would link these frames as follows 1 Click on the RI icon in the Formatting toolbar or invoke the View gt Object Mode command to activate Object mode 2 Select the Z icon for Link text frames in the Object toolbar 3 Click on the text frame in which the text should begin 4 Click on the text frame you want to link to the initial frame Important This text frame must be empty 5 Finally click again on the RI icon or invoke the View gt Object Mode command again to exit Object mode Now when you enter text in the first frame to the extent that it overflows that frame the text will be continued in the second frame You can even link together more than two frames To do this first link the first frame with the second then the second with a third etc To remove an existing link click on the first of two linked frames with the Link text frames tool TextMaker will then ask you if you want to remove the link Picture frames A picture frame differs from a picture that is inserted directly into the text see the chapter Pictures beginning on page 195 in the following way A picture frame like all other types of frames occupies a fixed position on the page Thus it does not move when you add or remove text above the frame Inserting picture frames To insert a picture frame proceed as follows 1 Invoke th
269. hat you would want to change from portrait to landscape orientation in the middle of a document in order to better accommodate a wide table To do that you could insert a chapter break set the paper orientation in the new chapter to Landscape and then lay out the table Following the table insert another chapter break and set the paper orientation back to Portrait so that you can continue the writing the main text in portrait format You will find details about working with chapters on the following pages Inserting and removing chapters To start a new chapter simply insert a chapter break in the text 1 Move the text cursor to the position at which the new chapter should begin 2 Invoke the Insert gt Breaks gt Chapter break command TextMaker now inserts a chapter break Note TextMaker always performs a page break at the beginning of a new chapter Tip The chapter in which the text cursor is currently positioned is displayed in the Chapter field in the status toolbar at the bottom of the TextMaker window Removing a chapter break You can remove a chapter break by positioning the text cursor at the beginning of the first paragraph following the break and then pressing the Backspace key _ The chapter lying before the break is then integrated into the chapter after the break and takes on the latter s formatting Chapters and page formatting Important A different page format can be applied to
270. he File Manager button you can invoke the integrated file manger This shows a list of your documents and allows you not only to open print view or delete them but also to perform searches see section The file manager beginning on page 430 Previewing a document When you have selected a document in the open dialog but are not sure if it is in fact the document you want simply click on Preview A window then opens and the file is displayed in it The list of recently opened files Tip At the bottom of the File menu you will find a list of recently opened files Simply click on one of these files to open it again Printing a document If you would like to print the active document invoke the command File gt Print or press Ctrl P Ctrl P 32 e Basics User Manual TextMaker Printer PCL Laser p Options Copies Port COM1 57600 i a Collate copies Net path Draft mode Pages all Current page C Drop pictures Pages 1 1 C Reverse order Pages to print Ase J A dialog box appears in which you enter the pages and the number of copies to be printed One copy of the entire document is printed by default Color You can learn how the other options work in chapter Printing and e mailing beginning on page 421 Saving a document When you have prepared a document you ought to save it in order to make it permanent You find the Save command in the F
271. he Table gt Select command a sub menu opens from which you can specify selection of the current row s the current column s or the entire table Tip Occasionally you will want to select only a single cell The only way to do this is to use the following trick use the mouse to drag the selection from the cell of interest into a neighboring cell and then back Deleting copying moving cell contents To delete copy or move the contents of table cells select the cells and then use the familiar commands in the Edit menu Delete The Edit gt Delete command keyboard shortcut Del Del deletes the contents of all the currently selected cells Cut The Edit gt Cut command keyboard shortcut Ctrl x Ctrl X cuts the contents of the selected cells and holds them in the clipboard Copy The Edit gt Copy command keyboard shortcut Ctrl C Ctr1 C copies the contents of the selected cells into the clipboard Paste The Edit gt Paste command keyboard shortcut Ctrl V Ctrl V inserts the contents of the clipboard Before using this command position the text cursor in the desired cell Note Notice that these commands apply only to the contents of the cells So when you select some cells and invoke for example the Edit gt Delete command only the contents of the cells are removed the cells themselves remain as they were You will find information about deleting inserting complete table cells includ
272. he basis of the sort In addition you can specify the sort order Ascending A Z or Descending Z A Then sort by You can specify more than one sort criterion as required For example if the first column contains last names and the second column contains first names you can select the first column for Sort by and the second column for Then sort by The rows of the table will be sorted by last name and those rows containing the same last name will then be sorted by first name First row contains headings You should check this option if the first row of your table contains headings so that TextMaker will not include the first row in the sort Example A table contains addresses The first row contains headings like Name Street City etc In a case like this you should check this option to ensure that the headings will remain in the first row and will not be mixed up in the sort Case sensitive If you check this option sort terms that begin with lowercase letters will be placed after terms beginning with uppercase letters Otherwise all sort terms that begin with the same letter will be grouped together regardless of the cases of the first letters 190 e Tables User Manual TextMaker Sorting text You can sort not only the contents of a table as described in the previous section but also paragraphs of normal text paragraphs To do this you use the Edit gt Sort command Proceed as follows
273. he chapter of interest or select several chapters to change the format for all of them at the same time A selection can begin in any paragraph of the first chapter of interest and end in any paragraph in the last chapter 2 Invoke the Format gt Chapter command r Chapter number r Chapter starts on Increment Right page C value Left page Cancel Either page r Page Number __Bage setup cs Increment Master page C value Starts on page fi Facing pages Inside gutter Din 3 Make the desired changes and confirm with OK The dialog box for this command allows you to make the following settings m Chapter number TextMaker automatically numbers chapters incrementally You can always view the number of the current chapter in the status toolbar When you change the Chapter number setting from Increment the default to Value you can set the chapter number yourself by entering it in the value field For example if you enter 5 as the number for the third chapter the chapters will have the numerical sequence 1 2 5 6 7 etc Tip The chapter number can be inserted into the text for example in a header or footer at any time with the Insert gt Field command m Page number Automatic page numbering can be modified in the same way To modify the page numbering change the Page number setting from Increment to Value and enter the desired number for the first pa
274. he object will snap to it Hint To enable or disable the display of the page boundary lines invoke the Extras gt Preferences command switch to the View property sheet and turn Page borders on or off 488 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Keyboard shortcuts The following pages provide a list of the most frequently used keyboard shortcuts available in TextMaker s standard keyboard mapping Hint If you want to customize TextMaker s keyboard shortcuts use the Extras gt Customize gt Keyboard Mappings command see section Customizing keyboard shortcuts beginning on page 478 Keyboard shortcuts for menu commands Command Keyboard shortcut File gt New Ctrl N Ctrl N File gt Open Ctrl O0 Ctrl O File gt Close File gt Save File gt File Manager File gt Print File gt Exit Edit gt Undo Edit gt Redo Edit gt Cut Edit gt Copy Edit gt Paste Edit gt Paste Special Edit gt Select All Edit gt Search Edit gt Replace Ctrl F4 Ctri F4 or Crr w Ctri W Ctrl S Ctrl S F12 F12 Ctrl P CtrI P Alty F4 Alt F4 or Cul Q Ctri Q Ctrl Z Ctr Z Cerl yyCtri Ctrl xyCtrl X Crrl CCt C Crl v Ctrl V Ctrl Shift V Ctr Shift V Crrl A CtH A Ctrl F Ctrl F Ctrl H Ctrl H Command Keyboard shortcut Edit gt Search Again or Replace Again Edit gt Go To Edit gt Evaluate Format gt Standard Character formattin
275. hical relationships To accomplish this you would proceed as follows 1 First create a character style called Headings1 for the highest level headings At this point select the special typeface you want specify 24 points for the size and enable bold 2 Next add a style called Headings2 select the Headings1 style in Based on and specify 18 points for the size 3 A character style called Headings3 based on Headings and with 14 point type can follow for the next lower level etc Benefit If it should occur to you later that a different font is better suited for the headings you can reformat all the headings with the styles Headings through Headings3 in this font merely by changing the font specification for the Headings character style If you had based the heading styles on normal you would have had to change the font specification for each style separately 120 e Styles User Manual TextMaker Relative font sizes When you base one style on another you can if you wish specify the font size in a relative manner For example you can specify that the font size for style X should always be 80 of the font size for style Y You can do this as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Character Style 2 Select a style and click on Edit 3 Switch to the Style property sheet 4 Enable the Scale option 5 Enter the desired factor as a percentage for example 80 6 Confi
276. hich you will by default use To set the default language do the following 1 Invoke the command Extras gt Preferences 2 Switch to the Language property sheet 3 Select your native language as the Default Language 4 Confirm with OK Once you have let TextMaker know which language you use to write your documents you can safely forget hyphenation It will work automatically in the background Formatting text segments in another language If you ever compose a document wholly or partly in a foreign language the Format gt Character command will be useful to you You can use it to format segments of text in another language When you format a segment of text in another language the spell checker thesaurus and hyphenator operate there according to the specified language Normally the whole document is formatted in the Default language so the default language specified in the Preferences is applied to it see above If the document contains a segment of foreign language text for example a citation in German that segment can be formatted in the appropriate language as follows 1 Select the segment that contains foreign language text 2 Invoke the command Format gt Character 3 Switch to the Font property sheet 4 Choose the desired language from the Language list 5 Confirm with OK Now when it comes to this segment of text the hyphenator will follow German language rules likewise the
277. htm TextMaker now creates the e mail message and routes it to your e mail program Document management TextMaker provides functions that simplify document management and speed up access to them m Quick paths In TextMaker you can use Quick paths to change very quickly to a folder that is frequently used to save or retrieve files Document summary Every document can have a document summary that you can display and edit using the Properties property sheet in the File gt Properties dialog You can specify the document s title subject and author enter keywords for the file manager s search function and compose a brief description of the document s contents E File manager The integrated file manager provides a convenient way to access your documents It allows you to see at a glance the names and summaries of your documents and to examine open print or delete them with the press of a key With the search function you can look for documents not only by filename but also by subject title author etc You will find detailed information on the following pages Quick paths With TextMaker you can define up to twenty quick paths and use them to change very quickly to specific folders where files will be opened or saved frequently A quick path is a symbolic statement like Letters to the IRS that stands for a specific folder on the hard disk for example the folder c letters IRS When you want to op
278. ick Close to close the dialog You can perform a number of similar operations with this command by selecting other options from the Go to list including those described in the following table Option Function Page jump to a given page as described above Chapter jump to a given chapter Bookmark jump to a given bookmark Footnote jump to a given footnote Footnote text jump to the footnote text for the given footnote Object jump to the selected object picture table etc Table of contents jump to the document s table of contents Index jump to the document s index etc Tip Using the buttons at the bottom of the vertical scrollbar You can also perform Go to operations with the three buttons in the lower right corner of the program window You use these buttons as follows Click on the button with the red dot icon to bring up a small menu Then select the type of Go to operation you want to perform from the menu m Click on the button with the up arrow icon to jump to the target prior to the current position For example if Page was selected as the target type clicking on this button will result in a jump to the previous page m Click on the button with the down arrow icon to jump to the target following the current position to the next page for example 146 e Searching and replacing User Manual TextMaker Fields You can insert various kinds of fields in the text using the Insert gt Field com
279. ile menu It can also be invoked with the key combination Ctrl S Ctri S It saves the document in the active window under its filename If the document should not yet have a name Untitled will be displayed in the title bar In this case TextMaker automatically asks you to supply a name before the save Saving under another name or in another place TextMaker has in addition the command File gt Save as This preserves your document too but you can first give it another name or select another folder in which to save it Saving in another file format With File gt Save as you can also save a document in another program s file format Choose the desired format from the Files of Type list see chapter Working with other file formats beginning on page 439 Saving all open documents If you have several document windows open at the same time you can use the command File gt Save all to have the documents in all windows saved TextMaker checks whether the documents have been altered since the last save and saves only those for which this is the case Exiting the application When you would like to exit TextMaker invoke File gt Exit If one of the open documents has been altered since it was last saved TextMaker automatically asks whether you would first like to save it 34 e Basics User Manual TextMaker The TextMaker Tour Welcome to the TextMaker Tour in which we will introduce you to TextMaker s mos
280. ill result in a prompt for a password You will be able to deactivate Forms mode only by entering the correct password Creating forms To create a form first lay out the document just as you would any normal document and insert forms objects at the places where something should be filled in later On the following pages we provide brief descriptions of the available forms objects An example is provided in the conclusion to this section Types of forms objects The following types of forms objects can be used in forms Forms object Description Text fields Text fields are intended for text entries such as name address etc The user who fills out the form can enter whatever text he or she likes in them Text frames Like text fields but confined within frames see below Checkboxes Checkboxes are appropriate for yes no entries If the user clicks on a checkbox a check mark is displayed in it If he clicks on it again the check mark is removed Checkbox frames Like checkboxes but confined within frames see below Dropdown lists When the user clicks on a dropdown list the list opens and he or she can select one of the predefined items in the list Manual entry of an item is not possible Dropdown list frames Like dropdown lists but confined within frames see below In addition to these types of objects there are two types of forms objects that cannot be filled out and are intended for caption
281. ill find information about the use of auto numbers in section Numbering with Auto numbers beginning on page 169 m Apply to Determines what parts of the document will be affected by the settings you make in this dialog Whole document the entire document This point forward that part of the document beginning at the current position of the text cursor and ending at the end of the document Selected text the selected text Current section the current section A section is a segment of text with a uniform number of columns see also the next section Selected sections all sections included in the current selection To end of section the segment of text beginning at the current position of the text cursor and ending at the end of the current section Line numbers property sheet The options on the Line numbers property sheet do not affect the column layout Rather they allow you to direct TextMaker to number the lines of your text and add the line numbers in the left margin You will find additional information about this in section Adding line numbers beginning on page 170 134 e Multi column page layouts User Manual TextMaker What are sections The term section has been used several times in this chapter But what are sections Simply put a section is a segment of text that has a uniform columnar layout An example you have selected a segment of text in the middle of a single column document a
282. incorrect the month has only one place 3 The year can be given as a two or four place number as you prefer Thus 07 20 06 and 07 20 2006 are equally valid 4 When you enter a year as a two place number between 0 and 29 TextMaker automatically prefixes 20 For years between 30 and 99 TextMaker prefixes 19 Thus the date 01 01 29 is interpreted as 1 1 2029 while 01 01 30 is interpreted as 1 1 1930 Database fields table cells and objects You can also use the contents of database fields table cells and objects in formulas You will find information about this in the sections Table cells in calculations Database fields in calculations and Objects in calculations beginning on page 345 Calculations A formula can contain various kinds of calculations Example 6 5 Always returns the constant value 30 and is in fact a constant value not a calculation Example 5 NUMBER In this formula the constant value 5 is multiplied by the value of the variable NUMBER If NUMBER has the value of 10 the formula gives 50 Beyond that TextMaker puts a number of computational functions at your disposal Detailed descriptions of all the functions follow at the end of this chapter to start with here are a few examples Example TODAY The function TODAY returns the current date For example on September 16 2006 it would return 09 16 06 Example MONTH TODAY Here one function is applie
283. ing Labels Labels can contain any captions or legends that should appear in the form Groupboxes Groupboxes are rectangles to which captions are added at the upper left They can be used for the visual grouping of related parts of a form Of course forms are not limited to containing just the above described forms objects They can also contain all other types of objects as well as normal text You will find detailed information about the individual types of forms objects in the section Text fields and in following sections of this chapter beginning on page 267 With or without frames As you might have noticed you can insert most types of forms objects with or without frames m Text fields and text frames m Checkboxes and checkbox frames E Dropdown lists and dropdown list frames The difference between normal objects and object frames Normal Objects e g dropdown lists are inserted directly into the text They are integrated into the text flow just like a letter Such objects are simpler to manipulate and therefore the best choice for most kinds of forms Objects in frames e g dropdown list frames on the other hand are freely positionable on the page They can always be moved with the mouse but once positioned they remain fixed in place on the page even when text lines are added or deleted above them Inserting forms objects To insert a forms object into the text do the following 1 Invoke the Obje
284. ing between selected records With the commands Go to gt Previous selected record and Go to gt Next selected record you can jump to the previous or next selected data record Alternatively you can use the icons Yy and in the toolbar or the keyboard shortcuts Ctrl Alt PgUp2 Ctr Alt PgUp and Ctrl Aly PgDn 4 Ctr1 Alt PgDn to do this Tip Furthermore with View gt Show only selected records you can hide all data records that are not selected Selecting single records manually With the command Select gt Current record keyboard shortcut Ctrl s Ctrl S you select or deselect the current data record If you invoke this command when the current record is not selected it is selected If you invoke the command when the current record is already selected the record is excluded from the selection Tip In list view data records can also be selected or deselected by clicking with the mouse to check or uncheck the checkbox to the left of the data record With the commands Select gt Select all records and Select gt Deselect all records you can select and deselect all the records in the data base at once Display in the status toolbar The status toolbar at the bottom of the window also shows whether a data record is selected or not the word Selected appears here for a selected data record Selecting by record numbers The data record number record number for short is the number representing
285. ing pages will teach you everything there is to know about working with selections Selecting text Before you execute a TextMaker command you can in many cases select a segment of text or an object to which you want the command to apply The command is then performed only on the selected text or object You can make a selection with the mouse stylus or keyboard Using the mouse for selection You make selections with the mouse as follows E Selecting text segments To select a text segment of any length position the mouse cursor at the beginning of the segment press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor to the end of the segment To select a word double click on the word To select an entire line click in the left margin beside the line You can select multiple lines by dragging beside them in the left margin To select a whole paragraph double click in the left margin beside the paragraph m Canceling a selection When you want to cancel a selection simply click anywhere in the document outside the selection E Selecting objects To select an object picture drawing etc simply click on it with the mouse A red frame appears around the object to indicate that it is selected Using the stylus for selection Selection works the same way with a stylus as it does with a mouse see above Using the keyboard for selection You make selections with the keyboard as follows E Selecting text seg
286. ing their contents in the next section Deleting and inserting cell contents In the previous section you learned how to delete copy or move the contents of table cells This section describes how you can completely remove cells from a table and insert additional cells into a table Deleting cells from a table To completely remove cells including their contents from a table do the following 1 Select the cells to be deleted 2 Invoke the command Table gt Delete Cells The cells are immediately removed Deleting a complete table Note To delete a complete table first select the entire table You can use the Table gt Select gt Table command to do this Then invoke the Table gt Delete Cells command Don t just press the Del Del key because this only deletes the contents of the table cells not the table cells themselves 176 e Tables User Manual TextMaker Inserting cells in a table Tip You can add a new row of cells at the bottom of a table simply by pressing the Tab Tab key when the text cursor is in the last cell TextMaker then automatically extends the table by adding a new row In general you can insert new cells into a table by doing the following 1 Position the text cursor in the cell before which the new cells are to be inserted 2 Invoke the Table gt Insert Cells command 3 In certain cases a dialog appears to allow you to specify the way the new cells are to be ins
287. ing tool used Accordingly all the available types of drawing objects are listed below together with tips for manipulating them Lines The Z Line tool allows you to draw a straight line To use this tool simply press down the mouse button and draw a line in the document Tip When you hold down the Shift key Shift while drawing the direction of the line is variable only in increments of 45 degrees Freeforms scribbles The w Freeform tool allows you to draw irregular curves as you would be able to do by hand with a pencil To use this tool move the mouse to the desired starting point press the mouse button and begin drawing just as you would with a pencil You can also create a straight line in Freeform mode To do this press and release the left mouse button and straight line is drawn from the point on the screen at which you clicked to the current position of the mouse cursor Clicking the left mouse button again sets the line on the page When you draw a curve that returns to its starting point the drawing is automatically ended and converted into a closed curve If you want to obtain an open curve you must end the drawing with a double click at the desired end point Curves The A Curve tool allows you to draw Bezier curves so called in honor of the French engineer who developed the underlying mathematical techniques To use this tool click on the starting point and then on as many additional points as you
288. ing up a dialog box where you can change the picture s properties see also the next section Switch to the dialog s Format property sheet and enter the desired measurements in the Size group box Changing picture properties The Object gt Properties command gives you access to a dialog where all the properties of an object can be edited An object s properties include for example its size and margins along with numerous other properties that you can set To edit the properties of a picture first select the picture with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to bring up the appropriate dialog Tip You can also bring up this dialog by double clicking on the picture In this dialog you can make the following settings Layout Format Filling Lines Shadow and Properties property sheets The first six property sheets are present for almost all kinds of objects They contain the following options m Layout On this property sheet the only settings that apply to pictures are those for outside margins The other options are available only for picture frames See section Object properties Layout property sheet beginning on page 223 m Format Here you can change the size of the picture See section Object properties Format property sheet beginning on page 228 m Filling Here you can change the filling of the picture However the filling is visible only when the picture has
289. ion Thus the tab stop determines where the middle of the text falls Decimal For formatting columns of numbers The numbers are positioned in such a way that their decimal separators are vertically aligned To change the alignment of an existing tab stop invoke Format gt Tabs Select one of the tab stops that has been set change its alignment by selecting a new alignment from the Alignment list and click on Set Tab leaders The space that a tab skips over can be filled with a leader character if desired None A tab without a leader Solid A tab with underscores as leaders Dashed A tab with dashes as leaders DoOts sceseesseee A tab with dots as leaders used frequently in tables of contents and indices To provide an existing tab stop with a leader invoke Format gt Tabs Select one of the tab stops that has been set choose the desired leader from the Tab leader list and click on Set Deleting and moving tabs Tab stops can be modified at any time after they have been defined Select the paragraphs whose tab stops are to be edited and invoke Format gt Tabs Select one of the tab stops that is already set from the Tabs list You can remove it with the Clear button The Clear all button removes all the tab stops in the selected paragraphs It is not possible to move a tab stop to a new position with the Format gt Tabs command You can only can clear the tab stop and then set a new one at the desired
290. ion the guidelines are no longer displayed but retain their function E Page borders Here you specify whether or not page borders should be indicated in the document window with dotted grey lines These lines serve merely as visual aides while you are working on the screen They are not printed By default this option is enabled Horizontal ruler Here you can enable or disable the horizontal ruler The horizontal ruler is displayed above the text It shows the current paragraph formatting and it also provides a means of changing indents and tab stops with the mouse see chapter Paragraph formatting beginning on page 73 By default this ruler is enabled E Vertical ruler Here you can enable or disable the vertical ruler The vertical ruler is displayed to the left of the text It serves merely to provide information and not for formatting changes By default this ruler is disabled Wrap text to window When this option is enabled lines of text are always wrapped at the right border of the document window regardless of their actual lengths The actual layout of the document is thereby ignored but the text becomes more legible on small displays on Pocket PCs for example which might otherwise require you to scroll constantly to the right and left in order to read a text Note Activating this option only affects continuous view View gt Continuous If the document is viewed in normal view View gt Standard
291. ioned 3 in below the top edge of the page E Wrap Margins group box Here you can change the object s outside margins Tip The outside margins can also be changed by dragging the outer dashed lines that appear around the object when it is selected m Text Wrapping group box The options in this group box are available only for frames and drawings With these options you can specify how the body text surrounding the frame or drawing should behave Available options from left to right Option Meaning Line The body text is broken above the frame and continued below it Square The body text flows around the rectangular borders of the frame This is the default setting Contour The body text flows around the object contained within the frame following the object s contours as closely as possible so called contour wrap This works only with drawings Behind text The body text flows right through the frame and appears to lie behind the object in the frame In front of text The body text flows right through the frame and appears to lie above of the object in the frame Contour group box This group box is available only for frames and drawings When you have selected either the Square or the Contour option for Text wrapping you can specify here the side s of the frame around which the text should wrap The available options are from left to right Option Meaning 226 e Frames and drawings User Ma
292. ipt to be the same size as adjoining normal text you can specify 100 percent Tip Keyboard shortcuts are available for super and subscripts as follows Ctrl Shift Num Ctri Shift Num Plus key on the numeric pad for superscript Ctrl Shift Num Ctr1 Shift Num for subscript and Ctrl Shift Num Ctri Shift Num to remove a super or subscript Spacing and pitch With TextMaker you can also change the spacing and pitch of text Spacing is the horizontal distance between characters Giving a value smaller than 100 causes the characters to appear closer together than normal giving a value larger than 100 causes the characters to appear farther apart If you change the pitch the width of the characters themselves rather than the spacing between them is changed thus the shapes of the characters are changed To change these settings invoke Format gt Character switch to the Spacing property sheet and enter the desired value at Spacing between characters or Character pitch Note that the pitches of characters belonging to printer fonts usually cannot be changed Transferring formatting With the command Format gt Transfer Formatting you can quickly apply a character s format typeface size styles etc to other characters To do so proceed as follows 1 Select the character whose format is to be transferred You can also select multiple characters they should however be formatted in
293. is an unknown word Click on this word with the right mouse button to open the context menu 4 Select the Create SmartText Entry command from the context menu 5 Type Thank you for your inquiry 6 Confirm with OK The result is the same the SmartText entry ti has now been created If you want to learn more about the background spell checker see section Background spell checking beginning on page 286 C Using the on the fly spell checker If you prefer using the on the fly spell checker you can also create SmartText entries as described below 1 Make sure that the Check spelling as you type option on the Language property sheet in the Extras gt Preferences dialog box is checked 2 Type ti and press the space bar 3 The on the fly spell checker s dialog box opens since TextMaker does not know the word ti 4 Click on the SmartText button 5 Type Thank you for your inquiry 6 Confirm with OK The SmartText entry ti is now defined If you want to learn more about the on the fly spell checker see section Spell checking as you type beginning on page 285 Inserting SmartText entries You can now call out the SmartText entries you defined with the help of the previous section at any time This is as easy as can be Type the name of the SmartText entry ti in our example in the text and then press the space bar the Enter key or a punctuation cha
294. is called the color palette of the document You can modify this color palette at any time You can add new colors and modify colors you have added However the first 24 colors in the palette are default colors than cannot be changed Important Changes in the color palette are saved in the document Thus you can compose a special color palette for every document Adding a color To add a color the palette of the current document do the following 1 4 5 Invoke the command File gt Properties and and switch to the Colors property sheet Tip Alternatively you can gain access to this dialog from any other dialog box that contains a color list To do this select the Define color entry in the color list the last entry Set the desired color see the section Using the controls for setting colors below Click on the New button Give the new color whatever name you like and confirm with OK Exit the dialog with OK TextMaker now adds the new color to the document s color palette From now on it will be available in all dialog boxes that permit color selection Changing a color Note You can change only those colors that you have added The first 24 colors in the palette are default colors that cannot be changed To change a color do the following a 4 Invoke the command File gt Properties and switch to the Colors property sheet Or Alternatively select the
295. is function can also be invoked with the X icon on the Function toolbar Please note that the data record is not immediately deleted but only marked for deletion Deletion of all data records marked for deletion actually takes place when the database is compressed with the command Edit gt Compress database see below Deleting all selected data records With the command Edit gt Delete selected records you mark all currently selected records for deletion This is useful when you want to delete a large number of records Working with selections is described in section Selecting data records beginning on page 334 312 e Database User Manual TextMaker Show deleted records By default the option View gt Show deleted records is turned on meaning that even data records marked for deletion are viewable As a visual indication that a record is deleted the word Deleted appears in the status toolbar However you can deactivate the option View gt Show deleted records at any time to hide all records that are marked for deletion Restoring deleted data records If you have marked a data record for deletion by mistake simply apply the command Edit gt Delete current record to it a second time to remove the deletion marking The disappearance of the word Deleted in the status toolbar indicates the removal of the marking You can remove the deletion marking on all data records currently marked for deletion with the command Edi
296. is keyboard mapping are lost This function is applicable only to the pre defined keyboard mappings Standard and TextMaker Classic Tip You will find a table for the Standard keyboard mapping in section Keyboard shortcuts beginning on page 489 484 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Using the grid The grid is a positioning aide for frames and drawings When it is enabled objects cannot be shifted to arbitrary positions instead they snap from one intersection of the gridlines to the next Activating the Snap to grid function Normally the grid is disabled Accordingly you can move frames and drawings with complete freedom using the mouse To enable the grid do the following 1 Invoke Object gt Guides amp Grid 2 Switch to the Grid property sheet 3 Enable the Snap to grid option Now when you insert e g a new text frame or shift the position of an existing frame the object can no longer be positioned arbitrarily with the mouse rather it jumps from one point on the grid to the next Changing the grid distance By default the grid distance horizontally and vertically is set to 0 5 cm around 0 2 in However you can set it to any value you like Proceed as follows 1 Invoke the command Object gt Guides amp Grid 2 Switch to the Grid property sheet 3 Enter the desired values in the Grid distance group box Showing the grid on the screen By default the
297. is tolerance any time you like If you raise the tolerance to 20 for example the object will snap to the guide when it is at a distance of twenty or fewer pixels from the guide To change the tolerance invoke Object gt Guides amp Grid switch to the Guides property sheet and enter the desired value in pixels in the Tolerance field Moving and deleting guides To delete or reposition a guide proceed as follows Keyboard Invoke Object gt Guides amp Grid To remove a guide select it from the list and click the Delete button To reposition a guide delete it and then set a new guide at the desired position Mouse In Object mode guides can simply be grabbed with the mouse and dragged to new positions Also if you move a guide into the horizontal or vertical ruler the guide will be deleted Locking guides You can lock guides so that they cannot be moved accidentally with the mouse To do this invoke File gt Properties switch to the View property sheet and enable the Lock guides option in the Locking group box From this point on guides cannot be shifted with the mouse Their positions can be changed only in the dialog box of the Object gt Guides amp Grid command Activating the Snap to page margins function When you enable the Snap to page margins option the lines defining the document s page boundaries function as guidelines Accordingly if you drag an object to a position near one of these lines t
298. ist levels of 2 and above in hierarchical lists When this option is checked the numbering applied to a list item at the selected level will fully represent the item s hierarchical position This numbering will include the item s number in the sequence of items with which it is coordinate and the numbers of all the items to which it is subordinate Thus an item at list level 3 for example will have a numbering in the form 1 5 9 When the option is not checked the numbering will not include the numbers of any higher level items Thus the above example will not be numbered with 1 5 9 but just with 9 Don t restart the level Available only for list levels of 2 and above in hierarchical lists When this option is checked the numbering of list items at the selected list level is not reset to 1 whenever a list item at this level follows an item at a higher level item For example if you check this option for level 2 the result will be as illustrated below Option unchecked Option checked 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 3 As you can see in the Zast item of the above example the 2nd level is continued with 2 3 instead of being reset to 2 1 when this option is checked m Reset button If you should ever make a big mistake or completely change your mind while editing a numbered list you can press the Reset button to make a fresh start The Reset function returns all the options for all list leve
299. itects Design and Planning of Gonstruction Projects of all Sizes Escher amp Sons Architects 78 Baker Street Atlanta G4 30009 Fred Backfish 7 Shepard s Way Salmon River Oregon 77123 Your erence Your letter oft Our reference Our letter of Date MB 11 23 05 HG 11 25 05 Fields are very practical aids First you have already been spared the trouble of typing the current date manually and beyond that the Print date field is not merely a fixed value but a symbolic value that stands for the current date It is automatically updated when you print the document So if you print the practice letter tomorrow tomorrow s date will appear in the same place With the help of fields you can not only insert the date but also output the current page number of your text its filename and many other kinds of information Furthermore fields can be used to put in database fields from a database as is required for form letters Page footers Before you continue you can open the file Tour3 tmd if this document was included in your SoftMaker implementation It contains the example document as it should look at this stage of the exercise You can set up page headers and footers for every document headers will be printed at the top and footers at the bottom of every page 52 e The TextMaker Tour User Manual TextMaker For page footers you invoke the command Insert gt Footer Nothing much really happens the
300. ith TextMaker s database module m Opening a database First you will learn how to open a database The command Extras gt Edit Database is responsible for this mu Using the database module Next you will get acquainted with the large database module that is integrated only into the Windows Linux and Handheld PC version of TextMaker This module contains expanded database functions for selecting sorting and deleting records for example mu Using the database module Pocket PCs On Pocket PCs only a small database module with functions for editing and searching database records is integrated This section covers all details about this module Importing individual addresses into document templates Here you will learn how simple it can be to write everyday documents with TextMaker You invoke the command File gt New and choose one of the letter templates supplied with the program Now the database appears Simply choose the desired address click on Insert and TextMaker sets up a letterhead with the address filled in List and label generator It is almost as easy to create lists and labels Address labels for example you choose the paper format and place the database fields in the desired arrangement on the label template That s it printing can begin E Setting up new databases Although the database tmw dbf supplied with the program is all that many users need to manage their addresses Text
301. ive spellings are still allowed Example With this setting Waggon is not underlined even though the new primary spelling is Wagon and Waggon is permitted only as a secondary spelling Normal the old spelling is underlined when the new spelling is the preferred one With this setting TextMaker remains neutral The primary spelling is given preference This is the recommended setting Here all words with old spellings are underlined in blue if they have new spellings that are primary even though the old spellings are still allowed as secondary spellings Example Here Waggon would be underlined since Wagon is the new primary spelling On the other hand Creme would not be underlined because while Krem is now a secondary spelling Creme remains the primary spelling m Progressive the old spelling is underlined even if the new spelling is only an alternative With this setting words with old spellings are underlined in blue even when the new spellings are only equivalent alternatives or secondary spellings Example With this setting Creme would be underlined because there is a new spelling Krem even though Creme is still the primary spelling and Krem is only a secondary spelling 292 e Language tools User Manual TextMaker Respect upper and lowercase rules Independently of the correction method you can specify whether TextMaker
302. ively you can create lists whose elements are numbered rather than bulleted In this case the paragraphs are automatically numbered with 1 2 3 etc You will find information about this in chapter Automatic numbering beginning on page 155 Adding bullets To begin a bulleted list do the following 1 Invoke the command Format gt Bullets and Numbering 2 Switch to the Bullets amp Simple numbering property sheet 3 Select the Bullet option in the Type group box Bullets and Numbering xi Bullets amp Simple numbering Numbered lists p Type Numbering r Bullet Default oacana mH Changen Color Size Horizontal position o z in al Vertical position fo pt el cma 4 Select the kind of bullet you want by clicking on one of the bullets in the Bullet group box 5 Confirm with OK 86 e Paragraph formatting User Manual TextMaker 6 Now type your text At the end of the paragraph press the Enter key 1 to start a new paragraph TextMaker automatically indents the paragraph and adds a bullet Naturally you can also add bullets to paragraphs after they have been typed To do so select the text invoke the command introduced above and select a bullet Removing bullets To end a list or remove existing bullets proceed as follows 1 At the end of the last bulleted paragraph press the Enter key to start a new paragraph Or Select the bulleted
303. ives 9 the opposite of DTON which returns a date serial number NTOD converts such a date serial number n back to a date returns the result of raising the number n1 to the power of n2 POW 2 8 gives 256 returns the product of the values contained in the cells of a table in a rectangular region with coordinates n7 upper left corner and n2 lower right corner The coordinates must be preceded by signs Example PROD B2 C5 See also the section Table cells in calculations beginning on page 345 returns the last n characters of the text string t RIGHT TextMaker 5 gives Maker returns the number n rounded to n2 decimal places ROUND 2 44 1 gives 2 4 and ROUND 2 45 1 gives 2 5 returns text string t with any trailing space characters removed RTRIM Text gives Text returns the square root of the number n SQRT 4 gives 2 User Manual TextMaker STR n STRING t n SUBSTR t n1 n2 SUM n1 n2 TODAY TRIM TRUNC n1 n2 UPPER USER VAL YEAR d converts a number n to a text string STR 17 would produce the string 17 returns a text string consisting of n repetitions of the string t STRING Text 3 gives TextTextText returns a text string consisting of n2 characters extracted from string t beginning at position nl SUBSTR TextMaker 2 3 gives ext returns the sum of the values contained in the cells of a tab
304. izontal ruler When the horizontal ruler is visible View gt Horizontal Ruler checked it provides a convenient alternative for changing indents Indents are shown in the ruler as follows Change first line indent Change left indent Change right indent Change both first line and left indent together To change the indents first select the paragraph s you want to modify then click with the mouse on one of the triangles in the ruler see illustration above hold the mouse button down and drag it to the desired position When changing the Left indent be careful to catch hold of the correct triangle the lower triangle is the one that will affect this indent Likewise the upper triangle is only for the First line indent The rectangular slider under both triangles changes both the Left and First indents together Using the keyboard Indents can also be changed using the following keyboard shortcuts m Crm Ctri M Increase Left indent m Ctl Shif a Ctrl Shift M Decrease Left indent m Cel Cth T Increase hanging indent m Ctl Shif T Ctrl Shift T Decrease hanging indent Increases the Left indent while at the same times decreasing the First line indent As a result the first line of the paragraph keeps its position and only the other lines are indented Line spacing Line spacing is the distance between the lines of a paragraph To change the line spacing do the following 1 If multiple paragraphs are to
305. jects From left to right E Switch between Object mode and Edit mode Insert text frame Insert picture frame Insert OLE object frame Insert OLE object frame with the SoftMaker Equation Editor Insert line Insert freeform curve Insert Bezier curve Insert straight connector Insert elbow connector Insert curved connector Insert rectangle Insert rectangle with rounded corners Insert ellipse or circle Insert AutoShape Group selected objects Link selected text frames Edit the properties of the selected object Object list a list of all objects in the document see below Not all versions of TextMaker have this feature Tip When you move the mouse pointer over one of these icons its function is displayed in the status toolbar Object list The Object List appears at the far right on the toolbar It contains the names of all the objects in the current document There you can select any object by name Click on the list to open it and then select the desired object by clicking on its name The object will be selected immediately You can refer to the section on Changing the names of objects beginning on page 237 to learn why objects have names and how these names can be changed Selecting in Object mode In Object mode you can select any type of object simply by clicking on it with the mouse This is very useful especially for objects with transparent fills e g text frames In Edit mode an object of
306. k lines you might have inserted inadvertently with the Backspace key _ Next press the key to position the text cursor in the blank line above the text of the letter Now type the name and address of the person to whom the letter is to be sent Fred Backfish 7 Shepard s Way Salmon River Oregon 77123 Next insert additional blank lines by pressing the Enter key 1 eleven times to create a space between the address and the text of the letter We have now created the most important elements of a simple letter and at this point would like to save them Saving the practice letter Note You will find detailed information about this topic in the section Saving a document beginning on page 33 To save the current document use the Save command in the File menu From now on we will use File gt Save to represent this Invoke this command as follows Mouse Click on File in the menu bar The file menu opens and you can invoke the Save command with a mouse click Keyboard PC users can alternatively use the underlined letters in the menus to invoke the corresponding commands Type them while holding down the Alt key To save the file press Alt F Alt F for File and then S S for Save Perhaps while using the menu you may have noticed that Ctrl S is displayed to the right of the Save command This is the keyboard shortcut for this command This means you can also press C
307. ker immediately inserts the cross reference into the text Options The options in the dialog box for this command are as follows m Type Here you specify the kind of text element that the cross reference is to target a Bookmark a Footnote or an Object Target Here you select the target for the cross reference The contents of this list depend on the Type of target selected For example if you have selected Bookmark as the type all the existing bookmarks in the document will be displayed in this list Select the desired bookmark from the list with a mouse click Show Here you specify what the cross reference should show Page The cross reference shows the number of the page on which the target is to be found Number The cross reference shows the number of the target itself For footnotes the footnote s number is shown For bookmarks the number of the paragraph in which the bookmark has been set is shown For this to work properly the paragraph must have been given a numbering using the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command If the paragraph has not been numbered the cross reference will show a zero This option is not available for objects Editing and updating a cross reference Cross references are fields thus what goes for fields in general goes for cross references as well they can be formatted deleted copied and moved in the same way as normal text however their contents cannot be edited directly
308. kes the on line help function only in the Windows version of TextMaker Shift key The Shift key produces the uppercase form of a character as on a typewriter There are two of these keys labeled with on your keyboard and both work the same way Tip When you hold down a Shift key and press one of the arrow keys text is selected see also chapter Working with selections beginning on page 57 Ctrl Ctri Ctrl means Control Using the Ctrl key with abbreviations you can start the most often used commands much faster than you can with the menu For example Ctrl O Ctri O invokes the command Open in the File menu AIDAIt Alt like the Ctrl key is a modifier key that works only in combination with another key It is used to open the menus Thus the key combination Alt F Alt F for example opens the File menu Esc ESc The Escape key is a sort of emergency brake With this key you can abort functions Tab Tab The Tab key inserts a tab in the text Accordingly the text cursor moves to the next tab stop On most keyboards the Tab key is located to the left of the Q and is labeled with _y_ However Tab is used in this manual to designate it is the Enter key It takes the text cursor to the beginning of the next line Important You do not press this key at the end of every line of text as you would on a typewriter rather you use it only at the end of a paragraph or to enter b
309. l advantages m You no longer have to manually insert an Auto Number field at the beginning of each heading m Numbered lists are more flexible they provide more kinds of numberings and more formatting possibilities m Numbered lists can be conveniently modified even after they have been applied For example if you want to change the formatting of all the numberings all you have to do is edit the formatting of the numbered list the numberings of all the headings will immediately change accordingly Outlined documents and chapters Outlined documents often have page headers and footers in which the reader can find information such as the title of the current chapter Naturally TextMaker allows you to create such headers and footers The only requirement is that you divide the document into chapters which are permitted to have their own headers and footers To do this use Insert gt Breaks gt Chapter break to insert a so called chapter break before each new thematic section of the document normally that means before every major heading Now you can set up headers and footers with different contents for each chapter You can also make other settings relating to page formatting including even the paper format page margins etc on a chapter by chapter basis You will find detailed information about working with chapters in section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 109 374 e Working wit
310. l settings for footnotes To change these settings proceed as follows 396 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker Invoke the Insert gt Footnote gt Footnote command Click on the Options button Make the desired changes see below Confirm with OK to return to the Insert gt Footnote gt Footnote window If you want to apply your changes to the footnote options without inserting a new footnote click on Close On the other hand if you want to apply your changes and also insert a new footnote click on OK The dialog box contains two property sheets The Options property sheet which is selected by default contains the following items Position Normally the footnote texts are placed at the bottom margins of the pages on which they are referenced You can specify that they should be placed elsewhere by changing the setting of the Position option Bottom of page This is the default setting the footnote texts are placed at the end of the pages on which they are referenced End of chapter Select this option if you have used Insert gt Breaks gt Chapter break to divide your document into multiple chapters and you want the footnote texts referenced in each chapter to appear grouped together at the end of the chapter You will find information about the use of chapters in section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 109 End of document With this option you obtain what are call
311. lank lines Backspace __ This Backspace key is found above the Enter key on most keyboards With this key you can delete the character to the left of the text cursor f gt ete On PC keyboards to the left of the numeric pad you find a small pad with four arrow keys 2 4 J gt used to move the text cursor Above that are six additional keys used for editing Ins ns stands for the word Insert With this key you switch the insert mode on and off When insert mode is active any following text moves forward along with the text cursor as you write Otherwise the following text is overwritten You can see whether the insert mode is active by examining the status toolbar where either Ins insert mode or Ovr overwrite mode is displayed Del Del The Delete key deletes the character to the right of the text cursor If you selected something before pressing this key everything selected will be deleted Home End Home The direction key Home positions the text cursor at the beginning End of the active line and the End key at its end PgUp2 PgUp The direction keys PgUp 2 PgUp and PgDn 4 PgDn are for moving the cursor one page up or down respectively Using the mouse With the mouse you move the mouse cursor over the screen This cursor is normally in the form of an arrow If you move it over text it looks like a capital cl aa Whenever you move the mouse cursor to a screen
312. layed Note When you disable this option automatic spell checking is still in effect the wavy underlines are simply no longer visible Expand SmartText entries As described in section SmartTexts beginning on page 297 you can create SmartTexts entries e g wbg for with best regards with TextMaker When this option is enabled your SmartText entries can be expanded right in the text All you have to do is type the abbreviation for the SmartText entry e g wbg and then press the space bar Enter key or a punctuation key in order to signal TextMaker to replace the abbreviation with the content of the SmartText entry If this option is disabled SmartText entries can be called out only with the Insert gt SmartText command Preferences File property sheet The Files property sheet in the Extras gt Preferences dialog allows you to set preferences for opening and saving files Template folder Here you can specify the folder in which the templates for TextMaker documents are stored The dialog that appears when you invoke File gt New presents templates for your selection that are found in this folder Note Normally this setting should not be changed Change it only when you have actually moved the template folder to another place Default file format Here you can select the file format that TextMaker will use by default to save newly created documents The available choices are
313. le in a rectangular region with coordinates n upper left corner and n2 lower right corner The coordinates must be preceded by signs Example SUM B2 B5 See also the section Table cells in calculations beginning on page 345 returns today s date in the form MM DD YY the empty pair of parentheses following the function name must be entered returns the text string with all leading or trailing spaces removed TRIM Text gives Text returns the number n truncated to n2 decimal places TRUNC 1 2345 2 gives 1 23 converts the string to uppercase UPPER James gives JAMES returns the user name under which you are logged in to your computer The empty pair of parentheses after the function name must be entered converts the text string to a number The string may include non numeric characters In that case TextMaker takes the first occurrence of a number within the string to be the argument VAL 3 gives 3 VAL 3 eggs and VAL Can I have 3 eggs and 1 roll likewise give 3 However VAL eggs gives 0 since this string contains no number returns the year part of a date as a number with two places the formula YEAR 09 17 66 gives 66 Working with large documents TextMaker provides some useful aides for working with large documents m Large documents are often organized according to an outline that is to say a hierarchical structure of headings TextMak
314. le in the folder where the document resides and uses this copy instead of the original This option is available only after the document is initially saved Changing the properties of picture frames To edit the properties of a picture frame first select the frame with a mouse click Then invoke the Object gt Properties command to gain access to the command s dialog Tip You can also invoke this dialog by double clicking on the picture frame The settings that you can make in this dialog are described below Layout Format Filling Lines Shadow and Properties property sheets These property sheets are present for almost all types of objects The settings they allow you to make are summarized below m Layout On this property sheet you can change the position and outside margins of the frame and specify how the body text should flow around it See the section Object properties Layout property sheet beginning on page 223 m Format Here you can change the size of the frame See the section Object properties Format property sheet beginning on page 228 E Filling Here you can change the filling Applicable only for pictures that have transparent areas See the section Object properties Filling property sheet beginning on page 229 m Lines Here you can specify bordering lines See the section Object properties Lines beginning on page 230 m Shadow Here you can specify a shadow See the
315. le to use TextMaker s Outline view to perform these tasks TextMaker Tree4 tmd ioj x File Edit view Format Insert Object Table Extras Window Help laj x DoCElSealt 28 9 AmMmEEAAIA lS ttt DDr aji 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 AM Text Heading 1 z 1 The Love Life of Trees Dolor sit amet consectetuer adipiscing elit sed diam nomunnny nibh euismod tincidunt ut laoreet dolore magna quis nostrud exerci tation ullamcorper suscipit bbottis nisl ut aliquip ex ea commmodo consequat Duis autem ve molestie consequat vel ilhum dolore eu feugiat malla facilisis at vero eos et accumsan et sto odio dignissim q dolore te ugat rulla facilisi 1 1 In Spring o Velilhmdolore eu feugiat rulla facilisis at vero e105 et accumsan et msto odio dignissim qui blandit prae rulla facilisi 1 1 1 March o Loemipmmdobr sit amet consectetuer adipiscmg elit sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tmcidurt antem vel eum irine dolor in henderit in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat vel ilh m dolore ex odio dignissim qui blandit praesent luptatum zzril delent augue duis dobe te feugait mulla facilisi 1 41 2 April o Duis atem vel eum irme dolor in hendient in vulputate velit esse molestie consequat vel ilh m dol iusto odio dignissim qui blandit praesert luptatum zzril delenit augue duis dolore te feugait ralla fac 143 May o Lowmipsum dobr sit amet consectetuer adipiscmg elit sed diam nonummy nibh euismod tincidut 1 2 In Summer IS
316. lear any old search term in the Search for field by clicking on the Reset button 4 Click on the Format button 142 e Searching and replacing User Manual TextMaker 5 Select the kind of formatting for which you want to search character formatting paragraph formatting character style or paragraph style 6 In the new dialog box that appears specify the format s for which you want to search Then confirm with OK 7 Now you can start the search with the Search button To search for formatting and replace it with other formatting proceed as follows 1 Invoke Edit gt Replace 2 Using the Format button specify the formatting for which you want to search see above and confirm with OK 3 Click in the Replace with field 4 Again use the Format button to specify the formatting that is to replace the formatting specified above as the search term Again confirm with OK 5 Now you can start the search with the Search button When TextMaker finds an occurrence of the search term it displays the occurrence in the document window To continue searching click on the Search again button Alternatively if you want to replace the present occurrence of the formatting click on the Replace button If you click on Replace all TextMaker replaces the occurrence of the formatting it has just found and all subsequent occurrences that it finds in the text with the new formatting Tip You can use this function to replace for
317. lf with the Rename button 474 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker 1 Select the toolbar you want to rename with a mouse click 2 Click the Rename button 3 Type the new name and confirm with OK Note You can rename only toolbars that you have created yourself The standard toolbars Function toolbar Formatting toolbar etc cannot be renamed Resetting toolbars You can undo any changes you have made to one of the standard toolbars with the Reset button 1 Select the toolbar you want to reset with a mouse click 2 Click the Reset button Now the toolbar contains the standard icons as it did before you changed it In addition the default settings for Visible in mode and Position are restored Note This command is applicable only to the standard toolbars Function toolbar Formatting toolbar etc and not to user created toolbars Customizing the icons in a toolbar You can edit the icons on toolbars with the Edit button Information about this is given in the following section Customizing toolbar icons You can edit the icons on a toolbar whenever you wish More precisely you can add remove and reposition the icons and you can also insert and remove separator lines You do this as follows 1 Make sure that the toolbar to be edited is enabled If it is not invoke View gt Toolbars and enable it 2 Invoke the command Extras gt Customize gt Toolbars Alternatively you can invoke this comm
318. lied to the object To apply a shadow check the Use shadow option Then click on the desired shadow type in the Gallery If required you can specify the way the shadow will appear more precisely with the additional options The Shadow property sheet presents the following options m Use shadow Check this option to apply a shadow to the object E Color Allows you to set the color of the shadow m Transparency Here you can change the Transparency of the shadow Under Windows values between O no transparency and 100 full transparency are permitted If you set the value to 50 for example the shadow will have 50 transparency Under other operating systems only the option Semi transparent is available It sets the shadow to 50 transparency Scaling Here you can change the size of the shadow E Offset Here you can move the shadow m Perspective Here you can specify a rendering of the shadow in perspective Note A positive value for Horizon gives a shadow that appears in front of the object a negative value gives a shadow that lies behind it Gallery Here a number of pre defined types of shadows are presented The simplest way to create a shadow is to click in the Gallery on one of these pre defined types and then do any necessary fine tuning Object properties 3D property sheet Note This property sheet is available only for text frames and drawings On the 3D property sheet you can apply 3D effects to the obj
319. little arrows are displayed at their ends Outline level Long documents manuals for example are usually organized and composed on the basis of outlines TextMaker provides an Outline view for setting up and editing a document s outline Here you can assign normal text to headers and promote or demote existing headers to different levels in the outline 94 e Paragraph formatting User Manual TextMaker Note Normally you should not change a header s outline level manually with the Format gt Paragraph command it is preferable to perform this action using the buttons in the Outline view If you should have occasion to change the outline level manually you can enter the desired level in the Outline level edit box that appears on the dialog box of the Format gt Paragraph command You will find detailed information about working with outlines in section Outlines beginning on page 363 Forcing breaks before paragraphs You can direct TextMaker to always insert a page or column break before the current paragraph To do so invoke Format gt Paragraph and enable the Page break or Column break option From this point on TextMaker will always break the page or column before this paragraph even if the paragraph is moved to another position in the text Paragraph control The Spacing group box in the dialog box for Format gt Paragraph provides options for limiting the way that automatic pagination i
320. ll the same you ought to read what follows in case you have never before worked with a word processor With a typewriter you press the Enter key at the end of every line You should not do this with a word processor If a word you type won t fit on the current line TextMaker will transfer it to the next line automatically You should press the Enter key only in the following cases E To end a paragraph m To enter blank lines So while inside a paragraph simply let TextMaker take care of making correct line breaks Moving the text cursor While editing text you always see a blinking line This is the so called text cursor When you type something the letters always appear where this text cursor is positioned You can move the text cursor anywhere between the beginning and the end of the text The direction keys are provided for this purpose The arrow keys and 2 for example move the text cursor one character to the left and right respectively Altogether the following direction keys are available for moving the text cursor Key Function One character to the left 4 gt One character to the right CAN One line up L One line down Home Home To the beginning of the line End End To the end of the line CDe Ctr T To the beginning of the current paragraph or when pressed again the previous paragraph Cer 4 Ctr 1 To the next paragraph Ctrl Home Ctri Home To the beginni
321. locked This prevents users from changing those parts of the form that shouldn t be changed In this chapter you will learn how to work with forms E Filling out forms The first section explains how a prepared form is filled out E Creating forms In the following section you will learn everything you need to know to be able to create your own forms To create a form you insert forms objects at all the places where something is to be filled in later for example text fields and text frames for text entries checkboxes for items to be checked off and dropdown lists for selections from among several given options Forms objects In this section the available types of forms objects are described in detail m Forms advanced functions In the last section you will get acquainted with some functions for advanced users functions for changing the tab order for protecting forms from being changed and for performing calculations Filling out forms First we will apply ourselves to the filling out of prepared forms The creation of forms will be described thereafter in the section Creating forms beginning on page 261 Forms differ from other documents only in one respect they contain forms objects at the places where something is to be filled out 258 e Forms User Manual TextMaker T Form2 tmd B Ei EEEE Li ii a tan sNeoene e dise M a text field i Name Jessica Lange Address 42 Faraday Ave City Mo
322. log The two options that are presented in the above described dialog box have the following functions E Save with document If this option is checked TextMaker saves a copy of the picture in the document and uses this copy instead of the original Otherwise TextMaker saves only a reference to the original picture file in the document mu Copy to document s folder If this option is checked TextMaker creates a copy of the picture file in the folder in which the document itself resides and uses this copy instead of the original This option is available only when the document has already been saved before since TextMaker does not yet know in which folder the document will be stored 196 e Pictures User Manual TextMaker Inserting a picture from the clipboard You can also insert a picture that you have created with a graphics program of your choice once you have copied it from that program into the clipboard To do this proceed as follows 1 In your graphics program either open an existing picture or create a new one 2 Copy the picture into the clipboard with the program s Edit gt Copy command Note In some graphics programs you must select the picture first 3 Switch to TextMaker 4 Move the text cursor to the position in the document where you want to insert the picture 5 Insert the picture in the text with Edit gt Paste When a picture is inserted into the text in this manner it is saved in
323. log box like the one described above then appears Here you can edit the target of the link To remove a link proceed as follows m Removing a link by deleting the link text When you delete text that has been formatted as a link the link is removed with the text m Removing only the link If you want to remove only the link and leave the text in place select the text and invoke Format gt Remove Link Saving HTML documents To save a document in HTML format proceed as follows 1 Invoke the command File gt Save as 2 Choose the HTML format from the Save as Type list 3 Enter the filename under which the file is to be saved and confirm with OK The document is now saved in HTML format Tip After saving the document open it with your web browser to check its appearance 420 e Internet functions User Manual TextMaker In this chapter you will find detailed information about printing and e mailing documents using TextMaker The chapter contains the following sections m Printing a document The first section covers the use of the File gt Print command to send a document to the printer Printing a form letter You can print form letters which are documents that are to be sent to several addressees with the command File gt Print Merge m Sending a document by e mail When you would like to send a document by e mail you can use the command File gt Send gt E mail Detailed expla
324. ls to their original settings The remaining options in this dialog allow you the change the way the numbered list will look Note As mentioned above each level of a hierarchical list can have its own settings So before setting any of these options be sure to first select the level that you want to modify in the Level field Options for bullets If you have selected the Bullet option in the Type group box the following options appear in the dialog Bullet group box Here you can select the bullet you want to use The Default row contains pre defined bullets from which you can choose while the Custom row contains user defined bullets If you click on one of the bullets in the Custom row and then click on the Change button at the end of that row you can select any symbol to be used as a bullet m Color default bullets only You can select a color for the bullet from the dropdown Color list If the pre defined colors presented in the list don t suit you you can always define new colors see section Document properties Colors property sheet beginning on page 463 164 e Automatic numbering User Manual TextMaker Tip If you set the color to Auto TextMaker automatically uses the font color assigned to the paragraph at the right of the bullet m Size default bullets only Here you can change the size in points of the bullet Tip When you select the Auto option TextMaker automatically uses the fon
325. ls visible again The Outline view is suitable not only for viewing but also for editing the document s structure You can use the Outline toolbar for this purpose too with the help of the arrow buttons you can raise or lower the outline levels of headings or promote paragraphs of normal text to headings Numbered headings Headings are often numbered TextMaker can take care of this numbering for you automatically You can read about this in section Numbering headings beginning on page 371 Using the Outline view As mentioned in the introduction TextMaker puts at your disposal a special display mode for editing a document s outline the Outline view To switch to Outline view invoke the View gt Outline command You can return from Outline view to the normal view any time you wish with View gt Standard In Outline view you see the document as a structure whose parts are organized according to major and minor headings First level headings major headings are aligned flush left Each lower level heading is indented to the right by an amount corresponding to its level In the following sections you will learn all about what you can do in Outline view Changing the outline levels of paragraphs To give a document an outline or to edit an existing outline switch to Outline view and there simply change the outline levels of the paragraphs that contain headings By default when you enter text into a document the
326. lt hh a e A GBSQalal vo viilivyiBs U R Normal Times New Roman Set paragraph to flush justified mamm Set paragraph to flush justified L 1Col1 Section 1 Chapter 1 Page 1of1 Ins TextMaker s program window Note The illustrations in this manual were prepared for the most part with the Windows version of TextMaker On other operating systems some of the controls have a slightly different appearance but their modes of operation are identical Title bar At the bottom of the window you will find the title bar I Untitled 1 TextMaker IE 1Col1 Section 1 Chapter 1 Page 1 of 1 all Ins The title bar shows the name of the program Once a document is opened its name will be shown after the program name Menu bar The menu bar is found under the title bar File Edit view Format Insert Object Table Extras Window Help It contains all of TextMaker s commands in the form of clearly arranged menus Click on a menu item to open a menu and invoke a command Toolbar The toolbar is shown underneath the menu bar This contains icons for TextMaker s most commonly used commands a R OC 4 M ESQQAAY bel TH The Standard toolbar beds Toolbars like the Standard toolbar above make possible lightning fast access to a program s functions Each icon stands for a specific command If you click on it the cor
327. mand Fields are symbolic representations for the specific values or contents that are assigned to them depending on their types and placement in the text The Print date field for example stands for the current date the Page number field stands for the current page number etc The available fields even encompass fields from a database that are needed for form letters Whenever a document is opened or printed the contents of all its fields are updated automatically Thus if a document containing the Print date field were reprinted tomorrow tomorrow s date would appear automatically in the document wherever the Print date field had been inserted If required field contents can be updated manually at any time with the Extras gt Update Fields command keyboard shortcut F9 F9 Fields can be formatted deleted copied and moved like normal text however their contents cannot be edited directly Inserting a field To insert a field in the text move the text cursor to the desired position and invoke the Insert gt Field command Insert Field Eg Field type Date last changed Time last changed Roman uppercase Roman lowercase Close Select the type of field to be inserted from the Field type list If you wish you can also specify the field s subtype or form of representation by clicking on it in the Data list you can for example specify whether a page number should
328. matical formulas you will find it in the Equation Editor s online help The structure of a formula Formulas may contain up to 255 characters Results are limited to 100 characters You can construct formulas from the following components Constant values A formula presents itself in its simplest form as a constant value as in the following examples E Text strings Example Good morning A formula with this content always gives the text string Good morning A text string is a sequence of characters letters numbers or other characters Text strings may be up to 100 characters long Important When you enter a constant text string e g Good morning directly into a formula you must enclose it in double quotation marks Otherwise TextMaker will try to interpret it as the name of a function or variable Numerical values Example 42 50 Of course a constant value can also be a numerical value i e a number This formula always returns the number 42 5 E Date entries Example 07 20 06 This formula represents the date 7 20 2006 The format of date entries When entering constant dates in a formula please note the following 1 When you enter constant dates in formulas you must enclose them in double quotation marks 354 e Calculations in the text User Manual TextMaker 2 The month and day must always be given as two place numbers Thus 07 20 06 is correct while 7 20 06 is
329. matically selects the most appropriate format when it inserts the content of the clipboard into your document in response to an Edit gt Paste command However if you need to you can select the format in which the content is to be inserted yourself You use the Edit gt Paste Special command to do this When you invoke this command a dialog box appears and presents you with a list of all the formats in which the information currently residing in the clipboard is saved When you select a format and then confirm with OK the content of the clipboard is inserted in the selected format Inserting a document With the Insert gt Document command you can insert a complete TextMaker document into the current document To do this proceed as follows 1 Move the text cursor to the position in the current document at which the other document is to be inserted 2 Invoke the command Insert gt Document 3 A dialog box opens and allows you to select the document to be inserted 4 After making your selection confirm with OK The selected document is inserted Note The Insert gt Document command only works in body text it is not available within text frames Character formatting With the help of the Format gt Character command you can change the appearance of one or more characters in the text The term character refers to any letter numeral or punctuation sign Font Spacing Hyperlink i T
330. men eerren E eevee 61 Character formatting 63 Typetace and font Size einate aa n anrea aaae ae aaier Aaa teviaiens 64 BEEE E E A E E EAEL EEEE ER 65 HE Eee S NEET EE EE EANET EE EPEA EEEE 67 Superscripts and subscripts ccceceeeeceee eect eeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeeeaeeteeeees 67 SPACING ANG PITCH siseseid egte aanta ebana beskuctetierivelecevteeevediens 68 Transferring fornmattiNhg ssie dee aa dees feavdececechanceevechbeteeceeieevesiens 68 MANO TEX eet aee e AEE E E ESES 69 ProteCting Tex E ieh eR r eK ONEEN ese lace EEGEN eSEE 70 Undoing character formatting 0 ccccccecceceee cesses eeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeneneeees 71 Paragraph formatting 73 WQS MS secede n aera a peste eee ede ee ed ak ceeded 74 LING SPACING s cse2ii kids Ah a ae el ae ela 76 Spacing before after ceeccceccceescecseeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeesnees 78 Paragraph aliQnment caesis niini E ie 78 Fyphenatione essesi a N nie iaiia 79 Characters ireti nail de a ee eee 82 TabSitvcicen ei ae ee et A ee A 82 USING taDS onenn Atel ae es ee n 82 Tab alignment sceccvectiecc etaceet els dee A evisu devev dete iei 83 Tabsleadersiz 2 nani adasa oti ae bee a ale 84 Deleting ANd MOVING tAbOS ee cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeees 84 Using the horizontal ruler ec ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeees 85 Bulleted lists onni e i ee dete 85 Drop caps aruana eee SL eaten deed de ee 89 Elaf Tol aa 6 Sara shee lcecead A AAA A A o 90 Bord
331. ment that affects the brightness 248 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker Drawings TextMaker offers several tools for creating drawings You can insert the following types of drawing objects into your document E Lines Freeforms scribbles as drawn by hand Curves Connectors for linking objects as in flowcharts Rectangles and ellipses AutoShapes various types of ready to use shapes Drawings behave like frames they always remain at the same place on the page even when you delete or insert lines of text above them The normal body text is automatically formatted in such a way that it breaks at the boundaries of the objects it flows around the drawing More detailed information about working with drawings is given on the following pages Inserting drawings To insert a drawing first select the desired drawing tool and then produce the object To draw a rectangle for example do the following 1 Invoke the Object gt New Drawing command A submenu opens From the submenu select a drawing tool in this case the Rectangle tool If you have activated Object mode you have the alternative of clicking on the corresponding icon in the Object toolbar REBEEI Aver FSOOOPA S S O I z 2 With the mouse draw a rectangle of the desired size and the desired position in the document The rectangle is immediately inserted The method of producing a drawing object varies according to the draw
332. ment will be shown just below the entry field You should press the Backspace key __ to delete your shortcut and try a different shortcut Otherwise you will overwrite the existing assignment for the shortcut Two part shortcuts You can also use two part shortcuts in accordance with the WordStar standard for example Ctrl K x Ctril K X However in this case only shortcuts of the form Ctrl letter letter are allowed Removing a keyboard shortcut Any time after assigning a shortcut to a command you can undo your actions and remove the assignment To do this proceed as follows 1 Invoke as described above the Edit Keyboard Mapping dialog 2 Select the command category from the Group list and then select the desired command from the Command list 3 All the shortcuts currently assigned to this command appear in the Current shortcut keys field Select the shortcut you want to remove and click on the Remove button 4 Confirm with OK and exit the main dialog box with Close The shortcut is now removed from now on the command cannot be invoked with this shortcut anymore Resetting the shortcuts in a keyboard mapping If you click on the Reset button in the dialog box of the Extras gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings command all the shortcuts of the selected keyboard mapping will be reset to their default settings Note In this process all the modifications that you have made to the shortcuts in th
333. ments Move the text cursor caret to the beginning of the text segment you want to mark Press the Shift key Shift hold it down and move the cursor in any direction with the arrow keys You can select as little as a single character with Shift 2 Shift lt or Shif 2 Shift and as much as whole pages with Shift PgUp2 Shift PUP or Shift PgDn 4 Shift PgDn To select the entire document press the key combination Ctrl Home Ctrl Home followed by the key combination Ctrl Shift End Ctrl Shift End or invoke the command Edit gt Select All m Canceling the selection When you want to cancel a selection simply press any arrow key mu Selecting objects Objects can be selected only with the mouse or stylus see above 58 e Working with selections User Manual TextMaker Moving deleting and copying All the operating systems that TextMaker supports have an extremely useful feature the clipboard The clipboard works like this when you select something in the document and then cut or copy it your selection goes into the clipboard The clipboard holds the selection temporarily so that it is available for reinsertion anywhere in the document In this way the clipboard facilitates the deletion copying and moving of text segments as well as objects All the required commands are found in the Edit menu Delete If you select a text segment or object and invoke Edit gt Delete the segment or objec
334. mple to insert a picture invoke the Object gt New Picture Frame command to be able to insert text first insert a text frame with Object gt New Text Frame etc 3 When you are finished invoke View gt Standard to exit the master page view If later on you want to edit the content of the master page simply invoke View gt Master Pages again Objects that you insert on the master page appear on all pages of the document Different master pages in the same document By default the master page applies to the whole document If you want to use different master pages within a single document the document must be divided into chapters for each chapter has its own master page You can read more about this in section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 109 Headers and footers Both the header and the footer are parts of a master page Apart from the fact that they are automatically positioned respectively in the top and bottom margins they behave in principle like other text frames inserted on a master page Locking master page objects in normal view Optionally objects that have been inserted on a master page can be locked to prevent them from being moved accidentally with the mouse when the document is being edited in normal view To lock such objects invoke the File gt Properties command and switch to the View property sheet Check the Lock objects on master page option in the Locking group box
335. mple letter from Escher amp Sons Architects Simple but by no means less than professional quality At the end of this tour you will have composed a full fledged business letter complete with all the bells and whistles At this point you might say This will be a lot easier if I invoke the command File gt New and select one of the prepared letter templates Naturally but you won t learn anything that way If you are going to participate in this tour you have to invest a little time but afterwards you will be in command of the program s most important functions and can immediately start adapting the templates to your needs So let s get started First type something resembling the example text that follows You don t have to copy it exactly you can enter whatever text you please the content doesn t matter Important Press the Enter key only at the indicated places When using a word processor you don t press this key at the end of every line as you would on a typewriter Rather you press it only at the end of a paragraph or to insert blank lines Dear Clients 4 This year we have been building more than usual not just for you but also for ourselves The new Escher Complex one of the most daring building projects in town will become our new home We cordially invite you to the opening ceremony The celebration will take place next Saturday at 38 42 Linden St
336. n The dialog box for File gt New A window appears in which you can select the document template for the new document Tip Next to the standard template Normal tmv you will see some folders that can be opened with a double click These folders contain prepared document templates for letters etc All you have to do is fill them in You will find information about them in chapter Document templates beginning on page 126 If you simply want to begin a new document and don t want to concern yourself further at the moment with document templates just choose the standard template Normal tmv As soon as you confirm with OK the new document will be set up New window If the New window checkbox in this command s dialog is turned on a new document will appear in a new document window Otherwise the document already in the active window will be closed and the new document will be opened in its stead 30 e Basics User Manual TextMaker Opening a document To open an existing document invoke the command Open in the File menu or press Ctrl o Ctr1 O A dialog box appears that can look for example as follows S Documents and Settings EEA LanSchool Files mikis 3 My Documents Dictionaries G Inspiration Docs SoftMaker Business Card Fax Letter Memo Misc PlanMaker Settings lt r File n
337. n Numbered lists beginning on page 160 Using user defined bullets If the bullets presented in the above described dialog don t suit you you can always use some other symbol as a bullet Recall that the dialog box for this command presents two rows of bullet icons The bullets in the Default row cannot be modified The bullets in the Custom row on the contrary can be swapped at will Proceed as follows 1 In the Custom row click on the icon that you want to change 2 Click on the Change button to the right of the row 3 TextMaker s character table now appears First set the Font that you want to use Tip for Windows users The Symbol and Wingdings fonts contain numerous characters that are suitable for bullets 4 Double click on a character to select it 5 The selected character now appears in the row of available Custom bullets Click on OK to apply it Note Although only six user defined bullets are shown in the dialog box you are not limited to using only six different bullets The custom bullets can be redefined as often as you like even within the same document Drop caps A drop cap refers to a large ornamental letter at the beginning of a paragraph TextMaker is capable of creating such an ornamental letter automatically from the first letter of a paragraph and of automatically adjusting the following paragraph text so that it flows smoothly around this first letter Note Drop caps
338. n Object properties Filling property sheet beginning on page 229 m Lines Here you can specify bordering lines See the section Object properties Lines beginning on page 230 m Shadow Here you can specify a shadow See the section Object properties Shadow beginning on page 231 m 3D Here you can specify a 3D effect See the section Object properties 3D property sheet beginning on page 232 m Properties Here you can change general properties See the section Object properties Properties property sheet beginning on page 234 For text frames there are two additional property sheets with further options Inner text property sheet On this property sheet you can change settings that control the text contained in the frame Inner margins group box Here you can change the margins between the text frame and the text contained in it If you check the Automatic option the program automatically determines appropriate margins m Overlapping objects group box These settings determine what happens when the text frame overlaps another text frame With the default setting Ignore object TextMaker does nothing Thus in the region of overlap the contents of both frames are rendered on top of one another If on the other hand you check the Wrap text option TextMaker automatically reformats the text in this frame so that it flows around the area of overlap Rotate by group box Here you ca
339. n Selecting data records beginning on page 334 Note This is not possible with the Pocket PC version of TextMaker 4 Invoke the command File gt Print Merge 5 In the Records group box choose one of the options for controlling which records in the attached database are to be used All every record in the entire database Selected all records in the database that have been selected Range a range of record numbers in this case you must enter the first and last numbers in the range Finally confirm with OK to start the print job You will find detailed information about creating form letters in chapter Form letters beginning on page 329 E mailing Provided an appropriate e mail program is installed on your computer you can send documents by e mail from TextMaker To do this proceed as follows 424 e Printing and e mailing User Manual TextMaker 1 Create or open the document that is to be e mailed 2 Invoke TextMaker s File gt Send command or if you have the Windows version of TextMaker the File gt Send gt E Mail command 3 Select the format in which the e mail is to be sent If you send the e mail in TextMaker document format the recipient receives an e mail with the TextMaker document as an attachment In order to read the attachment the recipient needs to have either TextMaker itself or else the free TextMaker Viewer which can be downloaded from www softmaker de viewer
340. n in the background TextMaker examines the document for German words that can should or must be written differently following the German spelling reform These are underlined in blue On the next page you can learn how to convert these words to the new spellings Correcting words with old German spellings As explained in the last section if you have turned on the Underline old German spelling in blue option German words whose spellings were changed by the German spelling reform are indicated with a blue underline To correct one of these words simply change the spelling manually or click with the right mouse button on the word in order to bring up the context menu of the spell checker This menu contains the following items Item Function List of suggestions All spellings that are correct according to the reformed German spelling rules are displayed at the top If you click on one of them TextMaker will replace the word in the text with it In case one of the suggested words represents the preferred spelling 288 e Language tools User Manual TextMaker Primary spelling is displayed after that word For more information read the section Primary Secondary and Alternative Spellings below Information Invokes a dialog box with additional options and information see section The Info command Ignore Word Ignores the mistake and removes the blue underline Use this option for words that are in fact c
341. n a cell the lines will be broken automatically and begin new paragraphs with the Enter key The heights of all the cells in a row will be adjusted automatically to the height of the current cell as its height increases You insert pictures into a table cell in the usual manner using the Object gt New Picture command which is described in chapter Pictures beginning on page 195 Of course you can also insert other kinds of objects for example OLE objects forms objects etc To move the text cursor from one table cell to another do the following Keyboard Press the Tab Tab key to move to the next cell or Shift Tab Shift Tab to move to the previous cell To move the text cursor from row to row use the arrow keys 4 J and 1 174 e Tables User Manual TextMaker Mouse Click in the desired cell Note As noted above the Tab Tab key is not available for inserting tab stops within table cells In tables you enter tab stops not with Tab Tab but with the key combination Ctrl Tab Ctrl Tab Selecting table cells and cell contents Text selection within a table cell works just like normal text selection To select complete table cells including all their content click in the first cell to be selected press and hold down the left mouse button and drag the selection to the last cell of interest There is an alternative way to select complete lines or column of cells When you invoke t
342. n for the contents of the current cell s Margins Here you can change the interior margins of the selected cells Options If the Protected option is checked no modifications of the contents of the selected cells will be allowed when the document is edited in Forms mode By default this option is not checked accordingly the cells will remain editable in Forms mode You will find more information about this in section Protecting forms objects beginning on page 275 Borders property sheet Here you can change borders of the selected cells The options accessible on this property sheet are the same as those for the Format gt Borders command see section Borders and lines beginning on page 92 184 e Tables User Manual TextMaker Note If you have selected multiple cells not only border lines but also gridlines between the cells can be added To apply gridlines first select these lines the cross in the middle in the Sample field and then select the desired line style Shading property sheet Here you can specify a shaded or patterned background for the selected cells The options accessible on this property sheet are the same as those for the Format gt Shading command see section Shading beginning on page 90 Changing the overall properties of tables You can make additional settings for tables with the Table gt Table Properties command This command also allows you to set the borders a
343. n language In this case it is not advisable to change the standard language setting to the foreign language This would lead to the desired result but it would not be very effective You would have to switch to the appropriate standard language every time you open a foreign language document and switch it back to English afterwards Instead it makes more sense to select the entire document invoke Format gt Character and change Language from Default to the desired foreign language This way TextMaker will know the document s language both now and in the future You occasionally write documents with foreign language citations Simply select the part that is in the foreign language invoke Format gt Character and set Language to the desired language Note You can change the language in a document as often as you like and even mix several languages 282 e Language tools User Manual TextMaker List of available language modules The language modules available for TextMaker are given in the following list Depending on which version of TextMaker you purchased your software may include only a subset of these modules Language module SPELL HYPH THES EURO Danish Xx x Dutch xX x x English UK X x X x English USA xX x x x French xX x x x French Canada xX x x German Germany xX x x German Germany old x xX x x German Switzerland x x x German Switzerland old xX x x Italian X x x x Norwegian x x Port
344. n page 396 To return from the footnote area back to the body text simply click anywhere in the text Alternatively you can use the Insert gt Footnote gt Go To Footnote Reference command which takes you back to the position in the text at which the footnote was inserted Changing footnote text after it has been entered You can edit the footnote texts at the bottom page margins any time you wish All you have to do is position the text cursor in the footnote area You can use one of the following procedures Scroll to the page containing the footnote you want to change and click with the mouse in the corresponding footnote area in the bottom page margin 394 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker Note This works only in normal view If you are working in some other viewing mode you must first switch to normal view with View gt Standard m You can also command TextMaker to find the next footnote in the text with Insert gt Footnote gt Go to Footnote When a footnote is found the corresponding footnote area is displayed and the text cursor is positioned within this area at the beginning of the footnote text Now you can edit the footnote text You already know how to return to the normal text simply click anywhere within it Reinserting footnote markers If you should accidentally delete the footnote marker in the footnote area you can command TextMaker to reinsert it with Insert gt Footnote gt Footnote
345. n rotate the text by the given angle 240 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker Vertical Alignment group box These settings determine how the framed text is to be aligned between the top and bottom edges of the frame Option Meaning Top The text is aligned flush against the top edge of the frame This is the default setting Bottom The text is aligned flush against the bottom edge of the frame Center The text is centered between the top and bottom edges of the frame Flush The lines of text are spaced equally in such a way that the text begins at the top edge of the frame and ends at the bottom edge AutoShapes property sheet In principle a text frame is nothing other than an AutoShape to which text is added By default the AutoShape used here is a simple rectangle However you can always assign another AutoShape to the text frame thus you can turn the rectangle into a speech balloon for example or into any other shape you like To do so first select a category and then choose the desired AutoShape You will find detailed information about AutoShapes in the section Drawings beginning on page 249 Linking text frames With TextMaker you can let text flow through multiple text frames that are linked together just as you could with a desktop publishing program If two frames are linked text that exceeds the limits of the first frame is automatically continued in the second frame Let s assume t
346. n the Object group box you can specify how the object s anchor should behave when you move the object When the default setting Move with object is selected the anchor moves with the object Thus when you move the object from one paragraph to another the object s anchor is removed from the paragraph and a new anchor is set to the left of the target paragraph On the other hand if you select the Fix to paragraph option the object s anchor always remains attached to the paragraph at which it was previously set even when you move the object Object properties Format property sheet On the Format property sheet you can make settings that affect the format of the object thus you can for example change its size Available options E Size group box Here you can change the size of the object To do so enter the desired Width and Height For objects that contain text e g text frames you can either specify exactly a fixed width and height or you can allow TextMaker to adjust the size of the frame automatically as required to accommodate text that might be added To do the latter select the Growing option for Width or Height and enter the desired minimum and maximum values E Scaling group box Alternatively you can change an object s size by specifying the width as a percentage of the original width in Horz Scaling and the height as a percentage of the original height in Vert Scaling The object will be enlarged
347. n the table using a variable For example if you calculate the formula PRODUCT C5 D28 in the table then of course you can call out the content of this variable in normal text and perform additional calculations on it Calculating the sum over a range of table cells The SUM function is especially useful for adding numbers in table cells Simply enter the first and last cells as parameters TextMaker adds the values in all the cells in the range For example you can add the contents of cells B2 through B5 with SUM B2 B5 346 e Calculations in the text User Manual TextMaker Updating calculations Important No automatic recalculation of all the formulas is performed when you change the content of a table cell this would be too time consuming However the displayed results for formulas that reference this particular cell will then be out of date You can initiate a recalculation of all formulas at any time by invoking the command Extras gt Update Fields or by pressing F9 F9 This will bring all calculations up to date In any case all calculations are automatically updated when you print your document thus the results will always be correct when you print them For more information on this topic see section Updating calculations beginning on page 351 Database fields in calculations Fields from a database can also be entered in calculations provided that a database has first been assigned to the doc
348. n this case you should check this option to ensure that the headings will not be incorrectly sorted along with the parts of the addresses to which they refer but will remain in the first paragraph 192 e Tables User Manual TextMaker Case sensitive If you check this option sort terms that begin with lowercase letters will be placed after terms beginning with uppercase letters Otherwise all sort terms that begin with the same letter will be grouped together regardless of the cases of the first letters Pictures You can insert pictures into your document whenever you wish Their sizes are fully adjustable their positioning depends on whether you simply insert them into the body text or draw picture frames for them Inserting pictures into the text You can insert pictures directly into the body text with the Object gt New Picture command TextMaker treats a picture that has been inserted in this way as if it were a character within the text It becomes part of the body text Thus if you type something just before the picture the picture will shift down to accommodate it just as a character would Drawing picture frames Alternatively pictures can be inserted in the form of picture frames using the Object gt New Picture Frame command Picture frames are anchored at fixed positions on the page thus they do not move when text is added or deleted above them This sort of behavior is useful for example for docume
349. n you switch to Object mode you can no longer edit text However this mode provides many functions that ease working with objects Thus in Object mode you can for example select any type of object with a simple mouse click Important Once you are in Object mode you have access solely to functions for inserting and editing objects This means you cannot enter text and a large number of menu commands are not accessible Switching between Edit mode and Object mode There are several ways to switch between Edit mode and Object mode E Invoke the View gt Object Mode command to enter Object mode Invoke the command again to return to Edit mode m Click on the RI icon in the Formatting toolbar to switch to Object mode Click on the icon again to return to Edit mode m You can also click anywhere in the document window with the right mouse button to open a context menu from which you can select Object Mode or Exit Object Mode depending on the current mode m The following is the fastest method Point the mouse at any free position within the document window and double click with the right mouse button to switch between Edit and Object mode The Object toolbar When you enable Object mode the Formatting toolbar is replaced by the Object toolbar REBREIZve t SOODOPAINIEIGI Zl The Object toolbar 216 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker The icons in this toolbar represent functions for inserting and editing ob
350. nations are presented in the following pages Printing To print a document invoke File gt Print or use the keyboard shortcut for this command Ctl P Ctri P Printer PCL Laser v lt Options Copies Port COM1 57600 e j Collate copies M Pages Draft mode al Current page C Drop pictures Pages 1 1 C Reverse order Net path Color Pages to print Ase J A dialog box appears allowing you to make the following settings Printer Here choose from the installed printers the one that is to handle the printing The Setup button opens a window for setting up and configuring the printer You can find information about this in your printer manual Linux users can also specify here the command to be used to control the print process Pages Specify here the part of the document to be printed E All Print the entire document Current Page Print only the page on which the text cursor is positioned m Pages Print only the specified pages You must enter the desired page numbers for example 12 Print page 12 only 422 e Printing and e mailing User Manual TextMaker 12 15 Print pages 12 through 15 12 Print page 12 and all pages following 12 Print pages 1 through 12 You can enter as many page ranges as you like provided you separate them with commas 2 5 12 Print pages 2 through 5 and page 12 etc In addition you can specify with the Pages to print opti
351. ncel C Landscape r Paper size __ Margins Letter X Top Bottom 0 79 in Ea 0 79 in i Width Height Left Right e 5in al fit in al o 79 in EJ 0 79 in 3 r Paper bins First page Next pages use printer setting 7 Juse printer setting The dialog box for the File gt Page Setup command In all the settings that can be made are as follows E Orientation Here you can specify the Orientation of the document on the printed page Portrait or Landscape m Paper size Here you can specify the size of the paper for which the document is to be formatted The Paper size dropdown list contains all the paper sizes that are supported by the currently selected printer If you want to specify a size that is not listed you can do so by manually entering values in the Width and Height fields Margins Here you can set the page margins for details see the next section m Paper bins Available only under Windows If your printer has multiple paper trays you can select which one s the printer should use If you don t want TextMaker to influence tray selection you should retain the default setting Use printer setting On the other hand if you want the first page of your document to be printed on paper from tray and the remaining pages on page from tray 2 for example you should change the settings accordingly Note Changes of these settings affect the whole document unless
352. nctions Options group box Here you can make settings for controlling the search operation as follows E Case sensitive By default the case of letters in the search term is ignored Thus if you search for house not only house but also House HOUSE HouSe etc will be found However if you check this option only those occurrences of the search term will be found in which the cases of the letters correspond exactly to the cases of the letters in the search term Thus if you search for house only house will be found mu Whole words only If you check this option only those occurrences of the search term that are separate words will be found Thus if you search for test it will be found only when it stands alone as a separate word and not when part of another word like testament or protest E Search from top By default TextMaker begins a search at the current position of the text cursor However if you check the Search from top option TextMaker begins at the beginning of the document When the Search backwards option is checked Search from top is replaced by Search from end which works in a corresponding way 140 e Searching and replacing User Manual TextMaker E Search backwards If you check this option the search proceeds in the reverse direction that is from the current position of the text cursor towards the beginning of the text m Search all fr
353. nd formatted it as double column text By doing this you have created three sections a single column section at the beginning of the document a double column section in the middle and another single column section at the end If you decide you want the middle section to be formatted in three columns instead of two you can reformat it simply by moving the text cursor to a position anywhere within the middle section and then invoking Format gt Section Under Apply to select Current section then change the number of columns to 3 The double column section is immediately reformatted in three columns Entering a section break You can use the Insert gt Breaks gt Section break command to divide a section into two sections In this way a document can be divided into additional sections and each section can be formatted with a different number of columns Page breaks before sections By default TextMaker does not insert a page break between two sections and it allows the text to flow without interruption from one section to the next However if you want to ensure that a given section will always start on a new page you can position the text cursor within this section invoke the Format gt Section command and check the Page break option in the dialog box Searching and replacing In this chapter you will get acquainted with all the functions that have to do with searching and replacing text and formatting E Sea
354. nd gamma color balance with an effect on brightness m Transparent Color group box Here you can make settings that affect the transparency of pictures Detect automatically The transparency of the picture is based on the data in the picture file Note Only files in GIF or PNG format can contain transparency data No transparency The picture is not displayed with transparency even if the file contains transparency data Color Allows you to select manually the color that is to be rendered as transparent For example if you select the color white all white areas of the picture will be rendered transparent Rotate by group box Here you can specify an angle of rotation for the picture E File button You can use this button to select another picture file m Export button Available only for pictures that are saved in the document You can use this button to export a picture that is to save a copy of it on your hard disk under any file name you like If you check the Create link to file option TextMaker first copies the picture from the document to a file and then removes the picture from the document replacing it with a reference to the new file Thus the picture is no longer saved in the document Tip Some of the above described settings can also be made with the help of menus After selecting the picture either choose the Object gt Properties command or right click on the picture to open the context menu
355. nd shading of all the cells in the table at once In order to do this you must first position the text cursor in any cell in the table Then when you invoke the Table gt Table Properties command a dialog will appear Note This dialog can also be invoked with the Object gt Properties command the two commands are identical The following settings can be made in this dialog Properties property sheet On this property sheet you can change some general settings for the entire table For descriptions of these settings see section Object properties Properties property sheet beginning on page 234 Note The Protected option mentioned in the section referenced above is not present on the Properties property sheet for tables because protection for table cells is set on a cell by cell basis using the Table gt Cell Properties command see the description of the Protected option in section Cell properties beginning on page 182 Of course you can always protect an entire table by selecting all its cells and then checking the Protected option for them Borders property sheet Here you can change the borders for the entire table The options accessible from this property sheet are the same as those for the Format gt Borders command see section Borders and lines beginning on page 92 Note In tables not only outer border lines but also gridlines between the cells can be added To apply gridlines first select
356. ng invoke Extras gt Preferences switch to the Language property sheet and there activate Background spell checking Make sure that the Underline typos in red option is turned on TextMaker now examines the entire document for spelling errors on an ongoing basis It not only recognizes existing spelling errors in the document but also immediately examines changes and additions to the text for correct spelling Correcting misspelled words Misspelled words are highlighted on the screen with red underscores So you can see at a glance all misspelled words and can correct them immediately or at a later time wholly at your discretion To correct one of these underlined words either simply change its spelling by hand or click with the right mouse button on the word to bring up the spelling correction context menu This menu has the following items Item Function List of suggestions When TextMaker finds suggestions for the correct spelling of the word it presents them in the upper part of the menu If you click on one of them it will replace the word in the text If TextMaker finds a large number of suggestions an additional menu item called Additional Suggestions appears If you click on it a dialog with all the suggestions found will appear Ignore Word Ignores the supposed spelling error for all instances of this word and removes the red marking Use this option for words that are in fact correctly spelled but are not to b
357. ng in section Editing user dictionaries beginning on page 293 In 1996 the governments of the German speaking countries Germany Austria Liechtenstein and Switzerland signed an agreement concerning a reform of German spelling attempting to simplify German orthography and make it easier to learn TextMaker s Background spell checking feature discussed in the last section can help you apply the reformed spellings for text composed in German language At your command it underlines in blue all German words that conform to the old German spellings and that can should or must be spelled differently in accordance with the new German spellings If you click with the right mouse button on such a word the approved spelling is presented to you In addition you can call up information as to why this word is now written differently Activating conversion to the new German spelling To activate checking for and conversion to the new spellings you must take the following steps 1 Invoke the command Extras gt Preferences 2 Switch to the Language property sheet 3 Turn on the Background spell checking option 4 Click the Options button 5 Activate the Underline old German spelling in blue option 6 Confirm with OK Important The Underline old German spelling in blue option functions only for text formatted in the language German Germany or German Switzerland From now o
358. ng of the document Ctrl End Ctri End To the end of the document Ctrl PgUp 2 Ctrl PgUpTo the uppermost visible line of the document window Ctrl PgDn 4 Ctr1 PgDnTo the lowest visible line of the document window Mouse Mouse users can click anywhere within the document to position the text cursor there Moving the visible part of the text When you move the text cursor above the upper edge or below the lower edge of the screen TextMaker scrolls the text down or up respectively on its own It automatically shifts the visible part of the text of the document in the appropriate direction 26 e Basics User Manual TextMaker You can also move the visible part of the text yourself Use the horizontal scrollbar below the document or the vertical scrollbar at the right side of the document to do this g Slider Ho E m A horizontal scrollbar Scrollbars can be operated as follows m Click on one of the little arrows to shift the visible segment a little in the desired direction relative to the screen m You will notice that a defined area between the little arrows the so called slider moves with the text This shows the position of the segment in view at any given time You can also shift the visible segment by dragging this slider to the desired position m If you click on the area between the slider and either of the little arrows the visible segment moves by a greater increment for example by a whole screen at once
359. ng toolbar and to the menu command Extras gt Changes gt Track Changes E Show changes Turns the Show changes option on off When this option is enabled changes are highlighted in color When it is disabled the document appears as if all changes had been accepted Corresponds to the jal icon in the Reviewing toolbar mu Print changes When this option is enabled tracked changes appear highlighted not only on the screen but also in printed output E Inserted text Deleted text etc The options in the lower area of the dialog provide means of specifying how changes will be represented in the document You can specify both the manner in which changes are displayed and the colors to be used to highlight the changes If you use the default setting By Author for a color a new color will be selected automatically each time a new user makes changes When the first user makes changes they will appear in red Subsequently when another user opens the document and makes additional changes these will appear in blue etc Note For this to work correctly all users who edit the document must have entered their names in the TextMaker preferences dialog To enter your name invoke Extras gt Preferences switch to the General property sheet click on either the User Home or User Business button and type your name or at least your initials in the appropriate edit boxes 412 e Document revisions User Manual TextMaker
360. ngly After 16 tax insert the formula TAX TOTAL 0 16 with Insert gt Calculation This formula uses the total just calculated as a basis for a further calculation Here too what counts is that the result for TAX is automatically corrected for whenever the result for TOTAL changes Finally the Amount due is calculated as TOTAL TAX 344 e Calculations in the text User Manual TextMaker In the last step we opt not to define another variable We just want to get the result into the text we don t need to reference it anywhere else If you check the Display field names option on the View property sheet in the File gt Properties dialog the formulas in the text will become visible The invoice then ought to look something like this INVOICE Formula HOURS 2 hours Formula PRICE 10 Total Formula TOTAL HOURS PRICE 16 tax Formula TAX TOTAL 0 16 Amount due Formula TOTAL TAX you uncheck Display field names you will see the results in the text again To write an invoice for another customer all you have to do now is change the value of HOURS To do this select the 2 before hours invoke Insert gt Calculation and simply replace the 2 in the formula with the desired number of hours After your OK TextMaker carries out the recalculation Decimal places You might find it more desireable to show the amounts with two decimal places You can make the necessary change immedi
361. nt ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeees 417 Horizontal MeS secera eE n EAE EE ESE 417 Grating INKS onetan aeaaee aeaea deaan aseran anatia aiaa aat 418 Saving HTML documents sseseeeseeeseeeesseesreesnesreesrrnssressrensre 420 Printing and e mailing 421 PINUNO iiaa elite delta a pamela Whied ities 421 Printing a form letter c ceeeceeecceeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeseeeeeseeeeeeeaeeseneeees 424 EATS EE A A tance Stet T A E TA 424 Document management 427 Quick path Sminia aaiae Taaa een aaa a aa aai aaant 427 Defining guik paths misioan eea iaiia iiaa 428 Using Quick paths earen a danni 428 Editing and deleting Quick paths c cccceeeseeceereeeetteeeeneeeeaes 429 DOCUMENT SUMMANMY ieoi a eet id ER EE RN 429 The file managerii oeiia eiad aaiae kaea aerea aa aaa 430 The file manager s buttons 0 ccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeaeeeenees 431 Searching with the file manager 432 Document protection 435 Enabling document protection cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 436 Disabling document protection ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 437 Working with other file formats 439 Document windows 441 Creating a document Window cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteaeeeteaeeeeaes 441 Activating a document Window eeeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeteeeeeetteeeeeenaeeeeeneaa 441 Closing a document WiINGOW cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetsaeeeteeeteaes 442 Maximizing a doc
362. nt to Value and enter the desired starting number in the edit box For example type 42 to assign the number 42 to the first page Changing the properties of headers and footers By default TextMaker adjusts the position and size of the frame that contains a header or footer automatically Accordingly when you increase the left or right page margin TextMaker automatically decreases the width of the header and footer frames to match Note for users of older versions Beginning with the 2006 version of TextMaker the header frame can be any height If the top page margin becomes too small to accommodate the header the normal body text is automatically pushed down on the page The same goes for the footer frame You can edit the properties of the header and footer frames as required and in this way change their widths or set their distances from the text and page edges To do this proceed as follows 1 Click with the mouse in the header or footer frame depending on whether you want to edit the header or the footer Alternatively you can invoke Insert gt Go to Header or Insert gt Go to Footer which accomplish the same thing 2 Invoke the Object gt Properties command to bring up a properties dialog Tip This command can also be invoked with the Qi icon in the header and footer toolbar The following settings can be made in the dialog Properties property sheet The Properties property sheet allow
363. ntinue the enumeration at a following paragraph To do this position the text cursor in the numbered paragraph that you want to exclude from the enumeration invoke Format gt Bullets and Numbering switch to the Bullets amp Simple numbering property sheet and check the Skip numbering option The selected paragraph s number is now removed and only its indentation is retained The enumeration is continued at the immediately following numbered paragraph Ending or removing an enumeration To end an enumeration of paragraphs or to remove a previously applied enumeration proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor at the end of the last numbered paragraph and press the Enter key to begin a new paragraph Or If you want to remove all numbers from a given group of numbered paragraphs select them 2 Invoke the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command 3 Switch to the Bullets amp Simple numbering property sheet 4 Disable numbering by selecting None in the Type group box 5 Confirm with OK Options The Bullets amp Simple numbering property sheet in the dialog box for the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command gives you access to the following options m Type Here you can specify either Numbering or a Bullet for the selected paragraph s Select the Numbering option for numbering You can find information relating to the Bullet option in section Bulleted lists beginning on page 85 When you s
364. nts in newspaper style This chapter covers only the insertion of pictures directly into the text You will find information about picture frames in chapter Frames and drawings beginning on page 213 Inserting a picture into the text To insert a picture into the text do the following 1 Move the text cursor to the desired position 2 Invoke Object gt New Picture 3 A dialog box appears to enable you to select the picture to be inserted Enter the picture file name or select a file from the list Tip When you check the Preview option a small preview of the picture contained in the currently selected file is displayed in the dialog 4 Confirm with OK The picture is immediately inserted into the text Picture not visible If you can t see the picture in the document after you have inserted it that is probably because you have disabled the display of pictures in other words checked the Use placeholders option for pictures To re enable the display of pictures invoke File gt Properties switch to the View property sheet and check the Show pictures option Picture frames As explained in the introduction there is an alternative way of inserting pictures using picture frames These are anchored at fixed positions on the page thus they do not move when text above them is inserted or deleted You will find more information about this topic in section Picture frames beginning on page 242 Options in the dia
365. nual TextMaker Both The body text flows around both sides of the frame Left It flows only around the left side Right It flows only around the right side Larger side It flows only around that side of the frame on which there is the most room Thus if you position the frame in the right half of the page the body text will flow around it on the left If you position the frame in the left half of the page the body text will flow around it on the right m Object group box The options in this group box are available only for frames and drawings When you insert a frame or a drawing the object is automatically anchored to the paragraph in which is inserted and the anchor is placed to the left of that paragraph An object always appears on the page in which its anchor is found Thus if you move the paragraph to which the object is anchored to the next page the object also moves to the next page This is how TextMaker handles objects when the default setting Move with text is in effect On the other hand if you select the Fix on page option TextMaker always leaves the object on the page determined by the page number you specify You will find additional information about the use of anchors in the section Changing the position of objects beginning on page 218 Anchor group box The options in this group box are available only for frames and drawings When you have selected the Move with text option see above i
366. o change the character format Inserting fields Fields from the bibliography database are indicated with curly braces As required you can insert additional database fields into the edit field either by simply typing the field name e g AUTHOR or by double clicking on the desired field in the Fields list Tip The first item in the Fields list is always a field called REF This field is created automatically and has the following special characteristic It contains either the abbreviation or an automatically generated number for the source depending on which of these settings you selected in the Bibliography Settings dialog Additional information m You will find information about updating references in section Updating tables of references beginning on page 387 Em You will find information about editing and formatting references in section Editing and formatting tables of references beginning on page 388 Updating tables of references Important When you edit a document into which you have already inserted a table of references table of contents index or bibliography the table is not automatically updated in step with your editing Thus when the document s page count changes because you have typed additional text the table of references continues to show the now outdated page numbers And when for example you add new headings the table of contents does not expand automaticall
367. o existing patents registered designs or trademarks with which they might be associated The lack of a notice of such an association is no basis for an assumption that a name is free for use All valid trademarks are herewith acknowledged SoftMaker Software GmbH Kronacher StraBe 7 D 90427 Nuernberg Germany www softmaker com www fourier sys com Contents Welcome FUNCtional OVEIVICW cceceeeeeeeecee eset ences ee KAATA O Van ENEE A R EKAR FAATA V TeChnical SUPPOFT iiiar eeeeeenceceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeseeaeeseeeesaeeteaaeeeenees About this manual sssri iari aE AA a E OSa EAR Typographical conventionS sssssseesssseressrrssrirrnsrinnssinnnsnrnnnnnenna Starting TextMaker cccecccececceceeseeeeeeeeceeeeeaaeseeaeeeeeeeeseaeeseaeeesenees The application screen ANIELE Ded leat pontet trcaene E A E E E E ene E E dance WIEIAU A OYE 1 EAAS E E OE A P E AE N E E E A destin AROE ae EE EEE E E A E A E a N E E E E Formatting toOlb ar arestion e E e E ea OENE eA Document WINdOW c cseecececececeesssseeeceeeceanensseceeeeeseenseeeeeeeeeseaaees SAS Oo Da a a a a a eT Basics Using the Keyboard rersssesi eierens arr Reak eE KAEN AKTEKKE EEEREN RENARE SKEER Usmathe MOUSC testera e ekaa EE Ea a ERENER ELE hare Emeornmgiex ersin e e e EA EEE AE AAE EEEL ERE Moving the text CUISODF creeer eE AE RAEE REKREA ARES EE Deleting Tort iake e EA REEE EN AAE AREER NELASTE UNGOING CHANGES eeni e E ee ENRE E
368. o measure up to the users wishes Technical support If you have questions our technical support will be glad to help you You can reach us as follows Internet www fourier sys com At the Fourier website you will find the latest updates for your program and much additional information as well as information about the Nova5000 E mail Please send e mail inquiries to support fourier sys com Phone Of course you can also call us with your questions Toll free US only 1 866 771 NOVA About this manual TextMaker has a wide variety of functions In the beginning you might find this a bit intimidating but don t worry You don t have to master all the commands While you re getting started just use those you need Later when you would like to make use of TextMaker s extended functions you can review the appropriate pages in the manual The manual for TextMaker is laid out as follows m The chapter The application screen page 17 describes the individual components of TextMaker s main window Ideal for beginners m The chapter Basics page 23 acquaints you with TextMaker s most important commands Ideal for beginners E The chapter The TextMaker Tour page 35 treats the topic of text editing in tutorial form and introduces you to the operation of TextMaker with some practical examples m The chapters Working with selections page 57 and following are the reference p
369. o specify the zoom level at which a document is displayed on the screen You can set zoom levels anywhere between 30 and 1000 Use the following View menu commands to do this View menu command Function Actual Size Sets the zoom level to 100 This is the default setting Fit Margins to Window Automatically selects the zoom level at which the width of a page fits exactly in the window Full Page Automatically selects the zoom level that permits viewing an entire page at once Zoom Activates the magnifying glass with which you can draw a frame around whatever part of the document you want to enlarge Custom Allows you to select the zoom level from a list You can also enter a value between 30 and 1000 manually 470 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Customizing toolbars TextMaker has several toolbars e g the Function toolbar or the Formatting toolbar that give you quick access to the program s functions Each icon on a toolbar stands for a particular command When you click on an icon the corresponding command is executed BC El6al 8R 9 MESQQ FAV aT A toolbar Tip When you position the mouse pointer over an icon without clicking on it a tooltip appears and gives a brief description of the icon s function This section describes how you can adapt these useful aides to your personal working style With the View gt Toolbars command you can take the following actions
370. o the new spellings described in the previous pages is affected by various settings To change them invoke the command Extras gt Preferences switch to the Language property sheet and click on the Options button The following settings can be made Underline old German spelling in blue As noted earlier when this option is checked TextMaker underlines in blue all German words that are spelled according to the old German spelling conventions and that can should or must be spelled differently under the new rules Correction method Here you can specify how strict TextMaker should be when attempting to convert German words to the new spellings There are three correction methods it can use they differ depending on whether TextMaker applies the new rules more in favor of the old spellings or more in favor of the new Important Words for which the rules provide no scope and for which new spellings are required are considered to be incorrectly spelled under all three methods Thus for example da8 must from now on be written dass without exception The three correction methods differ only with respect to words that have alternative spellings The methods are the following Conservative the old spelling is not underlined if it is still allowed Here words in the old spellings are not underlined in blue if these old spellings regardless of whether they are classified as primary secondary or alternat
371. oard pops up automatically whenever you are given an opportunity to enter something in a dialog box when you have tapped on an input field for example Shorter tap and hold delay Pocket PCs only If this option is enabled the delay before the appearance of a context menu is shortened when you press and hold the stylus on an object for example Function of hardware cursor keys Pocket PCs only These options affect the behavior both of the navigation keys the little cross shaped rocker control under the display with which most Pocket PCs are equipped and also of the arrow keys on an external keyboard With these options you can specify how these keys will work relative to documents and dialog boxes mu Always scroll by page The direction keys always scroll to the next page in the appropriate direction Move in list boxes scroll elsewhere For the most part the direction keys behave as described above However if you tap on a list in a dialog box for example the keys are enabled for use in navigating the list m Move cursor The direction keys move the text cursor instead of paging 450 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Below these options is an option to Use horizontal cursor keys to scroll If you enable this option the horizontal direction keys can also be used for paging If you disable it these keys move the text cursor Extended support for Asian fonts When this option is enabled the dialog
372. oard with Ctrl C Ctri C Then move the text cursor to the place where you want to insert the copy and press Ctrl v Cti V If you want to insert the text again all you have to do is move the text cursor to the next place where you want to insert it and press Ctrl v Ctrl V again Everything works the same way for objects like pictures and drawings as it does for text Moving and copying text with the mouse drag and drop You can select a text segment with the mouse drag it to another position and drop it there With this technique known as drag and drop you can move or copy text very quickly Proceed as follows 1 Select the text segment Position the mouse cursor on the selection Press the left mouse button and hold it down With the mouse button held down drag the selection to the desired position When you release the mouse button the content of the selection is moved to the new position When you release the mouse button while pressing the Ctrl Ctrl key the selection is instead copied to the new position 60 e Working with selections User Manual TextMaker Pasting with special formatting When you place information in the clipboard using Edit gt Cut or Edit gt Copy this information is saved in several formats For example if you select text the text is saved both in formatted form and in unformatted form Normally you don t need to be concerned about this because TextMaker auto
373. occasionally inset or widen text The indent for the first line of a paragraph can be specified separately For example in this paragraph the First line indent is set at 0 4 in the Left indent at 0 8 in and the Right indent at 1 2 in Indents are always given relative to the page margins For example if the left page margin is set at 1 in and you set the Left indent to 1 5 in the text begins at 2 5 in 74 e Paragraph formatting User Manual TextMaker Note You set the page margins themselves with the help of the File gt Page Setup command not with indents To use indents place the text cursor in the paragraph to be modified or select multiple paragraphs to be modified then invoke Format gt Paragraph Paragraph xi pIndents Alignment Character Lox Left Join left z mg Be Tabs ance Right bn Hyphenation i always Bullets Reset First Join Outline level fo Shading p Line spacing p Pagination Borders Column break Borders ato fico I Column break I Page break Drop caps r Paragraph spacing Spacing Before font I Keep with next an TE I Keep together er z Opt I Avoid widows orphans You can set the Left indent the Right indent and the First line indent in the Indents group box Enter the desired values in the respective edit boxes You can also enter negative values when for example you want to widen the text Using the Hor
374. ocument management User Manual TextMaker Search File x oOo m mm HE My Documents File type Document tmd x FED Ah Add to list C IV Include subfolders A Ler i Cancel wef t i CSCOO C Subject Author FY Keywords Poo Pa Dannlaade I Description PO Ara Quick paths w atc You can search for files that meet criteria of the following types filename folder file type and the items in the document summary title subject author keywords Moreover you can combine several search criteria For example if you only specify a particular folder in the search dialog TextMaker will display all the documents in this folder But if you also enter a search term in the Title field TextMaker will find only those documents that are both in the selected folder and contain the given search term in Title fields of their summaries From the dialog box illustrated above you control the search function as follows a New list button Starts a new search using the current settings E Add to list button Likewise starts a search with the difference that the files found in the previous search are not first cleared from the list m File name Here you can specify a unique filename or a filename pattern as the search target With the default setting tmd the search function will find all TextMaker documents If you specify a filename patte
375. of headings with the styles Note Normally you should not change the Outline level option manually Use the Outline view or the styles mentioned above to do this These methods are more convenient and avoid potential sources of error Practical outlining To summarize let s consider how outlines can be applied most effectively in your ordinary work 370 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker Outlining an existing document Let s assume that you have already typed a document that includes headings and now want to use outlining to restructure it To do this all you need to do is to switch to the Outline view with View gt Outline and assign the headings to the desired levels To raise or lower the outline level of any heading position the text cursor in the heading and use the Q higher level or gt lower level button Assign the major headings to outline level 1 the immediately subordinate headings to outline level 2 etc To exit Outline view invoke View gt Standard Outlining a new document The procedure for outlining a new document is no different than the one described above except that a new document will have no headings at first You can write out the whole document in a single stretch and then worry about the outline Alternatively you can assign each new heading to an outline level as soon as you have typed it using the procedure described above Numbering headings Th
376. of text If you select several lines of text the command Edit gt Evaluate is not available and is grayed out in the menu For lengthy expressions use the command Insert gt Calculation Summing the contents of table cells Such calculations can be performed in tables as well There is yet another feature in connection with tables m If you have selected a calculation that is within a table cell you can get the result with the command Edit gt Evaluate as described above m On the other hand if you select several complete table cells the command Sum cells will become available in the Edit menu If you invoke it TextMaker computes the sum of the values in the selected cells A window then appears and tells you the result If you want simply to learn what it is and make no further use of it click on Close Alternatively you can click on the Copy button TextMaker then copies the result of the calculation to the clipboard Now you can insert the value at any position you like in the document with the command Edit gt Paste Formulas and functions In this section you will learn about the rules you have to observe when constructing formulas Then all of TextMaker s computational functions will be described to you Note This section deals with the formulas for computation for performing calculations in the text If you are looking for information about the SoftMaker Equation Editor for graphical representations of mathe
377. ojects of all Sizes The company name might safely be somewhat larger Select the first line and with aid of the Formatting toolbar format it in the Arial font choose a font size of 32 points and turn on bold 32 is not present in the list of font sizes It doesn t matter because the list offers only the most commonly needed sizes and you can always enter values manually Simply click on the font size shown in the Formatting toolbar enter 32 there and confirm with the Enter key By the way you can even specify non integer font sizes by using a decimal point e g 11 6 points for example when the area at your disposal is fixed and you want the text to fit precisely In the end the Formatting toolbar ought to look like this R Normal Arial a 32 x E B7 U Font is now set to Arial32 point bold uy vl wit eee eH Next we want to format the second line in Arial 12 point italic To do that we must first select it as before This time however don t use the Formatting toolbar to change the font size Instead invoke Format gt Character so that you can get acquainted with this frequently needed command as well A dialog box opens revealing at a glance all the possibilities for formatting characters 44 e The TextMaker Tour User Manual TextMaker ok Font Spacing Hyperlink i Typeface Size Style Language farial v 32 Regular v Defa
378. omatically resized to match the size of the object mu Linear Gradient Square Gradient etc When you select any of the remaining five fill types a gradient fill is performed on the object After selecting the desired type of gradient from the Fill type list you can select one of the subtypes presented in the Gallery By default the gradient goes from white to black To set different colors click the small triangles below the color bar and then select the new colors from the Color list The triangle to the left is for the starting color and the triangle to the right is for the ending color 2 O You can add additional colors to the gradient by double clicking on the color bar at each position where you want to add a color and then selecting the color You can remove colors you have added to the gradient by double clicking on one of the triangles above the color bar You can specify the desired gradient with even more precision with the help of the other options in this dialog the X offset and Y offset values determine where the gradient starts the Angle value determines the rotation of the gradient Tip You can also change the offsets and rotation angle by moving or rotating the four pointed arrow control in the Example field with the mouse When you check the Double Gradient option the gradient goes from the starting color to the ending color and then back to the starting color rather than simply from the starting color to the ending
379. omfortably This user guide is written for various platforms such as Windows Linux PocketPC and Handhelds In the context of this guide the Nova5000 is considered a Handheld device So any features listed as either supported or not supported by a handheld device is in fact relevant to the Nova5000 Functional overview Some features of TextMaker Practical document templates pre designed letterheads etc for creating new documents in no time m Extensive paragraph formatting capabilities including automatic numbering bullets borders shadows fill patterns E Paragraph and character styles that allow you to apply frequently needed formats to text with the press of a button m Desktop publishing DTP features like master pages drop caps small caps automatic paragraph control adjustable character spacing and pitch Graphics support in numerous file formats extensive drawing functions m Powerful table functions including arithmetic functions m File and document manager with search capabilities m Table of contents and indexes footnotes outline view Reliable spell checking hyphenation and synonym dictionaries m Integrated address book database 14 e Welcome User Manual TextMaker and much more TextMaker is always being improved If in the course of your work you encounter a need for a feature that isn t present or you have other suggestions write to us we want TextMaker t
380. on left pages of manuals the page number is usually flush left in the footer and on right pages it is flush right To enable different headers and footers for left and right facing pages you must proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Format gt Chapter command 2 Check the Facing pages option You will now be able to set up different headers and footers for left and right facing pages More precisely Now when you set up or edit a header on any left page of the document the header for the right pages will remain untouched Likewise changes to the header on any right page will affect only the right pages The same goes of course for footers Deleting headers and footers You can remove the text from a header any time you like by clicking in the header frame selecting all the text and then simply deleting it As required you can also completely remove the header frame itself from the document even though this is normally not necessary To do this proceed as follows 1 Position the text cursor within the header frame 2 Click on the icon in the header and footer toolbar Alternatively you can right click on any empty area in the header frame and choose the Delete Header Footer command from the context menu The header frame together with all its content is now removed You can set up a new header frame any time you like with Insert gt Header The procedure for removing footers is similar 106 e Page formatting
381. only on drawings These operations are not possible on other types of objects When you select a drawing a double arrow symbol i appears on the drawing s surrounding frame By dragging this symbol with the mouse you can rotate the drawing lt 4 To rotate the object drag here To change the rotation center drag here You can also rotate and flip drawings by using the commands in the Object gt Rotate or Flip menu Aligning and distributing frames Note Only frames and drawings can be aligned and distributed these operations are not possible on objects embedded in the text To align or equally distribute two or more frames or drawings select them and then invoke the command Object gt Align or Distribute A submenu appears from which you can select the desired alignment or distribution m Align Left mg Align Center mg Align Right E Align Top m Align Middle E Align Bottom Distribute Horizontally Distribute Vertically The last two commands work only when at least three objects are selected These commands are used to distribute the selected objects evenly within the area they occupy so that the spacings between them are equal Duplicating objects To obtain a duplicate of an object you can copy it to the clipboard the usual way and then reinsert it Alternatively you can use the Edit gt Duplicate command This command immediately creates a copy of the selected object
382. ons whether all pages or only the odd or even numbered pages in the given range are to be printed Options This part of the dialog box contains additional printing options m Copies Here you can specify the number of copies of the document to be printed mu Collate copies If this option is disabled multiple copies are printed on laser printers in the fastest possible way However the copies are not collated the pages of each copy of a multi page document are not grouped together rather the first page of the document is printed x times then the second page is printed x times etc Draft mode only with Handheld PCs Reduces the resolution of pictures to shorten printing time naturally at the expense of a reduction in print quality Print to file Routes the print output to a file Drop pictures Skips over all pictures and drawings when printing useful for fast test printing m Reverse order Prints the last page first then the next to last page etc To start printing click OK Printing a form letter To print a form letter proceed as follows 1 Open or create a form letter see chapter Form letters beginning on page 329 2 Make sure that the database with the desired addresses has been assigned to the form letter with Extras gt Set Database see section Assigning a database to a document beginning on page 330 3 Select the database records to be printed as required see sectio
383. options are available Comments group box Highlight comments in text When this option is enabled all text segments to which comments are attached are highlighted in color Print comments When this option is enabled comments appear not only on the screen but also on the printed page Note Regular text will be reduced in size to make room on the printed page for the comments Thus its measurements will not correspond to the measurements specified for the document a Color Specifies the color to be used to highlight commented text and to display comments in the comments pane If you use the default setting By Author a different color is selected automatically each time a different user edits the document When the first user adds comments these appear in red When a second user subsequently opens the document and adds comments those appear in blue etc Note For this to work correctly all users who edit the document must have entered their names in the TextMaker preferences dialog To enter your name invoke Extras gt Preferences switch to the General property sheet activate either the User Home button or the User Business button and type your name or at least your initials in the appropriate edit boxes Comments pane group box Show automatically This check box corresponds to the menu command Extras gt Comments gt Automatically Show Comments Pane The comments pane is a white
384. ored In addition a vertical line appears in the margin beside each line that contains a change providing an indication that a change was made at that point Step 3 Accepting rejecting changes When all the desired changes have been made they can be either accepted or removed one by one Use the Reviewing toolbar described in the introduction for this purpose 0 0 AB The Reviewing toolbar This toolbar appears automatically when the document contains changes that were made with the Track changes function enabled If it does not appear invoke the command View gt Toolbars and enable the Reviewing Toolbar The icons on the Reviewing toolbar that are responsible for document revisions include Icon Function A HeReEE K e Track changes on off Enables disables the Track changes function as described above Corresponds to the menu command Extras gt Changes gt Track Changes Go to previous change Positions the text cursor at the previous change Corresponds to the menu command Extras gt Changes gt Previous Change Go to next change Positions the text cursor at the next change Corresponds to the menu command Extras gt Changes gt Next Change Accept current change Accepts the change at which the text cursor is presently positioned The change is then saved permanently in the document Reject current change Rejects the change at which the text cursor is presentl
385. ormat On the other hand if you want to create a multi column list select the Insert as table option and enter the number of columns under Columns 8 Confirm with OK 9 Click on Insert to insert the list into the document Summary How do work with label sheets 1 Start anew document with File gt New 322 e Database User Manual TextMaker 2 Set the page size of the label sheet with File gt Page Setup 3 Invoke Insert gt Lists amp Labels 4 Click on New 5 Enter a name for the label 6 Select the database with the addresses 7 Enter the desired database fields in the Mask input field 8 If you choose the Insert as table option under Format enter the number of labels to be printed side by side on each page under Columns and enter the spacing from the upper edge of one label to the upper edge of the next under Minimum height 9 Confirm with OK 10 Click on Insert to insert the label into the document Now make a test print of the first page of the document with File gt Print and look to see if the labels are printed at the correct positions If there are any discrepancies adjust the settings of the Margins as required in the File gt Page Setup dialog Since every printer prints in a somewhat different way it is possible that the rendering can begin too far from the top or end too far from the bottom Adjust the upper page margin accordingly Important Every printer has an unprintable area an are
386. orrectly spelled but are not to be added to the dictionary When you exit TextMaker it forgets the list of ignored words Add Word Advises TextMaker to add the word to its user dictionary TextMaker remembers such words permanently they are no longer underlined in blue see note Note Use the command Add Word only for those German words underlined in blue that are in fact correctly spelled according to the new German spelling rules If you allow words with old spellings rather than new spellings to be added you will be supplying TextMaker with incorrectly spelled words Primary secondary and alternative spellings Please note that the German spelling reform has three different categories of spelling changes In some cases the new spelling must always be used In others the new spelling should be used whenever possible although the old spelling is still allowed In yet other cases any one of several equivalent alternative spellings can be selected You can learn whether a change is obligatory or not by means of the word suggestions in the context menu that appears when you right click on a word that is underlined in blue m Only one spelling allowed If only a single word is presented in the context menu a change to this word is mandatory In other words only the new spelling is allowed Example dass must now be written instead of the word da m Primary and secondary spellings If the cont
387. ou can always give it a keyboard shortcut The advantage of doing that is that you can then apply the style very quickly using a single key press To assign a keyboard shortcut to a style switch to the Style property sheet in the Format gt Character Style dialog position the text cursor in the Shortcut key edit box and press the desired key combination Note If you press a key combination that is already assigned the current assignment is displayed below the Shortcut key edit box In that case you should press the Backspace key to delete this key combination and then enter another one Otherwise you will overwrite the assignment for another style or even for one of TextMaker s commands We recommend using key combinations that include the keys Ctrl Ctrl and shift Shift since these are normally not assigned Applying character styles To apply a character style do the following 1 Select the segment of text to which you want to apply the style 2 Invoke Format gt Character Style 3 Choose the desired style 4 Click on Apply Tip You can also select character styles from the font list box in the Formatting toolbar Even faster If you have assigned a keyboard shortcut to the format style you can apply the style even more quickly Select the text to which you want to apply it and press the assigned key combination The formatting of the selected text is immediately changed to correspond
388. parate parts of each address by checking one of the following options m Space m Tab m User defined here you can enter the separator yourself An example You want to sort the following three paragraphs Peter Miller Tab Tab5 University Ave Tab TabPleasantville NY 12345 Thomas Chris Howe Tab Tab24 Park Drive Tab TabCambridge NJ 20220 Claudia Fisher Tab Tab1024 13th Street Tab TabForest Park IL 98765 In this case you should set the Separator option to Tab since the separate elements of each address name street city are delimited by tabs Advantage Now you can make use of the Sort by option available in the sort command dialog to specify a sort by Column 1 Column 2 or Column 3 Column 1 stands for the names Column 2 for the streets Column 3 for the cities If you selected Space instead of Tab as the separator TextMaker would see every word in a paragraph as belonging to a separate column and would produce an unwanted result Sorting the names for example is not the same as sorting the words that form the separate parts of the names First paragraph contains headings If the first of the selected paragraphs contains headings you should check this option so that TextMaker will not include the first paragraph in the sort Example The selected paragraphs contain addresses The first paragraph contains headings like Name Street City etc that identify the different parts of the addresses I
389. pe in your own format using the abbreviations described in the previous section If you want the date or time to be inserted as a field rather than as fixed text check the Insert as field option TextMaker then creates a field Print date or Print time You will find details about the use of fields in the section above 152 e Fields User Manual TextMaker Inserting special characters Some characters e g the copyright sign the degree sign and the accented characters used in some languages cannot be entered into a text directly by means of the keyboard TextMaker s built in character table provides a convenient means for inserting symbols and other special characters into your text You insert special characters as follows 1 Invoke the command Insert gt Symbol 2 The dialog box that appears gives you access to every character that is available from the current font If you need a character from a different font select it from the Font list in the window 3 The font s characters are organized into sets If the character you want to use is not in the set immediately in view when you can jump to the set in which it is likely to be found by selecting it from the Set list For example you can select Cyrillic to view the font s Cyrillic characters provided the font contains such characters Note Many individual fonts contain only a few of the character sets that are defined However the fonts that are supplied with
390. ph and then insert a carriage return in the middle of the paragraph by pressing the Enter key The following text leaps to the next line and the paragraph is divided In certain cases as when a paragraph is too long and must be divided into two paragraphs this can be done intentionally Here however it was a mistake so press the Backspace key __ to remove the carriage return Deleting large sections of text The above mentioned delete keys are well suited for removing short sections of text but too time consuming for removing larger parts of text For this reason there is yet another method of deleting that involves first selecting text and then pressing the Del Del key to delete it all at once There is more about this in chapter Working with selections beginning on page 57 Undoing changes With the command Edit gt Undo you can cancel recently completed modifications to a document For example if you format text in another font you need only invoke Edit gt Undo and the new formatting will be removed This works not only with formatting but also with practically all text modifications so you can also for example undo the entry or deletion of text The command Undo can be applied repeatedly as needed For example invoke it five times to cancel the last five text modifications By the way you can also invoke this frequently needed command with the key combination Ctrl Z Ctr1 Z Redoing undone
391. played in the status toolbar Example Explanation L 37 Col 8 The text cursor is positioned at line 37 and column 8 on the current page Section 1 The text cursor is positioned in section 1 of the document see chapter Multi column page layouts beginning on page 131 Chapter 1 The text cursor is positioned in chapter 1 of the document see section Dividing a document into chapters beginning on page 109 Page 1 of 2 The text cursor is positioned on page 1 of a document with a total of 2 pages Ins Shows whether Insert Mode Ins or Overwrite Mode Ovr is active Ins Insert mode is active newly entered text will be inserted into existing text Ovr Overwrite mode is active newly entered text will be written over existing text 20 e The application screen User Manual TextMaker The standard setting is Ins You can switch between these two modes with the Ins Ns key Basics This chapter gives you a brief description of TextMaker s most important basic functions Beginners who have not worked much with word processors before now should read these instructions all the way through We recommend that you consider taking the TextMaker Tour in the next chapter which guides you through the program step by step with practical examples Using the keyboard PC keyboards are equipped with some extra keys the so called special keys The most important of them are described here F1 F1 This key invo
392. plied only to the row in which the text cursor is positioned Edit Table Row Eg Height X fo in H J Keep together with next row Cancel I Break page at row I Allow page break in row I Repeat as header row The dialog box for this command offers the following options Height Here you can modify the height of the table rows by selecting from among the following options E Auto This is the default setting When it is selected TextMaker determines the optimum height for the rows automatically 180 e Tables User Manual TextMaker E Exact When you select this option you can specify exactly the height you want the rows to be However in this case the height of the rows will be fixed it will not be automatically adjusted even when it is not sufficient to accommodate the contents of the cells E At least This option represents a combination of the two options above If you enter 1 in here for example the height of the rows will be set to exactly 1 inch provided that this height is sufficient for the contents of the cells However if you enter more text in a cell than can be accommodated in in TextMaker will automatically increase the height to accommodate it Keep together with next row When this option is checked the selected rows and the row immediately following are always kept together If TextMaker determines that an automatic page break should fall between any of these rows it will insert
393. position However moving tabs is easier with the horizontal ruler 84 e Paragraph formatting User Manual TextMaker Using the horizontal ruler All the tab stops that are set for the current paragraph are shown in the horizontal ruler The horizontal leader with some flush left tabs set at various positions With the ruler tab stops can be set moved and deleted To set tabs first select the paragraphs of interest Then to choose the desired tab type click on one of the following icons in the Formatting toolbar L Flush left tab Flush right tab the text ends at the tab position a Centered tab the text is centered on the tab position Decimal tab numbers are aligned on the decimal separator Finally simply click on the ruler on the desired positions to position the tabs If the position of a tab stop doesn t suite you you can move it very easily click on it with the mouse and while holding the mouse button down drag it to another position To clear a tab stop drag it downward outside the ruler Bulleted lists Lists in which each item is placed in its own paragraph and set off with a marker are much easier to read than comma separated lists The markers used for such lists typically little boxes circles etc are called bullets Creating bulleted lists is an easy task for the TextMaker user TextMaker can add bullets to paragraphs and automatically inset them with the press of a key Alternat
394. put field as you would in normal text by moving the text cursor deleting text copying etc It is possible not only to insert fields but also to enter text To begin a new line press the Enter key Tabs are entered with Ctrl Tab Ctri Tab not with Tab Tab When you have finished preparing the mask you can specify the way TextMaker is to insert data records with the following dialog settings mu Insert as Table Insert as Text If you select the Insert as text option in the Format group box data records are simply written in the text one after another according to the mask you specified With the Insert as table option on the other hand TextMaker creates a table with the data Each data record is placed in its own cell in the table You can specify the number of Columns in the table and the Minimum height of each cell Columns If the Insert as table format is selected you can specify here the number of columns the table should contain For example if you want to create an address list with two columns or if you use label sheets with two labels across enter 2 here Minimum height If the Insert as table format is selected you can specify here the minimum height for the cells in the table If O in is given TextMaker controls the cell height automatically in the usual manner for tables the more a cell contains the larger it grows On the other hand an entry of 2 causes TextMaker to set
395. r format 8 HH hour with two places 24 hour format 08 M minute 5 MM minute with two places 05 S second 0 SS second with two places 00 am show am pm following the hour am AM show AM PM following the hour AM In addition to these abbreviations you can use any punctuation characters period slash etc you like in your entry Example If you enter dddd d mmmm yyyy as the format in the Format field the date 4 26 2006 will be represented as Wednesday 26 April 2006 Changing the language You can change the Language of a text segment in the dialog for the Format gt Character command When use this command to format text in a given language the names of months and days of the week that result from date fields are automatically changed accordingly see also section Setting the language beginning on page 280 Inserting the date and time as text With the Insert gt Date Time command you can insert the current date or time into the document as fixed text Unlike the command described on the preceding pages for inserting date and time fields this command uses the current date or time to create a fixed text that will not be updated automatically When you invoke Insert gt Date Time a dialog box appears Here you can select either the date or the time as the basis for the creation of the text and specify the format If none of the predefined formats suits you you can click on the New format button and ty
396. r will no longer be applicable to this paragraph That is to say manually applied paragraph formats take precedence over styles If you want to free such a paragraph of its manual formatting simply select it and reapply the original paragraph style using Format gt Paragraph Style The format of the paragraph will revert to that specified in the style and subsequent changes to the style will be effective on the paragraph The paragraph style Normal A paragraph style called Normal is present by default in every document It has a special significance it is the standard style of paragraph formatting for the document When you start typing text in a new document the Normal style is automatically assigned to the text unless and until you select a different style which becomes effective from the current position If you change the Normal style for example by specifying a new line spacing for it every paragraph in the document is reformatted accordingly excepting those paragraphs formatted with a different line spacing using Format gt Paragraph Moreover paragraphs you enter subsequently will have this new line spacing Creating linked paragraph styles When you create new styles as described at the beginning of this section they are always based on the Normal style So if you change the Normal style all the styles based on it are changed accordingly as long as those styles do not contain explici
397. racter TextMaker immediately replaces ti with the content of the SmartText entry Note If this does not work you have disabled the Expand SmartText entries option Invoke the command Extras gt Preferences switch to the Language property sheet and turn on this option Alternatively you can use a dialog to insert SmartTexts entries in the text by invoking the command Insert gt SmartText choosing the desired entry and then pressing the Insert button The Apply formatting option has the following meaning in this context Off Normally this option is turned off The SmartText entry is accordingly inserted without formatting it is rendered in the currently active font On On the contrary if this option is turned on the entry is inserted with the font type and size that you set in the dialog when you defined the SmartText entry Text styles and font color are also reproduced 300 e Language tools User Manual TextMaker Editing SmartText entries You can edit SmartText entries that you have previously defined with the command Insert gt SmartText mu Creating a New SmartText entry To create a new SmartText entry click the New button see section Creating SmartText entries beginning on page 298 Deleting a SmartText entry To delete an entry select it from the SmartText entries list and then click on the Delete button m Renaming a SmartText entry If you want to change the name of an entry
398. ragraphs with numbering You can use enumeration as many times as you wish within a single document The numbering is automatically reset to one at the beginning of each new enumeration Adding numbering To add numbering to a group of paragraphs proceed as follows 1 Select the paragraphs of interest 2 Invoke Format gt Bullets and Numbering 3 Switch to the Bullets amp Simple numbering property sheet 4 Inthe Type group box select Numbering 156 e Automatic numbering User Manual TextMaker Bullets and Numbering xi Bullets amp Simple numbering Numbered lists p Type C None Bullet ci r Numbering Before Eormat After T ee v Numbering starts with 1 I Skip numbering Character Horizontal position fo 2 in al Vertical position fo pt el cm 5 As required set the desired options in the Numbering group box see the Options section below 6 Confirm with OK The selected paragraphs are immediately enumerated Note You can use as many enumerations as you wish within a single document The numbering is automatically reset at the beginning of every new group of numbered paragraphs More precisely whenever a numbered paragraph is preceded by a paragraph that is not numbered the numbered paragraph s number is automatically set to 1 Skipping paragraphs in an enumeration You can interrupt an enumeration at a given paragraph and then co
399. raphs to which manual paragraph formatting has also been applied see the next section To edit a paragraph style proceed as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style 2 Select the style to be modified from the list 3 Click on Edit 4 Make the desired changes in the style 5 Click on OK 6 Exit the dialog box with Close The style is modified according to your edits Deleting or renaming paragraph styles To delete a style in the current document click on it in the dialog box mentioned above and then click on the Delete button To give a style a new name click on Rename and type the new name To delete or rename styles in a document template open the document template make the changes there and save the template 124 e Styles User Manual TextMaker The scope of paragraph styles You changed a paragraph style but the formatting of some of the paragraphs to which this style had been applied didn t change accordingly This happens when those paragraphs had been reformatted manually An example Let s assume that you define a style specifying the paragraph alignment to be centered If you subsequently change the style s alignment to flush right all the paragraphs to which this style is applied are reformatted accordingly But If you had selected a different alignment for one of these paragraphs with Format gt Paragraph or the Formatting toolbar any changes you make to the paragraph style thereafte
400. rator line or space If you drag an icon a small distance to the right a separator line or space depending on the operating system will be inserted to the left of the icon Removing a separator line or space If you drag the icon that is to the immediate right of the separator line or space a little to the left the separator or space will be removed Resetting a toolbar If you should happen to make a mistake while editing one of the standard toolbars you can always reset the toolbar To do this invoke the View gt Toolbars command select the toolbar to be reset with a mouse click and click the Reset button All the changes you have made to the toolbar will be undone and it will again contain the default icons Creating user defined toolbar icons You can also create user defined icons and add them to TextMaker s toolbars Such icons can be used to start other programs of your choosing To set up a user defined icon for example an icon for starting the Windows Notepad proceed as follows te 2 Invoke the command Extras gt Customize gt Toolbars Select the User category from the Group list Select one of the icons from the Command list The first three icons are already assigned to the Windows Calculator the Windows Character Map and the Windows Control Panel to serve as examples Select the fourth icon for this exercise Click the Edit button A dialog box appears 5 Enter a short description of the p
401. rching and replacing You can search for terms in the text and if required replace them with other terms For example if a text contained several occurrences of the name Smith misspelled Smithe you could direct TextMaker to replace all occurrences of Smithe with Smith In addition it is possible to search and replace formatting such as the formatting for characters and paragraphs Bookmarks Bookmarks provide another way to get quickly to specific points in the document You can set a bookmark at any position in the document you wish After giving the bookmark a name you can use the Edit gt Go to command to return to the bookmarked position any time you wish You can insert as many bookmarks as you wish in a document m The Goto command The Go to command also allows you to move to specific positions in the document according to other criteria for example you can move to a specific page a specific chapter a specific object etc Searching You can search a document for a specific term using the Edit gt Search keyboard shortcut Ctrl F Ctrl F command It is even possible to search for formatting for example for all passages in bold characters see section Searching replacing formatting beginning on page 142 Search and Replace xi Search Replace peel Close Format ne You perform a text search as follows 1 Invoke the Edit gt Search command
402. reba SOERENSEN ASAE INSert Or Overwrite adiran aa aa a e rey aaa era akaa eters Beginning a NEW document ssssssssssrrssesrnesrsnnessnnnnerennnsnnnnennrennenna Opening A GOCUMENE ce echeceediseectechsheetes ceusteebity aE a areni aa ehana AEA Prining a COCUMONE deres eot rta EER KEE RE RER S EEEREN ELE thats Saving aA dOc MEE a Ta r aaraa a aaa edited aaraa aSa AT aSa Exiting the applicatigMe apelarea AEE AEREE R DEENEN The TextMaker Tour A practice lettetiian aaaiad aie he lan len Saving the practice letter ecccceseececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeessaeeeseaeeeenees Simple formatting sei sisi lan eine nee When something goes Wrong eeeeeeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeenenaes Opening files ies din Lahr eel ata wea bia E AA Setting up a letterhead 0 0 2 eee eeeceeeeeee cece eeeeaeeeeaeeseeeeeesaaeseeaaeesenees Paragraph alignment siririn an saan Aa Aa A i 46 TAOS a A E Aa A TAA EAE seat 48 Inserting dates and other fields 0 cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeaes 51 PAGS footers norrir nean anaana aeaa a anaa EOAR aAa sees aE aas Aat 52 Enes and DOrdot S aridan eerren io ARAE AE SAREKAT AE ASTARIA 54 FIMISMOG i Aaen aaaea a aaa aE eE AA aAa a eE 56 Working with selections 57 Selecting tekei notita iaia ton aie ae aint 57 Moving deleting ANd COPYING eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeees 59 Pasting with special formatting 0 ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 61 nsering a docu
403. reet We have taken every care for your personal comfort and the program we have organized for this event will make for an unforgettable afternoon Bring your family along for a day of fun and entertainment Typing mistakes When you make a typing mistake you can immediately delete it by pressing the Backspace key This key is situated above the Enter key If you have followed the example your document ought to look something like this 36 e The TextMaker Tour User Manual TextMaker Untitled 1 _ Oo x Dear Clients This year we have been building more than usual not just for you but also for ourselves The new Escher Complex one of the most daring building projects in town will become our new home We cordially invite you to the opening ceremony The celebration will take place next Saturday at 38 42 Linden Street We have taken every care for your personal comfort and the program we have organized for this event will make for an unforgettable afternoon Bring your family along for a day of fun and entertainment The finished text Next we need to insert an address above the text of our letter To get to the beginning of the document press the key combination Cirl Home Ctrl Home Press the Enter key seven times to insert some blank lines This makes room for our own address which is to be entered later on By the way you can remove blan
404. responding command is invoked Tip If you point the mouse cursor at an icon without clicking a text box appears giving the icon s function There are numerous additional toolbars in TextMaker that you can turn on and off as you choose To do this invoke the command View gt Toolbars or click with the right mouse button on one of the displayed toolbars A menu appears from which you can choose the toolbars to be displayed Customizing toolbars You can change the default toolbars at will and create your own toolbars You will find information about this in the section Customizing toolbars beginning on page 471 18 e The application screen User Manual TextMaker Formatting toolbar Beneath the Function toolbar you find the Formatting toolbar With it you can both examine and modify the most often used formats font bold italic etc for the current text R Normal v Times New Roman vi lio x E B7 U lja a ez liBelea If you select a section of text beforehand formatting changes affect only the selected text Otherwise the text that you subsequently type in is affected For example to choose a different font click on the little arrow to the right of the font name to open a list and then select a font Other icons in the Formatting toolbar are switches that you can turn and off by clicking for example the B for bold Tip If you point the mouse cursor at an icon without clicking a t
405. review BEE Ee wo Three Left Right r Columns Width Spacing A 1 6 93 in Hl 2 H zl Spacing 3 H H gt Above Din IV Equal column width Below Din Height auto x a Gutter line I Page break Apply to I Restart auto numbers whole document x 3 Important Make sure Selected text is selected in the Apply to list box 4 Enter the desired number of columns in the Number field 5 TextMaker determines the optimum column widths automatically However you can specify manually both the column width and the spacing between columns in the Columns group box if you need to do so see the next section The selected text is now formatted in the specified number of columns If you want to convert multi columned text back to single columned text follow the procedure described above but enter 1 for the number of columns Options for the Format gt Section command The dialog box for the Format gt Section command gives you access to the following options 132 e Multi column page layouts User Manual TextMaker Columns property sheet You specify the number of columns and their format on the Columns property sheet E Presets group box Here you can select one of several pre defined column layouts by clicking on it with the mouse Columns group box Lets you specify the number width and spacing of columns Enter the desired number of columns at Number
406. rm with OK The font size for a style edited in this manner will always be 80 of the size specified for the style on which it is based Paragraph styles You can save a frequently needed paragraph format indentation tab stops alignment etc in a paragraph style and apply it repeatedly to any paragraph you like For example if you want the headings in your document to be in large bold type and centered simply create a paragraph style called Heading and apply it to the desired paragraphs Note The difference between character styles see section Character styles beginning on page 115 and paragraph styles is that character styles contain only saved character formatting typeface text styling etc while paragraph styles contain both character formatting and paragraph formatting Moreover character styles are applicable to individual characters while paragraph styles are applicable only to complete paragraphs Creating paragraph styles To create a paragraph style do as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style Paragraph Style Ea Edit Delete RENAME 2 Click on the New button 3 Give the paragraph style whatever name you like 4 A dialog box much like the Format gt Paragraph dialog appears Here specify the desired paragraph formatting see section Paragraph formatting beginning on page 73 on Tip If you will need the paragraph style frequently you can assign a
407. rmatting described in this chapter applies to the whole document Thus all pages will have the same header and footer the paper format will remain constant throughout the document etc Chapters provide a way around this limitation With the Insert gt Breaks gt Chapter break command you can divide a document into as many chapters as you wish This has the following effects on the page formatting of the document Paper format orientation and margins can be set separately for each chapter m Each chapter can have its own master page and by extension its own headers and footers mu The page numbering can be reset as needed to any beginning value whatever in each individual chapter m If you check the Facing pages option in the chapter formatting dialog you can set up different headers footers and master pages for the chapter s left and right facing pages Optionally the pages can be printed with a gutter m You can specify that a chapter should always begin on a left or right page If you specify for example a right page TextMaker will automatically insert an empty page into the document as required to prevent the first page of the chapter from falling on a left page To the extent that it provides these possibilities the division of a document into chapters makes sense in a variety of situations not only when you are writing a long work that contains chapters in the ordinary sense For example it could be t
408. rn a filter expression like Invoice tmd TextMaker will find all TextMaker documents whose filenames begin with Invoice If you specify a unique filename like Invoice tmd only files with this one name will be found m File type From this list you can choose the type of the files to be targeted in the search For example if you want to search for files in Rich Text Format select this format from the File type list m Folders Here you can select the folder in which TextMaker is to carry out the search Include subfolders If this option is enabled TextMaker searches not only the selected folder but also all folders below the selected folder m Title Subject Author Keywords By making entries in these fields you can target your search on the contents of the summaries see section Document summary that are included in your documents If you fill in several fields TextMaker will search for documents that meet all your conditions For example if you enter tax in the Keywords field and Smith in the Author field only those documents whose summaries contain corresponding entries for both fields will be found You will get different search results depending on the precision with which you specify the search terms For example if you typed tax as the search term in the Keywords field your search would also turn up documents whose keywords contain tax increase and my income tax etc
409. rogram to be started in the Description field Windows Notepad for example 6 Enter the complete path and filename for the program to be started in the Command line field for example c windows notepad exe If you don t know the path and filename off the top of your head you can click on the Browse button to search for the program file on your hard disk 7 Optional If the program s own icon is not the one you want to use to represent the program in the toolbar you can enter the path and name for an icon file that you want to use in the Icon file field Note however that the icons used in toolbars are somewhat smaller than the usual Windows icons 8 Confirm with OK The user defined icon is now set up If you want to add it to one of the toolbars drag it with the mouse into the desired toolbar As soon as you exit the dialog box with Close you can try your newly created icon Clicking on it should start Windows Notepad If it doesn t work this is because you have entered the program path or filename incorrectly In that case edit the icon as described above to correct the error Customizing keyboard shortcuts As you know TextMaker s most frequently used commands can be invoked with keyboard shortcuts For example you can execute the File gt Save command very quickly by pressing the key combination Ctrl s Ctr1 S With the Extras gt Customize gt Keyboard Mappings command these keyboard
410. rsor in the desired data field and make your changes You can move to the next field with the Tab Tab key to the previous field with Shift Tab Shift Tab Note To save changes to a data record you do not have to invoke any special command because changes to the active data record are saved automatically when you page to another record or exit the database Adding a new data record If you want to expand your database to include an additional entry invoke the database module command Edit gt Append record or press the keyboard shortcut for this command Ctrl N Ctrl N This command can also be invoked with the oP icon in the toolbar TextMaker adds an empty data record to the database and positions the text cursor in the first field of the record You can immediately begin filling in the record New records are always added after already existing records Duplicating a data record With the command Edit gt Duplicate record you can create the duplicate of a data record To do this page to the desired record and then invoke the command Duplicated data records are always added at the end of the database just like newly defined data records Deleting and restoring data records Data records that are no longer needed can be deleted at any time in the database module Deleting a data record To delete a data record invoke the command Edit gt Delete current record keyboard shortcut Ctrl y Ctrl Y Th
411. s 1 Invoke the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command 2 Switch to the Numbered lists property sheet 3 Click on the New button 4 Give the new numbered list whatever name you like for example Headings and confirm with OK 5 Important Select the Hierarchical list option in the Numbered list group box 6 Important Check the Use paragraph s outline level as list level option 7 You can change other settings to suite your wishes or simply retain the default settings You will find information about the individual options in section Options in the Numbered Lists dialog beginning on page 162 8 Confirm with OK 9 The numbered list is now defined and you can exit the dialog box by clicking on Close 372 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker Step 3 Applying the numbered list to the Heading 1 paragraph style This final step is the real key once you apply the numbered list that you created in the previous step to the Heading 1 paragraph style everything else follows automatically every existing and newly inserted heading will be numbered automatically Even subordinate headings of the second third etc levels will be numbered because their styles are based on the Heading 1 style Proceed with this step as follows 1 Invoke the Format gt Paragraph Style command 2 Select the Heading 1 paragraph style 3 Click on the Edit button 4 A dialog
412. s To create SmartText entries choose one of the following methods A Under dialog control To create for example a SmartText entry with the name ti containing Thank you for your inquiry proceed as follows 1 2 Invoke the command Insert gt SmartText Click on the New button to create a new SmartText entry Give the SmartText entry a name ti in our example Later the SmartText entry can be called up by means of its name Confirm with OK You are now back in the main dialog 298 e Language tools User Manual TextMaker 5 Now type the text of the SmartText entry in the large input field Thank you for your inquiry in our example 6 For TextMaker to remember the formatting of the entry you must enable the Apply formatting option Now you can use the miniature Formatting toolbar above the input field to set the font text emphasis and color 7 Exit the dialog with Close The SmartText entry has now been created In the next section Inserting SmartText entries you will learn how to call it out B Using the background spell checker When you have activated the background spell checker SmartText entries can alternatively be created as follows 1 Make sure that the Background spell checking option on the Language property sheet in the Extras gt Preferences dialog box is checked 2 Type ti and press the space bar 3 TextMaker now underlines ti in red since it
413. s call it Fine print and apply the style to those sections Note The difference between character styles and paragraph styles see section Paragraph styles beginning on page 121 is that character styles contain only saved character formats while paragraph styles contain both saved character formats and saved paragraph formats indentation tab stops alignment etc Accordingly character styles are applicable to individual characters while paragraph styles are applicable only to complete paragraphs Creating character styles To create a character style do the following 1 Invoke Format gt Character Style Character Style Eg Apply Close RENAME 2 Click on the New button 3 Give the character style any name you like 4 A dialog box very much like the dialog for Format gt Character appears Here you specify the desired character formatting see section Character formatting beginning on page 63 5 If you will be needing this style frequently you can assign a keyboard shortcut to it see below 6 When all the desired settings have been made click on OK to define the style 7 Exit the Character Style dialog box with Close The style is now defined and ready for use You will learn how to use it in a moment in section Applying character styles 116 e Styles User Manual TextMaker Using keyboard shortcuts If you need a format style very frequently y
414. s object s properties dialog To lock a forms object do the following 1 If Forms mode is currently activated exit this mode with View gt Forms Mode 2 Select the object to be protected with a mouse click 3 Invoke the Object gt Properties command 4 Switch to the Properties property sheet 5 There check the Locked option 6 Confirm with OK The object is now locked accordingly it can no longer be changed in Forms mode In addition it is no longer possible to click on it in Forms mode or to jump to it with the Tab Tab key Special considerations for tables With tables you can specify a locked or unlocked state applicable in Forms mode for every single table cell To lock table cells select them invoke the Table gt Cell Properties command dialog switch to the Format property sheet and check the Locked option Once locked the cells can no longer be edited in Forms mode and they are skipped when the Tab Tab key is pressed to jump to the next cell or forms object Naturally you can lock not only individual cells but whole tables To lock a whole table simply select it and then use the procedure described above Protecting forms Before you put a newly created form to use you should protect it from being changed When a form is ready for use the form itself should no longer be subject to change and only the objects in the form that are intended to be filled in should be changeable The following me
415. s command the corresponding number of rows columns will be inserted For example if you have selected 3 rows 3 additional rows will be inserted instead of only one Joining and splitting table cells This section describes how you can join table cells combine several cells to make one cell and also split them separate cells into multiple cells Joining table cells You can join together neighboring cells of a table any time you wish That is you can combine them to make a single cell You do this as follows 1 Select the cells to be joined 2 Invoke the Table gt Join Cells command The cells are immediately combined In this process the contents of the original cells are not lost they are combined in the resulting cell The content of each original cell is placed in a separate paragraph 178 e Tables User Manual TextMaker Splitting table cells You can split table cells any time you wish that is you can break them into multiple cells You do this as follows 1 Position the text cursor in the cell you want to split 2 Invoke the Table gt Split Cells command 3 A dialog box appears Enter the number of rows and columns into which the cell should be split in this dialog 4 Confirm with OK The cell is immediately split according to your specifications Splitting several cells at once Optionally you can select multiple neighboring cells before invoking the Table gt Split Cells command
416. s handled in order to ensure that pages have the desired appearance Keep with next If this option is enabled TextMaker is prevented from inserting an automatic page break that would separate the current paragraph from the paragraph following Instead TextMaker inserts the break before the current paragraph If several paragraphs are selected these paragraphs and the paragraph that follows next after them are kept together Application example If you enable Keep with next for a header you can avoid the situation in which a heading would fall at the end of a page and the text belonging to it would begin on the following page m Keep together Enabling this option prevents TextMaker from inserting a page break in the middle of the paragraph Instead TextMaker puts the automatic page break before the paragraph so that all of it falls on the next page Avoid widows orphans This option prevents paragraphs from being broken in such a way that so called widows or orphans would result A widow or orphan is a single line of a paragraph that has been separated by a page break from all the other lines of the paragraph Widows and orphans are not especially pleasant to the eye and interfere with the reading of a longer document If you enable this option pagination is performed in such a way that a paragraph is not broken where the break would leave fewer than two of its lines on a given page If a paragraph cannot be broken in this wa
417. s include a line with information like Your reference Your letter of etc We want to insert such a line now and in the course of doing so to get acquainted with the application of tabs Note You insert tabs by pressing the Tab key Although this key is labeled with two arrows _y_ on most keyboards the designator Tab Tab is used in this manual to better distinguish this key from the arrow keys Now move the text cursor to the beginning of the 17th line and type the following line Your reference Tab fabYour letter of Tab TabOur reference Tab TabOur letter of Tab TalbDate Next format this line in the Arial font 8 point You have now inserted tabs into the text but you have not yet determined their exact positions To do this set the tab stops By default TextMaker automatically puts a tab stop every 0 5 inch but in general you should not adopt this convention which originated with the typewriter Tab stops can be set with the command Format gt Tabs or with the help of the Formatting toolbar and the horizontal ruler The horizontal ruler If the horizontal ruler is not visible at the top of the document window you must turn it on first with the command View gt Horizontal Ruler You set tab stops as follows 1 Select the paragraph in which the tab stops are to be set If you want to adjust the tab stops of several paragraphs you must first select these paragraphs as pr
418. s of interest invoke Format gt Paragraph and make the desired changes m To change the paragraph formatting while typing new text set the desired formatting with Format gt Paragraph without anything selected The current paragraph is re formatted according to your settings Moreover from this point on every new paragraph that you begin by pressing the Enter key takes on the same new format until you change the paragraph formatting again Paragraph styles for the advanced user You will find that paragraph styles can relieve you of a considerable amount of the work involved in formatting paragraphs With their help you can apply pre defined formats to paragraphs very quickly You will find information about this topic in the chapter Styles beginning on page 115 Units of measure You can enter values in TextMaker s dialog boxes not only in inches but also in other units of measure To enter a value in specific units simply add one of the following units of measure after the number Unit Remark cm centimeter in inch 1 in equals 2 54 cm pt point 72 pt equal 1 in pi pica character 1 pi equals 12 pt The default unit of measure depends on your computer s region settings For example if you type 7 62 cm as the position for a tab stop TextMaker puts it at 3 in 7 62 cm Indents With the help of indents you can change the left and right margins of paragraphs to
419. s paragraph style Thus to the extent that you have not made any manual changes to the formatting of text in the footnotes changes you make to the Footnote text style will affect the text in all footnotes To edit this style proceed as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style 2 Select the Footnote Text style from the list then click on Edit 3 A dialog appears to facilitate changes to the formatting Here make the desired changes Notice that you can for example click on the Character button to change the character formatting for this style 4 Exit the dialogs with OK followed by Close You will find general information about the use of styles in chapter Styles beginning on page 115 Formatting footnote markers TextMaker automatically formats the footnote marker as superscript However you can change the marker s formatting according to your preference To do this select the footnote marker invoke the Format gt Character command and make the desired changes Tip By default all footnote markers are formatted with the Footnote Reference character style note character style not paragraph style Thus if you change this character style with the Format gt Character Style command all footnote markers in the entire document will be affected Footnote options The dialog box for the Insert gt Footnote gt Footnote command contains an Options button that gives you access to additiona
420. s substantially easier if you enable the Mail merge toolbar To do this invoke the command View gt Toolbars and activate the Mail merge toolbar in the Toolbars list box The Mail merge toolbar is brought up in response You can use this toolbar as follows m Click on the little arrows at right and left to page from record to record m Enter the number of the record to be displayed in the edit box in the middle and press the Enter key m When you want to see the field names again instead of the test data records page to data record 0 or enter a 0 in the edit box and press the Enter key In response TextMaker unchecks the Show merge record option Tip When you move the mouse pointer over one of the other icons without clicking a text box appears indicating the function of the icon Practice letter Practice makes perfect Therefore in this section we want to create a form letter for practice Before you begin start a new document with File gt New Assign the example database tmw dbf that was provided with the program to this document using the command Extras gt Set Database Under Windows this file can be found in the SoftMaker folder under My Documents Then type the following text Naturally you are free to abbreviate it or to type something completely different What matters is simply this Important Do not type those parts of the text that are enclosed in curly braces th
421. s to 0 it will be shown as 3 but if you multiply A by 2 the result shown will be 5 not 6 Therefore TextMaker also comes with a function called ROUND for real rounding It can be applied as in the following example A ROUND 2 5 0 The function s arguments are the value to be rounded and the number of decimal places to which it is to be rounded separated by a semicolon In the example above the value of 3 is assigned to the variable A You will find detailed information about all TextMaker s computational functions in section Formulas and functions beginning on page 353 350 e Calculations in the text User Manual TextMaker Updating calculations When you enter or edit a calculation with Insert gt Calculation and then confirm with OK TextMaker automatically updates all the calculations in the document However in certain situations the results of calculations can appear outdated For example if you paste from another document a segment of text containing variables that are also used in the current document TextMaker inevitably displays false results on the screen And If a table contains calculations referencing its cells TextMaker cannot for performance reasons check each time the content of a cell is changed to see if this change affects the results of the calculations The command Extras gt Update Fields keyboard shortcut F9 F9 is provided for such situations When you invoke it TextMaker up
422. s work not only in Outline view but also in the normal view Selecting the outline levels to be displayed To enable you to gain a better overview of a document s structure in Outline view TextMaker provides you with a way to hide the normal text while leaving the headings visible It also allows you to hide headings below a specified level whenever required The Outline toolbar provides buttons for this purpose as follows 12345 6 7 8 Q Af Text The Text button furthest to the right is especially helpful in this regard With it you can control whether headings only or headings together with associated text are displayed You can activate or deactivate this button by clicking on it with the mouse When the button is activated the text is displayed When it is deactivated only the headings remain visible 366 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker With the other buttons you can specify the outline levels to be displayed A click on the 1 button takes care of hiding all headings with outline levels below 1 so that only the major headings remain visible A click on the 3 button makes all headings of level 3 and higher visible etc By default the All button is activated thus TextMaker displays headings of all levels Expanding collapsing single headings As just described in Outline view you can use the buttons 1 through 9 to hide details of the outline s structure and view onl
423. s you to edit the following properties of a header or footer frame m Width Here you can change the width of the header or footer frame Page width This is the default setting The frame extends from the left page margin to the right page margin Whole page If you choose this option the frame will extend over the entire width of the page from the left edge of the page to the right edge Height Here you can change the height of the frame Growing This is the default setting The height of the frame is adjusted automatically The more text you enter the larger the frame becomes Fixed If you select this option you can specify the height of the frame yourself Note With this setting TextMaker will display a red bar at the bottom edge of the frame whenever the header or footer text grows too large to be fitted completely in the frame If this bar appears you should enter a greater value for the fixed height select the Growing option or reduce the amount of text in the frame mu Distance to edge Here you can specify the amount of space TextMaker should leave between the frame and the top or bottom edge of the page mu Distance to text Here you can specify the amount of space TextMaker should leave between the frame and the normal body text 104 e Page formatting User Manual TextMaker Margins Here you can change the margins inside the frame For example if you set the left inside margin to 0 5 in all text
424. section Object properties Shadow beginning on page 231 m Properties Here you can change general properties See the section Object properties Properties property sheet beginning on page 234 For pictures there is an additional property sheet with more options Picture property sheet On this property sheet you can change various settings that are specifically for pictures Colors group box Options that determine the colors with which the picture will be rendered Original colors The picture will be rendered with its original colors Grayscale The picture will be rendered in shades of gray B W The picture will be rendered in monochrome default black on a background default white If you wish you can select other colors for the Foreground color and Background color 244 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker Cropping group box Here you can cut away parts of the picture This is useful when you need only a certain part of it The entries are percentages For example if you want to crop the upper forth of the picture you must enter the number 25 in the Top field E Settings group box Here you can vary the brightness contrast and gamma value a color balance adjustment that affects the brightness Transparent Color group box Here you can make settings that affect the transparency of the picture Detect automatically The transparency of the picture is based on the data in the picture
425. select it from the list and click on the Rename button A dialog box appears and you can enter the new name there m Editing a SmartText entry To edit an entry select it from the list and then click in the large input field Now you can modify the content of the SmartText entry Furthermore you can change the formatting by using the miniature Formatting toolbar above the input field Of course the Apply formatting option must be enabled before you can do this When you have made the desired changes click on the Save button Inserting a SmartText entry To insert a SmartText entry into the text select it from the list and click on the Insert button see also section Inserting SmartText entries beginning on page 300 Closing the dialog Finally you can exit the dialog with the Close button If the active SmartText entry has been changed TextMaker will ask automatically if it should save the changes Database Writing letters is only one side of the coin It is almost as important to keep your address database up to date so that you can access the address quickly TextMaker provides an easy to use dBase compatible database module for this purpose It is seamlessly integrated into the word processor and provides all the functions needed to manage addresses and other information You can enter and edit data search for specific items and much more In this chapter you will learn everything you need to know to work w
426. self The predefined Standard and TextMaker Classic mappings cannot be renamed or removed Editing the shortcuts in a keyboard mapping The Extras gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings command is not only for setting up and managing keyboard mappings The most important function of this command is the modification of the shortcuts contained in a mapping The Edit button handles this function Assigning a shortcut for a command When you find that you are using one of the menu commands very frequently you should assign a shortcut for it so that in the future you will be able to execute it quickly with a simple keystroke combination As an example we will assign the shortcut Ctrl F12 Ctrl F12 to the Format gt Standard command Proceed as follows 1 Invoke the Extras gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings command 2 If necessary select the desired keyboard mapping if you want to modify a keyboard mapping other than the one that is currently activated 3 Click on the Edit button 4 Select a command category from the Group list Then from the Command list select the command whose shortcut you want to modify In our example you would select Format in the Group list and Standard from the Command list 5 Click in the Please press accelerator field and then press the desired shortcut in the example you would press Ctrl F12 Ctri F12 Hint If you make a typing mistake you can always press the backspace
427. shortcuts can be customized as desired You can assign new shortcuts to commands and change or delete existing shortcuts 478 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Keyboard Mappings EI Apply Close New Delete Rename TextMaker Classic Moreover you can work with complete keyboard mappings The keyboard shortcuts for all the commands are stored in a keyboard mapping When you switch between two keyboard mappings all the shortcuts change accordingly To customize TextMaker s keyboard shortcuts use the following buttons in the Extras gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings dialog box E Apply button Activate the selected keyboard mapping mu New button Create a new keyboard mapping Note When all you want to do is add or change a few of the standard keyboard shortcuts it is not necessary to set up your own keyboard mapping Simply click on the Edit button and change the standard keyboard mapping E Delete button Delete a keyboard mapping m Rename button Rename a keyboard mapping m Edit button Edit the keyboard shortcuts in a keyboard mapping m Reset button Reset the shortcuts in a keyboard mapping to the default possible only for the predefined Standard and TextMaker Classic mappings Detailed information is given on the following pages Activating a keyboard mapping You can select which keyboard mapping is to be active with the Extras gt Customi
428. so be inserted in the form of frames The difference An OLE object frame like all types of frames occupies a fixed position on the page Thus it does not move when you add or delete text above it Inserting OLE object frames Note OLE objects can be used only in the Windows version of TextMaker To insert an OLE object frame do the following 1 Invoke the Object gt New OLE Object Frame command If you have activated Object mode you can alternatively click on the icon in the Object toolbar 2 Use the mouse to draw a rectangle in the document representing the desired position and size of the frame Or If you prefer you can simply click on the position at which you want the upper left corner of the object to be situated The object will then be inserted in its original size 3 A dialog box appears and presents an Object Type list Select the Object Type corresponding to the application from which TextMaker is to obtain the OLE object 4 Confirm with OK to start the application for the selected object type 246 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker 5 Create the object in this application 6 Exit the application 7 When closing the application might ask you whether you want to update the object in the TextMaker document If it does answer Yes The OLE object is immediately inserted No special action is required to insert the frame on top of existing body text the text is automatic
429. sources and places it at the end of the document Detailed information about these topics is presented on the following pages Indices An index is an alphabetized list of important keywords that occur in a document giving the pages on which these words are found In this section you will learn how to set up an index Preparing an index Before TextMaker can create an index you must specify the terms that should appear in it To do this you add them to a keyword list Adding terms to the keyword list To add a term to the keyword list do the following 1 Select the term that should appear in the index This can be a word a part of a word or a phrase 2 Invoke Extras gt Index gt Add Index Entry 3 By default TextMaker records only the position of the occurrence of the term that is currently selected If you want TextMaker to record in the keyword list the positions of all occurrences of the term in the text check the Index all occurrences option see below for additional information 4 Click on OK Now you have added the selected term to the list of keywords TextMaker records in this list not only the term itself but also the position of its occurrence in the text Later when the index is created this term will appear in it and the number of the page on which the term was selected as a keyword will appear to the right of the term For the index to fulfill its function it is important to select the position a
430. spacing with a given minimum The At least setting provides an automatic line spacing of 100 but prevents any reduction below the specified minimum value So if you enter 12 points as a minimum value TextMaker uses normal automatic line spacing as long as you use font sizes of 10 points or more but it keeps the line spacing at 12 points when you use smaller font sizes By default the line spacing is set to Auto and 100 percent There are also keyboard shortcuts for the most useful settings m ctrl Ctri 1 Automatic single line spacing 100 m Cwl 5 Ctr 5 Automatic one and a half line spacing 150 m Ctrl 2 Ctri 2 Automatic double line spacing 200 Spacing before after Besides the line spacing you can specify the amount of empty space to be added above the first line and below the last line of a paragraph You do this in the Paragraph Spacing group box in the dialog box of the Format gt Paragraph command The following options are available here Option Meaning Before Here enter the amount of spacing to be added between the end of the previous paragraph and the beginning of the current paragraph After Here you can set the amount of spacing that TextMaker should reserve between the end of the current paragraph and the beginning of the next paragraph Paragraph alignment In TextMaker there are four kinds of paragraph alignment listed here with their corresponding keyboard shortcuts Flush left
431. spell checker will refer to the German dictionary You can change the language within a document as often as you like and of course you can format a whole document in a foreign language Back to the default language To reformat a segment of text in the default language select it and assign the Default language to it with the Format gt Character command as described above No language If you format a segment of text as No language no hyphenation will be performed on it at all In addition the spell checker will skip this segment You will find additional information about this topic in section Setting the language beginning on page 280 Setting the hyphenation frequency If you wish you can specify how often the hyphenator should break words or even turn the hyphenator off You can do this separately for each paragraph 80 e Paragraph formatting User Manual TextMaker To do so first select the paragraphs of interest then invoke Format gt Paragraph and make the desired setting in the Hyphenation dropdown list The following options are available Setting Effect None No hyphenation is performed Always Hyphenation is attempted in successive lines without limit This is the default setting Every 2 Lines Hyphenation is attempted only in every second line Every 3 Lines Hyphenation is attempted only in every third line Thus with None you turn hyphenation completely off for the selected paragraph Wit
432. st way to perform these tasks is to make use of the plus and minus symbols at the left the headings By clicking on one of these symbols you can select the associated heading and any text that is subordinated to it Then you can delete copy or move the contents of your selection with the usual commands in the Edit menu see chapter Working with selections beginning on page 57 For example to move a heading and its associated text proceed as follows 1 Click on the plus or minus symbol to the left of the heading In this way you select the heading including all text subordinated to it 2 Invoke the Edit gt Cut command 3 Position the text cursor at the beginning of the line before which you want to reinsert the text that you just cut 4 Invoke Edit gt Insert The heading and its associated text have now been moved Formatting headings There is nothing magical about headings They are just paragraphs that have been assigned to different outline levels Accordingly headings can be formatted as desired using the formatting commands with which you are already familiar 368 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker Tip Formatting all the headings at a given level collectively keyword paragraph style TextMaker formats headings automatically with specific paragraph styles level one headings are always formatted with the Heading 1 paragraph style level two headings with the Heading 2 style
433. t gt Restore deleted records Permanently removing deleted data records compress database If you want to actually remove all the data records marked for deletion have TextMaker compress the database The command Edit gt Compress database is responsible for this After querying you it permanently removes all the records marked for deletion from the database file Sorting the database You can also sort databases To do this invoke the command Edit gt Sort database in the database module This function can also be invoked with the icon on the Function toolbar Field 1 Field 2 Cancel Order Ascending Descending Normally you choose just one field as the basis for the sort however you can also sort on two fields For example to sort the all the records by last name and the records containing the same last names by first name select NAME 1 under Field 1 and FIRSTNAME under Field 2 As soon as you confirm with OK the data records are sorted and the database is saved in the new order Note When sorting a database the data records are physically reordered in the database This action cannot be undone Closing a database When you want to close the currently opened database invoke the command File gt Close The database is automatically saved and then closed Alternatively you can use the command File gt Copy record and close which does the same thing except that it first
434. t size assigned to the paragraph at the right of the bullet m Character button custom bullets only If you have selected a bullet from the Custom row the two options mentioned above are replace by a Character button Click on this button if you want to change the character formatting size color emphasis etc of the bullet Tip If you do not make any changes to the character format the bullet will automatically use the character format of the paragraph at its right Horizontal position Allows you to specify how far the text should be indented to the right to make room for the bullet mu Vertical position Allows you to specify the vertical position of the bullet Negative values cause the bullet to be lowered positive values cause it to be raised Additional indent You can use this option to indent the entire list item including the bullet to the right Options for numbering If you have selected the Numbering option in the Type group box the following options appear in the dialog Numbering text With this and the following options you can change the format of the numbering as required The Numbering text edit box is filled in automatically by the program However you can always make changes 1 for example represents the list level 1 component of the number in the specified format see the next option If for example 1 is entered in this box and the 1 2 3 format is selected le
435. t important functions using some practical examples Note The illustrations in this manual were prepared for the most part with the Windows version of TextMaker On other operating systems some of the controls have a slightly different appearance but their modes of operation are identical When working through the exercises don t be afraid to experiment with new commands as you get acquainted with them There is no harm done if something goes completely amiss We have provided example documents for every lesson this way at the beginning of each new lesson you can open the appropriate example document and use it to get started A practice letter Ready for the first exercise Then start TextMaker now Note When you start TextMaker for the first time you will be asked to enter your name and address TextMaker needs this information to automatically personalize the document templates for letters etc that come with the program You can always change this information later with the command Extras gt Preferences see the section Preferences General property sheet beginning on page 449 After the program starts it always displays an empty document window in which you can immediately start typing The text cursor blinks at the beginning of the document When you type something it always appears just behind the text cursor which moves forward to accommodate it To start we would like to begin a si
436. t is opened If the user enters the read password he is permitted to open the document but not to save it If he enters the write password he has full access Thus he can both read and also save the document If he enters a false password or nothing at all access to the document is denied Disabling document protection When you succeed in opening a read or write protected document by entering the correct password protection is disabled but only temporarily When you close the document protection is again armed and the query for the password reappears the next time someone makes an attempt to open the document To disable the protection on a document permanently do the following 1 Open the document 5 6 Invoke the command File gt Properties Switch to the Protection property sheet Select the No protection option Confirm with OK Save the document so that the changes will take effect Document protection is now permanently disabled The next time someone opens the document no password query will interfere All users can now open and save it 438 e Document protection User Manual TextMaker Working with other file formats Normally TextMaker saves documents in its native file format namely the TextMaker document format TextMaker documents can be recognized easily by the filename extension tmd that they share When you save a document TextMaker appends this extension to
437. t specifications of their own for line spacing in this example So By default all paragraph styles are linked to the Normal style However when you create a new style you can specify another paragraph style as the basis for it in Based on To create a style based on a specific style other than Normal do the following 1 Invoke Format gt Paragraph Style 2 Click on the New button 3 Give the paragraph style a name 4 Now comes the distinctive step In Based on select the style to which the new style is to be linked 5 Next you can choose the desired formatting etc The print version of this manual serves as example of the use of linked paragraph styles Here the paragraph styles for all heading levels are based on a single paragraph style that specifies among other things an increased spacing from the preceding paragraph When we reviewed the printed proofs we determined that the spacing we had chosen was too small To correct the problem all we had to do was increase it in that one underlying style immediately the spacing of all the headings grew Had we based the header styles on Normal we would have had to change each of these styles separately Document templates As you learned from the last two sections character and paragraph styles are saved in the document in which they were created If you want to use such styles in other documents as well you should save them in a
438. t to calculate the volume of a swimming pool that measures 23x13x7 feet Accordingly you proceed as follows e 1 Type e g the text The volume is 2 Invoke Insert gt Calculation or press F2 F2 3 Enter 23 13 7 in the Formula field and confirm with OK The result is now inserted into the text 2093 The number 2093 can be edited and formatted like normal text but it is in fact a field that is a symbolic place holder for the calculation 23 13 7 You see this when you enable the Display field names option on the View property sheet in the File gt Properties dialog Then Formula 23 13 7 appears in the text instead of 2093 Editing calculations The formula for the calculation can be changed at any time To do this select the result 2093 and again invoke Insert gt Calculation The formula 23 13 7 is displayed in the dialog box If the swimming pool had different measurements you could simply change the formula accordingly Following your OK the result would be recalculated and placed in the text Variables in calculations You can save the result of a calculation for reference in other calculations by assigning it to a variable 342 e Calculations in the text User Manual TextMaker Note The names of variables may contain only letters numbers and underscores _ They must always begin with letters A maximum of 16 characters is allowed The cases of letters are ignored To use
439. t which a term is added to the keyword list with care For example the word print occurs frequently in a word processor manual When indexing this word in makes more sense to add to the keyword list only those occurrences that are found in a section of the document dealing particularly with the topic of printing than to add all occurrences This way the index will not be overloaded with useless references Adding multiple occurrences of a keyword By the way the same term can be added to the keyword list multiple times Such a term appears in the index only once but the entry for it includes multiple page numbers Note The cases of letters in keywords are ignored If both Print and print are added to the keyword list the index will collect references to both terms under the single entry Print 376 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker Adding all occurrences of a term In some cases it makes sense to create an index entry that refers to all the positions in the text at which the keyword appears Naturally you can do this by selecting each separate occurrence of the term and adding it to the list in the manner described above However TextMaker can relieve you of this task To enable TextMaker to do this check the Index all occurrences option when you add the keyword to the list with Extras gt Index gt Add Index Entry TextMaker will then search the entire text for the given
440. t will be deleted without being moved into the clipboard Using the keyboard shortcut for this command is even faster the Del Del key Cut The command Edit gt Cut likewise deletes the content of a selection but not permanently Instead it places this content in the clipboard so that the content remains available for insertion later anywhere in the document There is also a keyboard shortcut for cutting Ctr xyCtrl X Copy The Edit gt Copy shortcut Ctrl C Ctr1 copies the content of the selection into the clipboard Paste You use the Edit gt Paste command to insert the content of the clipboard into the text Move the text cursor to the place in the text where you want to make the insertion and then invoke the command or press Ctrl v Ctr V You can insert the content of the clipboard multiple times in this manner In case it still isn t completely clear how the clipboard helps you delete copy or move something you can consider the whole subject once again from a different point of view How do I delete text Select the text segment and either cut it with Ctrl x Ctrl to place it in the clipboard or delete it permanently with Del Del How do I move text Select the text segment and cut it with Ctrl x Ctrl X Then move the text cursor to the place in the text where you want it to appear and reinsert it with Cu vy Ctrl V How do I copy text Select the text segment and copy it into the clipb
441. tabase and confirmed with OK TextMaker knows the database from which you want to insert fields and you can proceed as described in the next section TextMaker remembers which database has been assigned to the document as soon as you save it The next time you open the document this database is again assigned to it Of course you can assign a different database to the document any time you like Detaching a database You can detach a database by invoking the command Extras gt Set Database and clicking on Clear database Inserting database fields Once you have decided how you want to position the relevant database fields in your form letter you can insert them in the text with Insert gt Field When the letter is printed these fields will be replaced with the actual contents of the fields from the database record by record Specifically you proceed as follows to insert a database field 1 Move the text cursor to the desired position 2 Invoke Insert gt Field 3 In the list box Field type select the item Database field 4 Now you can select the field to be inserted from the list box Data 5 When you click on Insert TextMaker inserts the field into the text and displays the field name in curly braces NAME for example Proceed in exactly the same way to insert additional database fields at other places in the text until the form letter has the desired appearance Database fields can be formatted like normal
442. tc For example if Offset is set to 0 in the object is centered horizontally on the page If the offset is 2 in the center of the object is positioned 2 in to the right of the center of the page etc Inside The object is positioned from the left if it falls on a right hand page odd page number or from the right if it falls on a left hand page Outside The object is positioned from the right if it falls on a right hand page odd page number or from the left if it falls on a left hand page These two options work as described above only when the Facing pages option has been checked in the Format gt Chapter dialog Otherwise TextMaker treats all pages as right hand pages Relative to With the Relative to options you specify the document element that should serve as a reference for the Offset Option Effect Page The offset is relative to the page more precisely to the page edges The page margins are not taken into account Page borders The offset is relative to the page margins If you increase or decrease the margins the object moves accordingly Paragraph The offset is relative to the position of the paragraph to which the object is anchored The indentation of this paragraph is not taken into account Note If this paragraph falls for example in the right column of a double columned document the object anchored to this paragraph is also moved to the right column Indent Like Paragraph except that the p
443. te The separator must not occur within an entry if it does TextMaker will of course treat it as such and divide the entry in two Remove quotation marks If you check this option TextMaker will remove all quotation marks from the text when it is converted This is useful when for example you want to convert a list in which all the entries are enclosed in quotation marks Henry Meyer Many database programs generate lists of this type It is also possible to proceed in the opposite direction you can convert tables into text see the previous section Sorting tables You can re order the rows of a table using the Table gt Sort Table command Note This command is applicable only to tables If you want to sort ordinary text paragraphs outside a table please read section Sorting text beginning on page 191 To have TextMaker sort the rows of a table proceed as follows 1 2 3 4 Position the text cursor in any cell of the table Invoke the Table gt Sort Table command Choose the column whose contents are to be used as the basis of the sort If desired you can specify multiple columns as sort criteria see below Confirm with OK The table rows are immediately sorted according to the contents of the selected column s The dialog box for this command presents options whose functions are described here Sort by Here you specify the column whose contents are to be t
444. te new toolbars delete and rename existing toolbars edit toolbar icons etc To perform these tasks use the buttons in the dialog box for the View gt Toolbars command Creating new toolbars TextMaker allows you to create your own toolbars whenever you wish For example if you frequently need to use commands in the Window menu that are not present in the standard Function toolbar it might be worthwhile for you to set up your own toolbar for them You create a new toolbar as follows 1 Click the New button in the dialog box of the View gt Toolbars command 2 A dialog box appears and prompts you to enter a name for the new toolbar My toolbar for example Enter a name and confirm with OK 3 The new toolbar is set up Close the dialog box or click on the Edit button to add icons to the toolbar You can read more about this in section Customizing toolbar icons beginning on page 475 Deleting toolbars You can remove user defined toolbars with the Delete button 1 Select the toolbar to be deleted with a mouse click 2 Click the Delete button Note You can delete only toolbars that you have created yourself The standard toolbars Function toolbar Formatting toolbar etc cannot be removed However you can disable the standard toolbars whenever you don t need them see section Showing and hiding toolbars beginning on page 471 Renaming toolbars You can rename toolbars that you have created yourse
445. ted text the selected text Current section the current section Tip You can use the Insert gt Breaks gt Section break command to split up the document into as many sections as you want Selected sections all sections included in the current selection To end of section the segment of text beginning at the current position of the text cursor and ending at the end of the current section 172 e Automatic numbering User Manual TextMaker Tables Would you like to lay out certain parts of your document including text and or pictures in tabular form to make them more legible If you would simply insert a table into the document This is an example of As you can see the text The columns in a table can be of a table within a table cell is different widths wrapped automatically Each cell can have its Each cell can be shaded TextMaker automatically own border individually determines the optimum height for each row of cells Of course you could also use tab stops if you only want to set up a simple list but tables offer the following advantages m Within a table cell text that does not fit on a single line is automatically broken into multiple lines and the height of the cell is adjusted automatically to accommodate it m You can delete copy move or format individual table cells or complete rows or columns of cells Table cells can have borders a grid and shaded or patterned backgrounds m It
446. tent that no special typeface has been assigned to it with Format gt Character Moreover it is applied to any text you enter subsequently for by changing the Normal style in this way you are changing the standard typeface Creating linked character styles Whenever you create new styles as described at the beginning of this section they are based on the Normal character style So if you change the Normal character style for example by selecting a new typeface for it all the other styles are changed accordingly to the extent that they themselves do not specify differences from the Normal for example a different typeface So Normally all character styles are linked to the Normal style However when you create a new style you can select any other character style you like as its basis from the Based on list box To create a style and base it on a style other than Normal proceed as follows 1 Invoke Format gt Character Style 2 Click on the New button 3 Give the character style a name 4 Now comes the distinctive step Select the existing style with which the new style is to be linked from the Based on list box 5 Now you can enter the desired formatting etc An application example Let s assume that you want to use a bolded strong featured font for the headings in your doctoral thesis But you also want the headings to be in different sizes to reflect their hierarc
447. text so you can give them different fonts sizes etc any time you like When the form letter is later printed TextMaker will automatically wrap lines with database fields correctly taking into account that the actual text of the field varies from record to record Viewing test records in the text Normally TextMaker displays database fields that have been inserted into the text in the form of a field name enclosed by curly braces for example NAME To see how the form letter will really look when it is printed you can instruct TextMaker to display the content of the field from any database record you like rather than the field name provided that a database has first been assigned to the document by means of the command Extras gt Set Database Once this has been done invoke File gt Properties and switch to the dialog s View property sheet Make sure that the option Display field names is not checked Then check Show merge record and next to it enter the number of the database record whose field contents are to be displayed Note If you now invoke File gt Print Merge the letter will be rendered using all the selected data records just as before On the other hand if you invoke File gt Print TextMaker will print only a single letter using the address in the record you selected for display 332 e Form letters User Manual TextMaker Using the Mail Merge toolbar Displaying test data records i
448. that is all the documents in which tax was anywhere contained in the keywords Case is of no significance in search terms if the search term is entered as tax the search will also find documents whose keywords contain Tax 434 e Document management User Manual TextMaker Document protection You can protect your documents from being read or saved by unauthorized persons by applying document protection or to be more precise read and or write protection to them For example you can require the entry of a password to open or save a protected document To protect the current document invoke the command File gt Properties switch to the Protection property sheet and select the kind of protection you want Then enter whatever password you like for reading and or writing The following types of protection are available mu No protection The document is not protected This is the default setting m Write protection The document can be saved only when the correct write password has been entered at the time the document was opened m Read protection The document can be opened only when the correct read password is entered at the time an attempt is made to open it Furthermore the document will be automatically encrypted Protection depending on password Here the protection depends on whether the read or the write password is entered at the time the document is opened If the user enters the
449. the View property sheet There check the Display field names option This dialog box also contains an option called Shade fields If you check this option all fields are displayed with a gray background so that they can be more easily distinguished from normal text Note These settings are effective only for the current document Specifying your own date and time formats If none of the predefined formats in which the contents of date and time fields can be rendered suits you you can specify your own formats in the dialog box for Insert gt Field First select the date or time field you want to use then click on the New format button 150 e Fields User Manual TextMaker You can specify precisely the format in which the date or time is to be represented by entering abbreviations in the dialog box that appears As you enter formatting specifications TextMaker shows an example of the formatted result Any combination of the following abbreviations can be used in your format specification pay attention to case Abbreviation Meaning Example d day 2 dd day with two places 02 ddd weekday abbreviated to three letters Mon dddd weekday spelled out Monday m month 7 mm month with two places 07 mmm name of the month abbreviated to three letters Jul mmmm name of the month spelled out July yy year with two places 06 yyyy year with four places 2006 h hour 12 hour format 8 hh hour with two places 12 hour format 08 H hour 24 hou
450. the available choices are given further down When you have made all the specifications for a field click on Append to add the field after the last field you defined If other fields are already defined you can instead click on Insert to insert the new field ahead of the currently active field Repeat steps 3 and 4 for every additional field that the database is to comprise You can set up as many as 256 fields provided that the lengths of all of them do not exceed 4000 characters in total When all the fields have been entered to your satisfaction confirm with OK 324 e Database User Manual TextMaker The database will now be created and opened You will find information about filling in the database in section Using the database module beginning on page 305 and in section Using the database module beginning on page 315 Tip If you have made a mistake while entering the definition of a field and you recognize it after already having clicked the Append button you can go back and correct the error To do this double click in the Fields list on the affected field make the correction and click on Replace With Delete you can completely remove a field that has been entered incorrectly Important Once the database has been created your definitions cannot be subsequently changed with TextMaker Changes are possible only with a dBase compatible database program DataMaker for example So before creating a dat
451. the content of the embedded file is displayed Creating a link to the original file The dialog box described above provides an additional option that allows you to specify whether the object to be inserted from the file should be embedded in or linked to the document If you leave the Link option unchecked TextMaker inserts a copy of the file into the document as an OLE object and saves this copy in the document thus the object is embedded in the usual way On the other hand if you check the Link option TextMaker inserts the OLE object in the form of a link to the original file This doesn t affect the way Windows handles the insertion process However in this case if you should ever modify the original file with another application and then reopen the TextMaker document that contains the OLE object link to this file the OLE object will appear modified accordingly thus the OLE object remains linked to the original file Editing OLE objects Tip To edit an OLE object simply double click on it The object will be opened immediately in its native application where it can be edited Alternatively you can use the menu to edit an OLE object Proceed as follows 1 Click on the OLE object to select it 2 Invoke the Edit menu At the bottom of the menu you will find an item that refers to the object by name for example Bitmap object Selecting this menu item opens a submenu containing all the OLE commands that
452. the contents of the fields from this data record in other words the address is inserted into the text The result is for example a complete letterhead with the recipient s address already filled in On the following pages you will find detailed explanations of these procedures Preparing a document template Note To prepare a letter as quickly as possible you don t have to prepare a document template from scratch Numerous document templates with letterheads and memo forms are already supplied with TextMaker Read the section Using document templates on page 318 to learn how you can try them out without further ado To prepare a new document for the insertion of individual addresses proceed as follows 1 Invoke File gt New and select the template Normal tmv to start a new document 2 Fill the document with the desired text for example prepare a letterhead etc 3 Assign the desired database to the document using Extras gt Set Database for example the address database tmw dbf supplied with the program 4 At the desired positions in the document invoke Insert gt Field to insert database fields from the assigned database see also section Inserting database fields beginning on page 331 5 Invoke File gt Save as 6 Select the Template entry from the Save as Type list 7 TextMaker changes automatically to the folder for document templates 8 Give the template a name and confirm
453. the dialogs Window Manager positioning Linux only When this option is disabled TextMaker for Linux positions dialogs itself and always centers them in the program window When this option is enabled TextMaker leaves it to the window manager to position dialogs wherever it will 454 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Show fonts in font list When this option is enabled TextMaker renders the names of fonts that appear in lists such as the font list in the Formatting toolbar with the corresponding fonts This lets you to see at a glance how the fonts really look Use system file dialogs Windows only This option controls the type of dialogs that appear when commands to open and save files are issued m Disabled TextMaker uses its own file dialogs E Enabled TextMaker uses the file dialogs provided by the operating system The former are somewhat easier to use the latter offer more options Use large icons When this option is enabled larger icons are displayed in toolbars and menus Note Changes to this setting become effective only after TextMaker is restarted Measurement Linux only Here you can specify the units of measure TextMaker should use by default Metric centimeter or U S inch Tip You can always override this setting and enter a value into a dialog field in another unit of measure by typing one of the following unit abbreviations after the value Unit Meaning cm centimeter
454. the display of line numbers off you can do so by following the above described procedure unchecking the Show line numbers option at step 4 Options In the dialog box for this command you can make settings that control the line numbering as follows E Show line numbers Turns the display of line numbers on off Options group box Here you can set the following options First line number is the number with which the line numbering should begin Increment is the interval between numbered lines For example if you enter 5 line numbers will appear only at lines 5 10 15 20 etc Distance to text is the amount of blank space TextMaker should leave between the line number and the left margin E Numbering group box Allows you to specify whether and at what place the numbering should be reset Restart at the beginning of this section The numbering is reset to 1 only at the beginning of the current section Tip You can define new sections with the Insert gt Breaks gt Section break command Restart on every page The numbering is reset to 1 at the beginning of every page of the document Continuous The numbering is not reset to 1 m Apply to Determines what parts of the document will be affected by the settings you make in this dialog Whole document the entire document This point forward that part of the document beginning at the current position of the text cursor and ending at the end of the document Selec
455. the document as a fixed copy Thus if you later use your graphics program to modify the original picture the modifications you make there will have no effect on the copy in the TextMaker document Inserting as a picture frame Alternatively you can insert the picture as a freely movable picture frame To do this simply switch to Object mode using the View gt Object Mode command before making the insertion You will find more information about picture frames in section Picture frames beginning on page 242 Scanning in pictures Note Scanning pictures directly into a document is possible only with the Windows version of TextMaker TextMaker for Windows supports scanning printed matter directly into a document To make use of this function you must have connected a scanner to your computer and installed the scanner software The scanner software must be TWAIN compatible as it is with almost all scanners To scan a picture directly into the text do the following 1 Turn on the scanner and put the picture into the scanner 2 Move the text cursor to the position in the document where you want to insert the picture 3 Invoke the File gt Acquire command At this point TextMaker activates your scanner s software Normally this software presents a dialog box where you can make any settings you want to make and then start the scanning process see the manual for your scanner When the process has been compl
456. the light source and the type of Surface that the 3D effect is to simulate m Gallery Here several pre defined types of 3D effects are presented The easiest way to create a 3D effect is to click in the Gallery on one of these pre defined types and then do any fine tuning required Object properties Properties property sheet General options for the control of objects can be set on the Properties property sheet Name TextMaker automatically assigns a unique name to every object in a document Rectangles for example might be named Rectanglel Rectangle2 Rectangle3 etc If you wish you can give the object a different name by entering it here You will find detailed information about the uses of names for objects in the section Changing the names of objects beginning on page 237 Visible This option is checked by default It controls the visibility of the object on the screen see also the section Hiding objects beginning on page 235 If you uncheck this option the object will not be visible on the screen Printable This option is checked by default It controls the inclusion of the object in the output when the document is printed see also the section Hiding objects beginning on page 235 If you uncheck this option the object will not appear in the printed document Locked When you check this option the size of the object and its position in the case of frames and drawings can no longer be chang
457. the offset is 2 in for example the bottom of the object will be positioned 2 in from the bottom of the page bottom page margin etc Centered The object is positioned from the center For example if the offset is 0 in the object is centered on the page If the offset is 2 in the center of the object is positioned 2 in below the center of the page etc Relative to With the Relative to options you specify the document element that should serve as a reference for the Offset Option Effect Page Page borders Paragraph The offset is relative to the page more precisely to the page edges The page margins are not taken into account The offset is relative to the page margins If you increase or decrease the margins the object will move accordingly The offset is relative to the position of the paragraph to which it is anchored Note When you select this option the object moves with the paragraph If you insert a new line of text above the paragraph the object also drops down a line If necessary you can review the description of anchors in the section Changing the position of objects beginning on page 218 Offset Finally you can set the desired spacing in the Offset field Example If Position is set to Top Relative to to Page borders and Offset to 2 in the top of the object will be positioned 2 in below the top page margin If this margin is in wide the top of the object will be posit
458. the right as you increase the Right margin the separator line ends earlier Separator line property sheet When you want to change the appearance of the footnote separator line switch to this property sheet To change for example the line s thickness select the desired thickness from the Thickness 1 list 398 e Working with large documents User Manual TextMaker If you don t want the footnote separator line to appear at all select the option None from the Line style list Document revisions You can add comments to documents and track changes made to them These capabilities are applicable for example when several users make successive revisions to a document m Using comments You can select text anywhere in a document and then attach a comment to it For example if a colleague gives you a document to review you can insert notes like make this section shorter directly into the document and then return it to her She can then make the revisions you have recommended in your comments m Tracking changes in a document The Track changes function lets you do even more When it is activated you can make changes to a document delete or add text alter formatting etc as you like However your changes are not simply applied as they would be otherwise rather they are at first only highlighted in color and saved as proposed changes So if a colleague sends you a document for correction turn on
459. the same text style 2 Invoke the command Format gt Transfer Formatting The mouse pointer now becomes a little brush ly 3 Drag the mouse with the mouse button held down over all the characters to which the format is to be transferred 68 e Character formatting User Manual TextMaker 4 If you want to apply the format to additional characters repeat step 4 as often as required 5 When you are finished invoke Format gt Transfer Formatting again or simply press the Esc ESC key Hiding text You can hide sections of text Normally hidden text is displayed on the screen but not printed However there are options in the document properties for Show hidden text and Print hidden text Hidden text will or will not appear on the screen and on the printed page depending on the settings of these options Application Hidden text is ideal for comments or notes that you want to incorporate into a document so that for example they will be viewable on the screen but not appear on the printed page Hiding text To hide text do the following 1 Select the text you want to hide 2 Invoke the command Format gt Character 3 Switch to the Font property sheet 4 Check the Hidden option The text is now hidden By default it will still be displayed on the screen but will not appear on the printed page Displaying printing hidden text By default hidden text is visible on the screen but does not appear on the print
460. then invoking the Object gt Properties command 210 e OLE objects User Manual TextMaker Information from the creators of the Equation Editor The SoftMaker Equation Editor is a special version of the MathType program from Design Science If you make frequent use of formulas in your documents you might find that MathType itself is even better suited to your needs than the SoftMaker Equation Editor While just as easy to use as the Equation Editor MathType has a number of additional functions that can help you be more productive and create more complex formulas MathType is available in English German French and Japanese You can obtain information about the purchase of MathType from your software distributor or directly from Design Science Design Science Inc 4028 Broadway Long Beach CA 90803 USA Telephone USA 800 827 0685 for customers within the USA and Canada 562 433 0685 for international customers Fax USA 562 433 6969 E Mail English sales mathtype com Internet www mathtype com Frames and drawings In the preceding chapters you learned how to insert pictures and other objects directly into the body text There is an alternative way to insert such objects They can be inserted in the form of frames pictures for example as picture frames The difference Frames occupy fixed positions on the page You can adjust their positions of course but unless you do so deliberately they remain
461. then of course the cross reference becomes invalid In such a case when you update the document the message Target not found is displayed in the text by the cross reference You can correct the problem by removing the cross reference and inserting a new one with a valid target Footnotes When your text requires explanatory comments you can place such comments in footnotes Footnotes usually appear at the bottoms of the pages on which they are referenced however they can also be grouped together at the ends of chapters or even at the end of the document Footnotes consist of two parts a superscripted footnote marker in the body text and the footnote text to which it refers When you encounter heavy fog you should immediately slow down and turn on your fog lights Visibility less than 150 feet Maximum 30 mph An example of the use of footnotes TextMaker numbers footnotes automatically in an ascending sequence If you insert a new footnote in the text or delete an existing footnote the numbering of any following footnotes is automatically adjusted You can set footnote options as required to control the way the automatic numbering is handled By default TextMaker automatically inserts a separator line between the text and the footnote area If you wish you can specify a custom format for this line or even disable it by setting the appropriate footnote options Detailed information
462. ther program to change something in this file and then open the TextMaker document containing it your changes will be visible in the document Thus in this case what is embedded in the TextMaker document is not the OLE object itself but only a replica of the object You will find additional information on the following pages Embedding OLE objects Note The use of OLE objects is possible only with the Windows version of TextMaker The Object gt New OLE Object command embeds an object that you create with another application into your TextMaker for Windows document After it has been embedded such an object can still be edited with the application that created it The command opens a dialog box containing a list of all the applications that can provide OLE objects The entries displayed in the list depend on the OLE capable programs installed on your system Selecting Paintbrush Picture for example will open a window for the Windows Paint program called Paintbrush in earlier versions of Windows There you can create a picture When you subsequently exit Paint the picture is embedded in the text You can edit this picture whenever you wish to do so simply double click on the picture Step by step the procedure for embedding an OLE object is as follows 1 Move the text cursor to the position in the document where you want to embed the object 2 Invoke the Object gt New OLE Object command 3 A
463. this command in order to change the properties of several cells at once Format Borders Shading r Size Width Percent esd 33 3 r Vertical Alignment r Margins Top Left 0 04 in FR Center Bottom Right o 04 in al C Justify Top o 04 in el rRotate by Bottom o 04 in El C C 20 Options C 180 c ai I Protected cme The dialog box for this command offers the following options 182 e Tables User Manual TextMaker Size Here you can change the Width of the selected cells by choosing among the following options E Fixed When you select this option you can specify the width exactly by entering the desired value in the field to the right of the Width list m Percent When you select this option you can specify the width you want as a percentage of the overall table width By default the cells in a table are of equal width and the width is set to 100 divided by the number of cells in a row For example each cell in a table of three columns has a default width of 33 3 If you wanted the first column to be twice as wide as the other two columns you would set the widths of all the cells in this column to 50 and the widths of all the cells in the second and third column to 25 E Auto When you select this option TextMaker automatically determines an appropriate width In this case the cell widths will be automatically distribute
464. this option is ignored Show tooltips Determines whether or not the tooltips should be displayed Tooltips are bits of information that are displayed next to the mouse pointer when you position the pointer over certain screen elements for example a button on a toolbar By default this option is enabled Show unprintable characters group box Here you specify whether or not paragraph breaks tabs and spaces should be represented in the text by visible symbols so that they will be easier to recognize E Paragraph breaks If you enable this option TextMaker displays the paragraph break at the end of every paragraph This break is represented by the symbol This lets you see exactly where paragraphs end m Tabs If you enable this option all tabs become visible on the screen as small arrows m Spaces If you enable this option small dots are used to make all spaces visible on the screen a All Enables all the above listed options together Thus paragraph breaks tabs and spaces are all represented visibly on the screen By default all of these option are disabled 448 e Customizing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Show scrollbars group box Here you can specify whether or not horizontal and or vertical scrollbars are to be displayed Default view mode Pocket PCs only Lets you specify the default view mode for documents standard view or continuous view for example Preferences General property sheet The
465. this property sheet you can change settings that affect general properties On this topic see the section Object properties Properties property sheet beginning on page 234 Borders property sheet With this property sheet you can give the text field a full border or individual bordering lines The options on this property sheet correspond to those for the Format gt Borders command see the section Borders and lines beginning on page 92 268 e Forms User Manual TextMaker Shades property sheet With this property sheet you can apply shading to the text field using a color or a pattern The options on this property sheet correspond to those for the Format gt Shading command see the section Shading beginning on page 90 Text frames You insert a text frame with the Object gt New Text Frame command A text frame is filled out the same way a text field is filled out see the preceding section you simply position the text cursor in the field and start typing The difference between a text frame and a text field A text frame like all other types of frames has a fixed position on the page Thus it does not move when you add or delete text above it The normal body text is automatically formatted so that it breaks at the boundaries of the frame it flows around the frame You will find information about text fields in the preceding section Additional information about text frames is given in the se
466. this type can be selected only by aiming at its border and then clicking In Object mode such an object can be selected simply by clicking anywhere on it In Object mode you can also select multiple objects at once provided they are frames or drawings To do this draw a rectangle around the desired objects with the mouse Alternatively you can click successively on several objects while holding down the Shift key Shift to select them together Changing the position size and margins of objects In this section you will learn how to change the position size and outside margins of an object Changing the position of objects Note The only way you can change the position of an object that has been inserted directly into the text a picture for example is to select the object with a mouse click cut it from the text and then paste it back into the text at a different place In contrast to directly inserted objects frames e g picture frames and drawings can be moved on the page as desired To move a frame or drawing select it with a click of the mouse and then do the following m With the mouse While holding down the mouse button drag the selected object to the desired position mu With the keyboard Use the arrow keys to move the object Under dialog control When you invoke the Object gt Properties command and switch to the Layout property sheet in the command s dialog box you can specify the precise position
467. thods for protecting forms are available to you 276 e Forms User Manual TextMaker Using Forms mode When you activate Forms mode see section Filling out forms the forms objects can still be filled in but other parts of the document can no longer be edited and most TextMaker commands are no longer available Forms mode can be activated and deactivated with the View gt Forms Mode Note Keep in mind that a user who fills in the form can deactivate Forms mode at any time unless you prevent her from doing so by locking Forms mode with a password see below Saving the form in Forms mode Tip When you save a document in Forms mode Forms mode is automatically reactivated the next time the document is opened Locking Forms mode with a password As required you can prevent other users from deactivating Forms mode by locking it with a password To do this invoke the File gt Properties command and switch to the Forms property sheet Activate Forms mode by checking the Forms mode activated option Then enter a Password to deactivate Forms mode and confirm with OK Finally save the document When a user subsequently opens the document and attempts to deactivate Forms mode he or she will be prompted for the password Thus the user will be able to deactivate Forms mode only if he or she has the correct password Tip Saving forms as document templates It is generally recommended that you save forms as document templates
468. ties dialog displays statistical information about the current document number of characters number of sentences average word length etc Tip If you select a segment of text before you call up this property sheet it will show statistics for the selected text only otherwise it will show them for the entire document The items of information shown are mostly self explanatory However the difference between the first two items needs some clarification m The number of characters counts the visible characters only m The number of keystrokes also counts white spaces created with the space bar tab key etc Accordingly the sentence This is a test has 11 characters and 14 keystrokes since it contains three space characters Document properties Protection property sheet The Protection property sheet in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to apply document protection to a document Opening and or saving a protected document is possible only following the entry of a correct password Documents with read protection are also encrypted so that they cannot be examined with programs other than TextMaker You will find information about this topic in chapter Document protection beginning on page 435 Document properties Forms property sheet The Forms property sheet in the File gt Properties dialog allows you to enable or disable Forms mode and optionally require a password to disable this mo
469. ting of several successive paragraphs you must select them beforehand The selection can begin at any position within the first paragraph and end anywhere in the last paragraph Let s try this out Invoke the command Edit gt Undo and the company name will again be formatted flush left Starting from any letter in the company name hold the mouse button down and drag the selection into the next line Then click on the icon for Centered in the Formatting toolbar Both paragraphs will now be centered After you have done this your application screen should look something like this T Tour1 tmd _ Of x a l 1 3 2 1 3 aL 4 aD 5 o ae ist ree Escher amp Sons Architects Design and Planning of Ganstruction Projects of all Sizes Escher amp Sons Architects 78 Baker Street Atlanta G4 30009 Fred Backfish xl 7 Shepard s Way 2l Salmon River Oregon 77123 O A We could now put our With best regards at the bottom of the letter and send it off without further ado But there are no doubt still a few things in this letterhead that could be made more attractive So let s begin with some refinements Tabs Before going further you can open the document Tour2 tmd if this document was included in your SoftMaker implementation and compare it with your results so far This document contains our example document as it should look at this stage of our work Many business letter
470. tivated only the selected data records are searched otherwise all are searched see also section Selecting data records beginning on page 334 Accuracy Specifies how closely the content of a field must agree with the search term Search term anywhere in the field Finds all data records in which the search term 310 e Database User Manual TextMaker occurs anywhere in the fields being searched Field begins with the search term Finds only those data records in which the search term occurs at the beginning of the search fields So if you search for Fish only records with Fish at the beginning of a field are found including for example records in which a field begins with Fisher but excluding records in which a field contains Ralph Fisher Field matches the search term Here the search function finds only data records in which the field content corresponds completely with the search term So if you search for Fish only records with fields containing just Fish are found records with fields containing Fisher are not Adding and editing data records Important Data records can be changed only in the database module s form view To switch between list and form views invoke the command View gt Form If form view is active a little check appears in front of this menu item otherwise list view is active To edit a data record simply position the text cu
471. tly applied to the document or completely removed This function is especially useful when several users in succession will edit a document An example A co worker composes a document and gives it to you to correct You enable the Track changes function and make the desired changes Then you return the document to the author She can now accept or reject separately each of your changes with the press of a button Thus revising a document with the help of the Track changes function involves three steps E Step 1 Enabling the Track changes function E Step 2 Making the desired changes E Step 3 Accepting rejecting the individual changes Read the following sections to learn more Tip Using the Reviewing toolbar The easiest way to revise documents is to use the Reviewing toolbar The Reviewing toolbar This icon toolbar appears automatically whenever the document contains changes that were made with the Track changes function enabled Should it not appear it is most likely because it has been disabled To re enable it invoke the command View gt Toolbars and click on the check box next to Reviewing Toolbar in the list of toolbars The Reviewing toolbar provides the following buttons from left to right m The first six buttons are not for tracking changes but for working with comments You will find information about them in section Using comments beginning on page 401 Track chang
472. tom edges of the drawing Option Meaning Top Bottom Center Flush The text is aligned flush against the top edge of the object This is the default setting The text is aligned flush against the bottom edge of the object The text is centered between the top and bottom edges of the object The lines of text are spaced equally in such a way that the text begins at the top edge of the object and ends at the bottom edge Forms Forms are documents to be filled out For example you could prepare an application form for vacations Then when one of your coworkers wanted to apply for a vacation he would simply open this ready to use form enter his name and the dates on which he wanted to begin and end his vacation and print the form He would then have a completed vacation application to submit Creating a form is no more complicated than this you simply insert forms objects at the places in the document where someone must later enter something for example you insert text fields for text entries T Form2 tmd iof x a text field Name Jessica Lange Address 42 Faraday Ave City Mountain View CA 90427 Gender female w a dropdown list New client yes a checkbox Baleek i When you want to fill out a prepared form you should activate Forms mode In this mode forms objects can be filled out but access to the rest of the document and to most of TextMaker s functions is b
473. tomatically using either the default language set in the preferences or the language assigned with Format gt Character and transforms the quote marks accordingly Maximum number of undo steps Here you can specify the number of actions that can be reversed with the Edit gt Undo command You can increase this number up to a maximum of 999 Note TextMaker uses more memory as you increase this value This is of virtually no consequence on desktop PCs but it is an issue on Pocket PCs and Handheld PCs which have much more limited memory On the latter you should not set this value too high especially if you edit large documents on a regular basis You will find information about the Edit gt Undo command in section Undoing changes beginning on page 28 Mouse wheel Linux only If your mouse has a mouse wheel you can specify here the scrolling increment for a turn of the wheel by page one complete page or by a certain number of lines User Home and User Business buttons Here you can enter your addresses separately for home and business These entries are used by the document templates supplied with the program to personalize letterheads etc by filling in the sender address see section Document templates beginning on page 126 Preferences Edit property sheet The Edit property sheet in the Extras gt Preferences dialog allows you to set preferences for editing text 452 e
474. top and drag it to a new position in the ruler Note also that when you drag a tab stop downward out of the ruler it is deleted There is yet another way to proceed when setting tab stops With both paragraphs selected invoke Format gt Tabs A dialog box opens and shows you the exact positions of the tab stops that are currently set This dialog works as follows To Do this Set new tab stops Enter the desired position in the Tabs field and click on Set Delete tab stops Select one of the existing tab stops in the list and click on Clear To remove all tab stops at once click on Clear all Shift tab stops Delete the tab stop and set a new one Change the alignment Click on one of the tab stops given in the list choose a new alignment with Alignment and click on Set To confirm your changes click OK Units of measure You can enter values in TextMaker s dialog boxes not only in inches but also in other units of measure To enter a value in specific units simply add one of the following units of measure after the number Unit Explanation cm centimeter in inch 1 in equals 2 54 cm pt point 72 pt equals 1 in pi pica 1 pi equals 12 pt The default unit of measure depends on your computer s region settings For example if you type 7 62 cm as the position for a tab stop TextMaker puts it at 3 in 7 62 cm Back to our practice letter Now that the tab stops for the line Your ref
475. trl Shift Ctrl Shift E Ctrl Shift E F9 F9 Keyboard shortcuts for editing text Command Keyboard shortcut Move text cursor one character to the left One character to the right One line up One line down One word to the left One word to the right One page up One page down Delete the character left of the text cursor 2 lt 4 gt T A Ctrl e Ctrl lt Crl 4 Cti PgUp4 PgUp PgDn4 PgDn Backspace 2__ Command Keyboard shortcut Delete the character right of the text cursor Delete the word right of the text cursor Switch between Insert mode and Overwrite mode Select next forms object Select previous forms object Del Del Ctrl Del Ctrl Del Ins ns F11 F11 Shift F11 Shift F11 Select next forms object in Forms mode only Tab Tab Select previous forms object in Forms mode only Convert hexadecimal character code into corresponding Unicode character Shift Tab Shift Tab Ctrl Alt Shift F12 Ctr1 Alt Shift F12 For example when you type in 20AC and then press this keyboard shortcut a Euro sign will appear since the Euro sign s character code is 20AC in the Unicode character set table 492 e Keyboard shortcuts User Manual TextMaker
476. trl S Ctr1 S to invoke this command and save your document There is also a shortcut for Save for mouse users In the Function toolbar you will find icons for the most frequently needed commands BCE 6aleGS 9 G9ERSQQ8 ARV tla TH To save your document click on the diskette icon in the Function toolbar Tip If you point the mouse cursor at an icon on the Function toolbar without clicking a text box appears giving the icon s function If the Function toolbar is not displayed it is probably deactivated To reactivate it invoke the command View gt Toolbars and click on the little box in front of Toolbar The Save dialog box If the letter has no name the program automatically displays a dialog box that asks you to specify the filename as soon as you invoke the File gt Save command 38 e The TextMaker Tour User Manual TextMaker E Documents and Settings HE LanSchool Files HE My Documents Network HE Program Files Temp HIE Windows File name File type Document tmd v Quick paths w New Folder Summary Here type a name for the document in the Filename box or if you would like to overwrite an existing file choose a name from the list of files We are going to name the document Letter So enter Letter in the Filename box and click on OK or press the Enter key to confirm your entry Text
477. tter you must tell TextMaker which database is being referenced by assigning a database to the document To do this invoke Extras gt Set Database A dialog box appears allowing you to select the database Type the name of the desired database or choose a file from the list of databases displayed Databases with the following formats are supported File format Description dBase DOS dBase database with MS DOS character set This is the standard format see note below dBase Windows dBase database with Windows characters set dBase Unicode dBase database with Unicode characters set Text file Text file in which each line contains a data record and the 330 e Form letters User Manual TextMaker field contents of each record are separated by semicolons Text file DOS Also a text file but with an MS DOS character set rather than a Windows character set You specify the file format by opening the dialog s Files of type list box and choosing the desired format from the list Note Most databases are stored in dBase DOS format Even most Windows database programs use the DOS format instead of the Windows format If you are not sure whether a database contains the DOS or the Windows format open the file as dBase DOS and check if characters with accents or umlauts e g or a are displayed correctly If they are not close the database and reopen it in dBase Windows format As soon as you have selected a da
478. tting font text style etc for entire paragraphs This is especially useful in format styles for more detail see section Paragraph styles beginning on page 121 To change the character formatting of complete paragraphs select the paragraphs you want to change invoke Format gt Paragraph and click on the Character button A dialog box like the one for Format gt Character will appear for a description see chapter Character formatting beginning on page 63 Tabs A tab stop is a kind of jump target that you can use to position the text cursor at a specific point within a line by inserting a tab Tabs help you to compose for example tabular reports To work with tabs two steps are required 1 Define the tab stops with the Format gt Tabs command This is the way you specify the positions to which tabs will move the cursor 2 Now you can use the Tab Tab key to make the text cursor jump from one tab stop to the next this is called inserting tabs Note Although the tab key on most PC keyboards is marked with two arrows _y_ the legend Tab Tab is used for it in this manual to distinguish it better from the direction keys Using tabs By default tab stops are preset at 0 5 in intervals However these preset tab stops are merely relics from the era of the typewriter and you are by no means limited to them You can define different tab stops for every paragraph of the document 82
479. ttons in the file manager have the following functions m Open button When you click on this button TextMaker opens the selected file Tip You can also open a file by double clicking on its filename E Close button Use this button to exit the file manager E Search button You can click on this button to search for specific files or simply to select a new folder for display in the file manager For more information on this topic see the next section Searching with the file manager Output button Use this button to publish the selected document It opens a little menu that can contain the following functions depending on the operating system being used E mail send the document by e mail Print print the document Print Merge print the document as a form letter mu Delete button If you click on this button the selected file will be deleted after confirmation E Preview button A mouse click on this button opens a window in which you can inspect the selected document without having to open it If while previewing a document you decide to open it you can click on the Open button Alternatively you can close the preview window by activating the Cancel button Searching with the file manager With the help of the file manager s Search button you can have TextMaker look for specific files or simply choose the folder to be displayed in the file manager 432 e D
480. u The picture should not be saved in the document Beyond that you should not use the Save with document option because pictures cannot be saved within HTML documents It is not possible to insert picture frames in HTML format Which picture file format On the web the two most widespread picture file formats are GIF and JPG Both formats save the picture information in compressed form and thereby reduce picture file sizes considerably m The GIF format is most appropriate for smaller graphics with a maximum of 256 colors It uses a lossless compression method that does not impair image quality m The JPG format is most appropriate for photographs and other images in true color However the compression method used here is not lossless the higher the chosen compression ratio the worse the image quality m The PNG format is also supported by TextMaker This format comes in various sub formats with different types of compression All current web browsers can display PNG files without difficulties however some outdated browsers might be unable to render this format 416 e Internet functions User Manual TextMaker Use pictures in one of these formats whenever possible since other graphic formats are not supported by all browsers Tables in HTML documents It is also possible to insert tables into HTML documents To do this use the command Table gt New Table in the usual way see chapter Tables beginning on page 173
481. u can add shadowing to the object See section Object properties Shadow beginning on page 231 m Properties Here you can change the general properties of the object See section Object properties Properties property sheet beginning on page 234 Besides the above mentioned property sheets the dialog contains an additional property sheet especially for OLE objects This property sheet contains options described below Picture property sheet On this property sheet you can change settings that affect the graphical representation of the object Color group box Allows you to specify the colors in which the object will be rendered Original colors The object is rendered in its original colors Grayscale The object is rendered in shades of gray B W The object is rendered in black white monochrome As you wish you can select other colors with Foreground color and Background color Not applicable to all types of OLE objects Cropping group box Here you can crop the object This is useful when you need only a part of the object Entries are given in percent For example if you want to cut off the upper forth of the object you should enter 25 under Top E Settings group box Here you can change the brightness contrast and gamma a form of color balance that affects brightness Using the SoftMaker Equation Editor Note The SoftMaker Equation Editor is available only for Windows and is not included in
482. u can invoke Object gt Properties to modify the properties of this field The properties of a text field include its size margins and a number of other variables The following options are available Format property sheet On this property sheet you can change the format of the text field E Size group box Here you can change the Size of the text field You can either specify the width and height exactly or allow the text field to expand automatically as necessary to accommodate text as it is entered To do the latter select the Growing option for Width and Height and enter the desired minima and maxima Vertical alignment group box These settings determine how the text within the field will be aligned with respect to the top and bottom edges of the text field Option Meaning Top The text is aligned flush against the top edge of the text field This is the default setting Bottom The text is aligned flush against the bottom edge of the text field Centered The text is centered between the top and bottom edges of the text field Flushed The lines of the text are equally spaced in such a way that the text begins at the top edge of the text field and ends at the bottom edge Margins property sheet On this property sheet you set the margins of the text field m Wrap margins group box Here you can change the outside margins m Margins group box Here you can change the inside margins Properties property sheet On
483. uguese Portugal x x Portuguese Brazil X x Spanish X x x x Spanish Latin America xX x x Swedish x x Old German spelling obsolete since the German spelling reform introduced in 1996 Key SPELL Spell checker HYPH Hyphenator THES Thesaurus EURO European translation dictionary Additionally language modules containing hyphenation only are available for the following languages Bulgarian Croatian Czech Estonian Finnish Greek Latvian Lithuanian Polish Romanian Russian Serbian Slovakian Slovenian Turkish Ukrainian Retroactive spell checking You activate retroactive spell checking with the command Extras gt Check Spelling This checks the text word for word for spelling errors and displays every unrecognized word in a dialog box You can then choose to correct the word add it to the dictionary or simply ignore the supposed error When you invoke this command you are asked first to specify whether spell checking is to begin at the text cursor or at the beginning of the text Make your choice and then start the spell checker with OK TextMaker now goes through the text word for word The spell checker stops at an unrecognized word and displays the word in a dialog box Spellcheck xi Word tyop maneo o o Change to Change all Epo to Ignore Ignore all No more suggestions Close In the list under Change to TextMaker presents suggestions for the correct spelling of the word
484. ult x Styles Underline Text color C Small caps C Continuous E w E Al caps E Words only Background color Strike out CI Hidden Single transparent w C Blink C Protected Double Sample AaBbCcxXxYvZz The dialog box for Format gt Character Note You will find detailed information about this dialog box in chapter Character formatting beginning on page 63 The settings in this dialog box are organized on several property sheets You can switch from one sheet to another by clicking on the tab at the top of the sheet you want to view As you can see this dialog has property sheets for Font Spacing and Hyperlinks Since we only want to modify the font we can stay on the Font property sheet Open the dropdown list Typeface by clicking on the little arrow to its right and choose the Arial font Then choose the 12 point font size from the Size list to the right of the Typeface list Turn on italic by opening the dropdown list Style and selecting the entry Italic Confirm the settings by clicking the OK button Then save your document Printing the practice letter If you want you can now print your first composition for proofing To do this invoke the command File gt Print or press the keyboard shortcut Cirl P Ctri P Printer PCL Laser p Options Copies Port COM1 57600 i a Collate copies Draft mode Net path Pages all Current page C Drop pictures
485. ument WiINdOW cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 442 Minimizing the document WINKOW ec cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 442 Arranging document WiINKOWS cceceeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeeteeeeeenaeeeeneaa 443 Customizing TextMaker 445 PYETELENCOS i sh aces ieee cha cs secaaeve a a ale wa EAS 446 Preferences View property SNEet ccceesceceeeeecsteeeseneeeeees 446 Preferences General property Sheet ccccecceeseeeesseeeeeees 449 Preferences Edit property Sheet ccceesceeeereeeeteeeeeneeeeees 452 Preferences Look amp Feel property sheet cseeeseeeeees 454 Preferences Language property Sheet cccccseeeeeseeeeees 456 Preferences File property Sheet ccccesceceetecsteeeseneeeeees 458 DOCUMENT proprias eirik ie inini een ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeees 460 Document properties Summary property sheet 460 Document properties View property sheet 460 Document properties Colors property sheet n 463 Document properties Internet property sheet eee 466 Document properties Info property sheet 467 Document properties Protection property sheet 467 Document properties Forms property sheet n 468 Document properties Reviewing property sheet 2 06 468 Customizing the document display cccceceseeeeeeeeesteeeeseeeeees 469 Changing the zoom leVel ccceceeeeceecee
486. ument with Extras gt Set Database You do not even have to enter the field names manually If you have a look at the Insert gt Calculation dialog box you will see that the names of all the database fields are shown in the Variable Field list box as soon as you assign a database to the document They can be entered in the formula with double clicks As an example we want to create an invoice form that can be easily printed as a form letter For this all we need is a database whose fields contain the customers personal data name address etc Beyond that we ll simplify things and allow only one item per invoice the database should contain a QUANTITY field for the order quantity an ITEM field for item designators and a PRICE field for the unit price Let s get started 1 Create a new document with File gt New 2 Assign an appropriate database to it with Extras gt Set Database see below for an example 3 Next create a normal form letter as described in chapter Database Insert the database fields containing the relevant customer data address etc at the proper places in the heading of the letter 4 Now design the invoice itself according to your tastes Enter fields from your database with Insert gt Field gt Database field for example the QUANTITY field for the order quantity 5 And now the main point You can calculate with the database fields For example the formula QUANTITY PRICE cal
487. unctions This section is addressed primarily to advanced users It presents the somewhat less commonly needed functions for editing frames drawings and other objects Hiding objects If necessary you can hide an object so that it will not appear on the screen and or on the printed page To hide an object select it invoke the Object gt Properties command switch to the Properties property sheet and then do the following Uncheck the Visible option if you don t want the object to be displayed on the screen m Uncheck the Printable option if you don t want the object to appear in the printed document Tip If you should ever make an object invisible by accident you can always invoke File gt Properties and check the Show hidden objects option on the Options property sheet to make all hidden objects visible again Then you can select the mistakenly hidden object and check its Visible option to make it visible again Changing the Z order of frames When two frames or drawings overlap you can specify which of these objects should be in the foreground and which in the background To do this proceed as follows 1 Select one of the objects 2 To move it to the background invoke Object gt Send to back to move it to the foreground invoke Object gt Send to front Grouping frames When you group several frames drawings you connect them together to form a unit that can be selected and manipulated as if it were a singl
488. untain View CA 90427 Gender female a dropdown list New client yes a checkbox te te m In the following list you will learn about the different types of forms objects that can be present in a form and about how they are to be filled out E Text fields and text frames for entering text To fill out a text field or frame you simply position the text cursor in it and type the desired text E Dropdown lists and dropdown list frames for menus of selectable items When you click on a dropdown list it opens You can then select one of the entries with a mouse click mu Checkboxes and checkbox frames for items to be checked off When you click on the box with the mouse a little check mark appears in it indicating that the associated item has been checked When you click on it a second time the check mark is removed Moving the text cursor in forms You can move the text cursor within forms as follows m You can move the text cursor to the desired position in the usual way by using the arrow keys or clicking with the mouse m You can use the F11 F11 key to jump to the next forms object and Shift F11 Shift F11 to jump to the previous object m In Forms mode see below the text cursor can move only between forms objects In this mode you can use the keys Tab Tab and Shift Tab Shift Tab to jump back and forth between forms objects Forms mode It is recommended that you always activate Forms mode wh
489. vel 1 list items will have numbering in the form 1 2 3 etc However if 1 is entered dashes added before and after the placeholder the level 1 list items will have numbering in the form 1 2 3 etc If the number has several level components the edit box will contain a placeholder for each of the components for example 1 2 3 for level 1 2 3 etc Format This option allows you to specify the format for the numbering Besides the usual 1 2 3 you can select e g letters A B C or Roman numerals I II HI Numbering starts with If you want the numbering to start with some value other than 1 you can enter the starting value here This option takes effect only when the numbering is beginning anew or when it is reset with the Restart numbering option in the main dialog Character button If you click on this button you can change the character formatting font size emphasis etc of the numbers Horizontal position Allows you to specify how far the text should be indented to the right to make room for the number Vertical position Allows you to specify the vertical position of the number Negative values are used to lower the number positive values to raise it Additional indent You can use this option to indent the entire list item including the number to the right 166 e Automatic numbering User Manual TextMaker Applying numbered lists Numbered lists ar
490. visible unless the document actually contains comments In pop up windows made visible by pointing If the comments pane is disabled a comment becomes visible only when you point with the mouse to a segment of text to which a comment is attached Then the comment is displayed in a small window Printing comments Normally comments appear only on the screen they are not printed If you want comments to be printed along with regular text activate the Print comments option see the section Settings for comments beginning on page 405 404 e Document revisions User Manual TextMaker Note Regular text will be reduced in size to make room on the printed page for the comments Thus its measurements will not correspond to the measurements specified for the document Locating comments The Extras gt Comments menu contains two commands that you can use to jump from one comment in the document to another m Extras gt Comments gt Previous Comment jumps to the previous comment m Extras gt Comments gt Next Comment jumps to the next comment Tip These commands can also be invoked by clicking on the cs and B icons in the Reviewing toolbar Settings for comments You can make various settings for comments with the command Extras gt Comments gt Options Note The options dialog box is also accessible by invoking File gt Properties and changing to the Reviewing property sheet The following
491. w Lists can also be inserted directly into an existing document To do this simply place the text cursor at the desired position Then invoke the command Insert gt Lists amp Labels A dialog box appears from it you can call up and edit previously saved list and label definitions More about this in the next section To create a new list or a new label click on the New button At this point TextMaker asks you to provide a name for the label list Enter whatever name you like and confirm with OK Next TextMaker asks you for the database that contains the addresses Select it and confirm with OK Now the dialog box for creating the list label appears Generate List Label Ed C Docs tmw dbf Database Mask FIRSTNAME NAME1 STREET CITY STATE_ZIP Database fields Cancel Database Format Insert as table Insert as text Columns i ie Min height fo in r Records All Selected records C Range Erom To 320 e Database User Manual TextMaker Enter the desired database fields in the Mask input field arranged as they should appear later when they are rendered To do this type the field names with enclosing curly braces e g NAME or transfer fields from the Database fields list with double clicks An example of a completed label mask is given in the illustration above You can work in the in
492. w record and then typing in the address 5 Click on the Insert button At each place in the template where there is a database field TextMaker now inserts the content corresponding to that field from the chosen data record The result is for example a letterhead completely filled out with the address of the letter s recipient All you have to do now is write the text of the letter and then print the document To do this invoke File gt Print not File gt Print Merge Tip In the dialog box for the command File gt New you will see some folders Any of them can be opened with a double click They contain preformatted document templates for writing letters etc Most of these templates are associated with the example database tmw dbf that is supplied with the program The list and label generator With the list and label generator you can prepare address lists or labels using the addresses in a database without much effort For this purpose you simply create a mask with which you specify the arrangement of the database fields using the command Insert gt Lists amp Labels When this is completed TextMaker inserts the corresponding fields into the document as normal text or in the form of a table as you choose More detailed information about this topic is given on the pages following Creating lists and labels When you want to create a label you should first begin a new document with File gt Ne
493. want to start a new page before the text has reached the end of the current page you can always insert a manual page break Whenever you want to do this position the text cursor at the point in the text where the new page is to begin and invoke Insert gt Breaks gt Page break Alternatively you can use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl Ctri TextMaker now inserts a forced page break When you need to remove a manual page break that you have forced in this manner you can do so by positioning the text cursor at the beginning of the first line following the break and pressing the Backspace key _ Specifying a page break at the beginning of a specific paragraph You can force an early page break not only with the Insert gt Breaks gt Page break command but also by giving a paragraph the attribute always begins on a new page To do the latter position the text cursor within the paragraph of interest invoke Format gt Paragraph and check the Page break option in the dialog box that appears TextMaker will then always insert a page break before this paragraph even when you move it to a different place in the text Paper format and page orientation You can specify the page format of a document with the File gt Page Setup command Here you can set such things as paper format and page orientation portrait or landscape 98 e Page formatting User Manual TextMaker Page Setup xi r Orientation Portrait A Ca
494. wing 1 Select the paragraphs to be bordered If you want to add a border to only a single paragraph it is only necessary to position the text cursor within it 2 Invoke the command Format gt Borders 3 Select a single or double Line style gt As required change the thickness of a single line at Thickness 1 A thickness of one point is preset With double lines you can change the thickness of the inner line with Thickness 1 and the thickness of the outer line with Thickness 2 n If you wish you can also change the Color for the lines and additional options details are given below 92 e Paragraph formatting User Manual TextMaker 6 Confirm with OK This is the way complete borders are added to paragraphs Read on to learn how to add individual bordering lines how to edit existing borders and how to use the other options in this dialog Adding individual bordering lines As was noted in the introduction paragraphs can have individual left right top or bottom bordering lines as well as surrounding borders To add individual bordering lines to a paragraph simply select the lines you want in the dialog s Sample field before you set the line style You select a line by clicking on it by clicking on it a second time you deselect it After you have selected the desired lines choose the desired line style Changing or removing existing borders To change the thickness style or color of an existing bord
495. wish The curve follows your clicks automatically When you draw a curve that returns to its starting point the drawing is automatically ended and converted into a closed curve If you want to obtain an open curve you must end the drawing with a double click at the desired end point 250 e Frames and drawings User Manual TextMaker Connectors straight elbow and curved The three Pal EF l Straight Connector Elbow Connector and Curved Connector tools allow you to draw connecting lines between two objects You can see the differences among these three kinds of connector in the following illustration A A A Straight Elbow Curved Connector Connector Connector To use one of these tools select it and then drag the mouse pointer from one object to another holding down the mouse button Tip When you move the mouse pointer over an object small blue boxes appear at various points on the object These boxes indicate where the connector line can dock to the object Rectangles rounded rectangles and ellipses circles The three agg Rectangle Rounded Rectangle and Ellipse Circle tools allow you to draw rectangles and ellipses To use one of these tools draw a rectangle of the desired size with the mouse at the desired position Tip When you hold down the Shift key Shift while drawing you will obtain a square or a circle In the case of rounded rectangles you can change the rounding of the corners To do this select the r
496. within the frame will be indented by half an inch with respect to the frame edge Borders property sheet Here you can specify bordering lines for the frame The options on this property sheet correspond to those for the Format gt Borders command see section Borders and lines beginning on page 92 Shades property sheet Here you can specify a shaded or patterned background for the frame The options on this property sheet correspond to those for the Format gt Shading command see section Shading beginning on page 90 Setting the beginning page for a header and footer The header and footer are parts of the so called master page see also section Master pages beginning on page 107 As required you can set the page of the document on which you want the master page including the header and footer to begin to be applied for display and printing For example when using pre printed letterheads it is desirable that the header and footer should be printed only on pages 2 and following To set the beginning page invoke the Format gt Chapter command and change the setting for Starts on page in the Master page group box Here enter the number of the page beginning on which the header and footer should appear in our example you would enter 2 Different headers footers on left and right facing pages In books different headers and footers are often used on left and right facing pages For example
497. word in the text with it If one of the suggested words is the one that is preferred Primary spelling will appear after that word see the previous section Change Lets you correct the word after you have chosen the correct spelling from the list of suggestions If TextMaker should ever make a suggestion that is in fact wrong you can enter the correct spelling in the Change to field manually SmartText Lets you define a SmartText entry See section SmartTexts beginning on page 297 Ignore Ignores the mistake and removes the blue underline Ignore All Ignores all further instances of this word 290 e Language tools User Manual TextMaker Note Use Ignore or Ignore All only for words that are correctly written but are not to be added to the dictionary When you exit TextMaker it forgets the list of ignored words Add Advises TextMaker to add the word to its user dictionary TextMaker remembers such words permanently they are from now on not underlined in blue see note Close Closes the dialog box without applying a change Note Use the Add command only for those German words underlined in blue that are in fact correctly spelled according to the new German spelling rules If you allow words with old spellings rather than new spellings to be added you will be supplying TextMaker with incorrectly spelled words Settings for the new German spelling The behavior of the function for converting German words t
498. xt entry named ti containing Thank you for your inquiry Now you can call out this SmartText entry at any time Simply type ti and then press the space bar the Enter key or a punctuation character key Immediately ti is replaced with Thank you for your inquiry In this way you can use TextMaker to put together a personal computer shorthand and save a lot of typing time In this section you will learn all about TextMaker s SmartText feature E Creating SmartText entries SmartText entries can be created either with the Insert gt SmartText command the background spell checker or the on the fly spell checker You give the SmartText entry a name e g ti and then enter the desired content e g Thank you for your inquiry Inserting SmartText entries To call up a SmartText simply type its name and then press the space bar the Enter key or a punctuation character The name will be immediately replaced by the content provided merely that the Expand SmartText entries option has been activated in the preferences Alternatively SmartText entries can be inserted manually using the command Insert gt SmartText Editing SmartText entries You can create new SmartText entries with the command Insert gt SmartText in addition you can edit format rename and delete existing entries here Detailed information is provided on the following pages Creating SmartText entrie
499. y To make a document s tables of references reflect the current state of the document you must update them You do this as follows 1 When you want to update the index invoke Extras gt Index gt Generate Index When you want to update the table of contents invoke Extras gt Generate Table of Contents When you want to update the bibliography invoke Extras gt Bibliography gt Generate Bibliography 2 Make sure that the Placement option in the dialog box is set to Replace existing table 3 Confirm with OK TextMaker immediately removes the existing table and replaces it with an updated version Important Before printing a document containing tables of references always remember to update the tables so that they reflect the document s current state Editing and formatting tables of references In theory tables of contents indices and bibliographies can be edited just like normal text However you should take note of the following Important If you change the content and or formatting of a table of references manually your changes will be lost when TextMaker subsequently updates it because the updating process involves the removal and reinsertion of the table It follows that manual changes to text or formatting in a table of references make sense only when your document is 100 ready for printing and the table will not have to be updated again Normally it is not necessary to ch
500. y for example because it has only two lines the entire paragraph is placed on the next page Non breaking spaces In certain cases it is necessary to keep two words that are separated by a white space character on the same line TextMaker knows nothing about this and possibly puts the words on separate lines when it automatically inserts line breaks An example You want all the parts of the expression 29 80 USD to remain together and unbroken whenever it is printed You can ensure this by inserting a so called non breaking or protected space between 29 80 and USD To insert such a space press the key combination Ctrl Shift Space Ctrl Shift Space instead of the space bar alone When printed the non breaking space becomes a normal space It differs only in directing TextMaker to ensure that the words between which it is placed are not separated on two lines 96 e Paragraph formatting User Manual TextMaker Page formatting You specify the page formatting of a document with the File gt Page Setup command Among the options you can set are the following E Paper size e g letter format m Orientation portrait format or landscape format E Page margins m Headers and footers see also Master pages Note Changes of these settings affect the entire document unless you divide the document into chapters Each chapter can have its own page formatting You should divide the document into c
501. y headings of specified levels But what if you want to examine what is contained at lower levels under a single heading The following alternative methods are available to you E and buttons in the Outline toolbar You can position the text cursor in the desired heading and then click on one of the following buttons in the Outline toolbar Button Function expands the view to include the next lower level S collapses the view to exclude all lower levels E and symbols left of the text paragraphs Alternatively you can make use of the plus or minus symbol that is displayed immediately to the left of each heading in Outline view A indicates that the heading contains subordinate headings or normal text paragraphs that are currently hidden A on the other hand indicates that whatever is immediately subordinate to the heading is already visible A double click on a makes the content at all levels below the paragraph visible a double click on hides everything at the lower levels Editing text in Outline view It is possible to enter edit and format text in Outline view However the normal view is better suited for these tasks and it is recommended that you switch back to normal view to perform them Deleting copying and moving text On the other hand the Outline view is especially well suited for deleting copying and moving headings together with associated text The easie
502. y positioned Accept all changes Accepts all changes in the entire document Reject all changes Rejects all changes in the entire document Review all changes Opens a dialog box in which all changes are listed To accept or remove a change first click on the change in the list and then click on the Accept or Reject button Corresponds to the menu command Extras gt Changes gt Review All Changes Show changes on off Turns the Show Changes option on or off When the option is enabled changes are highlighted in color as described in the previous section When it is disabled the document appears as if all changes had been accepted Corresponds to the menu command Extras gt Changes gt Show Changes 410 e Document revisions User Manual TextMaker Settings for the Track changes function With the command Extras gt Changes gt Options you can set various options for the Track changes function Note You can also access this dialog box by invoking the command File gt Properties and changing to the Reviewing property sheet The following options are available Comments and Comments pane group boxes The options in these two group boxes pertain not to the Track changes function but to the insertion of comments You will find information about them in section Using comments beginning on page 401 m Track changes Turns the tracking of changes on off Corresponds to the 2 icon in the Reviewi
503. y pressing the L L key whenever the list of quick paths is opened Using quick paths Quick paths are available in all file dialogs for example the dialogs for the File gt Open and Object gt New Picture commands To invoke a quick path do the following 1 Click on the Quick path button in a file dialog 428 e Document management User Manual TextMaker 2 A menu of all the previously defined quick paths opens Select the desired quick path TextMaker now changes to the folder specified for the quick path Editing and deleting quick paths To modify the name or target folder of a quick path do the following 1 Click on the Quick path button in a file dialog 2 A menu opens Select the Change quick path command from it 3 A dialog box appears Select the desired quick path from the Name of quick path list box 4 Click on Change to edit the name or path or on Delete to remove the quick path Document summary You can use the command File gt Properties not only to make document specific settings but also to enter summary information about the document The summary contains additional information subject author keywords etc about a document To examine or edit it invoke the command File gt Properties and switch to the Summary property sheet Properties xi Summary view Colors Fax Internet Info Protection Forms Reviewing File name Glasgow tmd Folder C Docs Scotland Title
504. y resetting the auto number to one at the appropriate places Proceed as follows 1 Move the text cursor to the place at which the numbering should be reset to begin a new sequence 2 Invoke the Insert gt Breaks gt Section Break command 3 Invoke the Format gt Section command 4 Make sure that the Apply to option in the formatting dialog box is set to Current section 5 Check the Restart auto numbers option 6 Confirm with OK It should not surprise you that most of the options in the Format gt Section dialog have to do with text columns Sections exist not merely to allow auto numbers to be reset but also to facilitate multi column layouts Adding line numbers Apart from the various kinds of numbering functions described in the preceding sections TextMaker provides a function that inserts line numbers alongside a document s text The line numbers appear in the left margin both on the display and on the printed page To instruct TextMaker to show line numbers proceed as follows 1 Select as necessary the text segment for which line numbers are to be shown 2 Invoke the Format gt Section command 3 Switch to the Line numbers property sheet 170 e Automatic numbering User Manual TextMaker 4 Check the Show line numbers option 5 As necessary make the required settings for the numbering see below 6 Confirm with OK The line numbers are immediately displayed If you later want to turn
505. you are back in the text This gives us an opportunity to place the complementary close under the last line of the text Enter a blank line there with and type With best regards M C Escher Escher amp Sons Architects With this our letter is essentially finished In this next and last lesson segment all we want to do is place a line above the footer to emphasize it better Lines and borders Note You will find detailed information about this topic in section Borders and lines beginning on page 92 In a letter a line is often drawn between the footer and the body text This is very easily accomplished in TextMaker with the command Format gt Borders Its purpose is to put a border around a paragraph or to put single lines along the left right top and or bottom edges To place a line above the footer click in the first line of the footer and invoke the command Format gt Borders A dialog box appears 54 e The TextMaker Tour User Manual TextMaker Paragraph Border r Clearance r Sample Left ow a J Right ow a Top ow a A Bottom 13 pt Bounds indents E Color Mislack 4 cms The dialog box for Format gt Borders The Sample field not only shows you how the bordered paragraph will look it also allows you to choose with mouse clicks which lines are to b
506. your operating system constitute a huge reservoir of characters These include for example the Arial Tahoma and Times New Roman fonts supplied with Windows 4 Select the desired character by clicking on it Then press the Enter key or click on the Insert button to insert the character into the text Alternatively you can double click on a character to select and immediately insert it 5 You can repeat the above described procedure to insert additional characters as required When you are finished exit the dialog with the Close button Tip for Windows users Most Windows versions include two symbol fonts named Symbol and Wingdings These fonts contain many symbols that could be useful to you as bullets for example Automatic numbering TextMaker has several functions that generate enumerations automatically This chapter will teach you everything you need to know about them mu Simple enumerations The first section describes the Format gt Bullets and Numbering command This command is helpful for numbering paragraphs A number is inserted to the left of each successive paragraph and each paragraph is indented to accommodate the number a Numbered lists You can also create numbered lists with this command The numbering scheme for a numbered list can be saved and reused In addition a numbered list can be organized hierarchically 1 1 1 1 1 1 etc Numbered headings You can also use numbere
507. ypeface Size Style Language FE 32 Y Regular v Y Default x Styles Underline Text color C Small caps C Continuous Weck x E Al caps E Words only Background color Strike out C Hidden Single Transparent x C Blink C Protected Double Sample AaBbCcxXxYvZz The Format gt Character dialog box provides several property sheets and you can switch between them by clicking on one of the property sheet tabs along the top of the window Font property sheet For selecting the typeface and font size font styles like bold italic and underlined colors and language m Spacing property sheet For changing super and subscript properties character spacing and character pitch Links property sheet For inserting and editing Internet links You will find information about this topic in section Creating links beginning on page 418 Modifying character formatting There are two ways to modify character formatting E After text has been entered you can modify character formatting by selecting the desired text invoking the Format gt Character command and making the desired changes E As you type new text you can modify character formatting by pausing to select the format for the text to follow with the Format gt Character dialog and then continuing to type For example you can select a new font From that point on all text that you enter will appear in the new font until you again m
508. ze gt Keyboard mappings command To do this proceed as follows 1 Invoke the command Extras gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings 2 Select the desired keyboard mapping 3 Click on Apply to activate it Now the shortcuts defined in this keyboard mapping become available As stated in the introduction all the shortcuts for all the commands are stored in a keyboard mapping Accordingly when you switch between two keyboard mappings all the shortcuts change By default the following two keyboard mappings are pre defined Standard The standard mapping it contains all the keyboard shortcuts described in this manual e g Ctrl s Ctrl S for save TextMaker Classic A largely WordStar compatible keyboard mapping for users who have worked previously with WordStar TextMaker for DOS or other programs with a WordStar compatible keyboard mapping Tip You will find a table for the Standard keyboard mapping in chapter Keyboard shortcuts beginning on page 489 If necessary you can modify either of these two standard mappings and also create your own keyboard mappings a topic which is covered in the following sections Creating a new keyboard mapping The Extras gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings command gives you the means of putting together complete keyboard mappings Thus you can set up different keyboard mappings for to be used for different purposes and switch between them as needed 480 e Customi
509. zing TextMaker User Manual TextMaker Note When all you want to do is add or change a few keyboard shortcuts it is not necessary to set up your own keyboard mapping Simply click on the Edit button and modify the standard keyboard mapping itself You create a new keyboard mapping as follows 1 Invoke the command Extras gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings 2 Choose the existing keyboard mapping that you want to use as a basis for the new one Note The new keyboard mapping will automatically be assigned all the keyboard shortcuts contained in the mapping you choose here 3 Click the New button 4 A dialog box appears and prompts you to enter a name for the new keyboard mapping Enter for example My keyboard mapping and then confirm with OK The new keyboard mapping is now set up Next a dialog appears to allow you to modify the shortcuts contained in it You will find information about this in section Editing the shortcuts in a keyboard mapping beginning on page 482 Renaming or deleting a keyboard mapping User created keyboard mappings can be renamed or deleted at any time These tasks are carried out as follows 1 Invoke the Extras gt Customize gt Keyboard mappings command 2 Select the keyboard mapping you want to delete or rename with a mouse click 3 Click on Rename to give it a new name Or Click on Delete to delete it You can rename or delete only keyboard mappings that you have created your

TextMaker 2006 User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents